Math Concepts You Teach in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/category/math-concepts/ Student-Centered Math Lessons Wed, 07 Feb 2024 17:30:03 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.3 Teaching Probability in 7th Grade https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/#respond Tue, 13 Feb 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=90391 Probability is a great way to end the school year! There are ample opportunities for hands-on practice, experiments, and the computation is fairly simple. Let’s talk about tips for making the most out of this 7th grade skill. Note: I found so many great probability activities as I was researching that I am going to […]

The post Teaching Probability in 7th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Probability is a great way to end the school year! There are ample opportunities for hands-on practice, experiments, and the computation is fairly simple. Let’s talk about tips for making the most out of this 7th grade skill.

Note: I found so many great probability activities as I was researching that I am going to put together another blog post dedicated to just that, so be sure to check back.

Vertical Alignment

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Probability is an isolated skill. In CCSS, 6th grade and 8th grade do not have any probability concepts. However, multiplying fractions will be a key skill needed that does come from 5th and 6th grade and is covered again in 7th grade (7.NS.2). Be sure to review multiplying and simplifying fractions as well as vocabulary like numerator and denominator.

Teaching probability will reinforce so many important skills – solving proportions, converting fractions to decimals (for relative frequency), etc! This is a great unit to cover before reviewing for state tests to review these key concepts. 

Hook/Real-World

As I was putting this information together, I realized that pretty much every hook is an experiment or something that you should actually do with your students. Therefore, I will offer you this clip from the movie “21” where the Monty Hall problem is explained. This can cause some spirited debate once students have learned the basics of probability.

Make It Hands-On

Practically every probability problem can be acted out!  For introducing and explaining independent and dependent events, provide a baggie and colored tiles for each group.

For independent events, have students physically take one colored tile out of the bag and then replace it, so they could see the denominator stayed the same since the total number of tiles remained the same once replaced.

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

For dependent events, have students physically take one colored tile out of the bag and place it on their desk, so they could see that now the denominator, or the total number of tiles in the bag had changed. This helps them to see that they need to subtract one from the total. This also helps them see that they would need to subtract one from the numerator if there was more than one of that color. For example: what is the probability of drawing 2 yellow tiles without replacement in a bag with 2 yellow tiles and 3 pink tiles? P(y, y) = (2/5) (1/4) Assuming they got a yellow the first time, there is only 1 yellow left and 4 total tiles left.

Number Cubes/Dice

Your students may be tempted to make a silly mistake when solving simple probability with number cubes. Misconception: Let’s say that the problem was calculating the probability of rolling a 4; students would want to write 4/6 because they saw the 4. 

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Solution:  Have students write out the numbers included on a number cube: 1 2 3 4 5 6 and circle the 4. Then they could see there was 1 possible outcome out of 6 total.

This is a great way for students to show their work. Probability of rolling an odd? Students write out 1 2 3 4 5 6 and circle all of the odd numbers to see that there are 3/6. You can also have students do this with the complement. Probability of not rolling a 3 (P’(3))? List out 1 2 3 4 5 6. Cross out the 3 since they want the probability of NOT getting a 3, and then circle the remaining numbers.

Theoretical vs. Experimental

Theoretical probability answers the question, “What should happen?” while experimental probability answers the question, “What actually happened?” Maneuvering the Middle has a fantastic Theoretical and Experimental Station Activity that will allow students to draw conclusions from multiple experiments. You can find this activity in our Probability Activity Bundle.

Other Tips + Useful Tools

  • Usually I recommend anchor charts with math concepts or vocabulary, but for probability I recommend anchor charts on what is included in a deck of cards (suites, face cards, colors) and how many sides a dice has.
Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • This online probability generator includes editable spinners, bags of marbles, deck of cards, a random number generator, and a dice. You can use this to demonstrate concepts or for students to practice theoretical vs. experimental probability.
  • This online Wheel of Names Spinner can be altered to include any word. 

Are you ready to teach probability? What tips do you have for teaching probability?

Probability is a 7th grade skill that reinforces so many other math skills. Check out these tips for helping your students master probability. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Probability in 7th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/auto-draft/feed/ 0
10 System of Equations Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/10-system-of-equations-activities/ Tue, 23 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88855 System of Equations – there is so much to cover that it can feel overwhelming! Let’s keep this substantial math concept light and bright with some fun and engaging activities for your 8th grade and Algebra 1 students. I will be honest, I did not expect all of this goodness to exist out there for […]

The post 10 System of Equations Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
System of Equations – there is so much to cover that it can feel overwhelming! Let’s keep this substantial math concept light and bright with some fun and engaging activities for your 8th grade and Algebra 1 students.

I will be honest, I did not expect all of this goodness to exist out there for Systems of Equations! While I will definitely be linking to our fantastic resources, I am also linking some amazing task-like resources that will make sense of all of the typical system of equation word problems.

For Graphing

  1. Systems of Two Linear Equations (Demos) This is a great way to introduce the concept that every point on a graph is a solution and the intersection is a solution to both equations. There is a whole class interaction aspect of this Desmos Activity that is pretty awesome! I would recommend this on Day 1 of graphing.
  2. System of Equations Scavenger Hunt – This is a literal scavenger hunt complete with map. Students will practice graphing systems and solving for y. “This activity has a twist–figuring out where the friends are going to meet! So fun! This is one of my favorite resources!” -E.G. Perfect as a formative assessment on day 2 of graphing.
  3. Algebra 1 Systems Performance Task – This Bowling Alley Performance task was designed specifically for Algebra 1 since it also includes a system of inequalities problem. The task asks students to compare the costs of food, shirts, and bowling ball weights at two competing bowling alleys.  It can be an alternative to assessment or a review before your unit test. It is available in our Algebra 1 Systems Activity Bundle.

All System of Equations Methods

  1. The Custom Ink Project – This free activity (complete with handout and PowerPoint file) mixes a little art and a lot of math. Students design and price t-shirts, and then analyze their profits.
  2. Dan Meyer Coin Problem – Gosh, I love this problem. Traditional coin problems can be dry and not engaging. This short video clip (30 second clip of a person putting coins into a coin counting machine) combined with a few question prompts will have all of your students trying to solve.
  3. Desmos Card Sort This card sort activity would make a great station or warm up. It has a little bit of everything – sorting systems into the best method to solve and a few practice problems for each method of solving.
  4. Dueling Discounts – Dan Meyer has another great way for students to approach systems. When provided with two coupons – 20% off and $20 off – what is the better deal on various items? At what dollar amount does it shift?

Other Helpful Things

  1. These puzzles developed by Heather Sparks aren’t your typical math problems. They would make a great extension or bell ringer during your systems unit.
  2. System of Equations Unit Review Error Analysis – Error Analysis develops both procedural and conceptual understanding. It allows students to think behind the HOW and into the WHY. Encourage mathematical discourse by assigning it as partner work at the end of your unit.
  3. CCSS System of Equations Unit | CCSS Algebra 1 Systems UnitTEKS Algebra 1 Systems Unit |  – Not ready to jump into activities yet? Do you need a liiiiiiittle push in the right direction with instruction? Never fear. Our units are packed with planning resources, student handouts, independent practice, a unit review, and a unit assessment. 

What system of equation activities do you implement in your classroom?

The post 10 System of Equations Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/read-before-teaching-pythagorean-theorem/ Tue, 16 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88842 Let’s talk about my favorite theorem, Pythagorean’s! Though it ranked 4 out of 100 in mathematicians, Paul and Jack Abad’s, list of 100 Greatest Theorems, I know it ranks number 1 in most middle school math teachers’ hearts. Vertical Alignment Before I jump into any topic, I like to see what students already know. Our […]

The post Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s talk about my favorite theorem, Pythagorean’s! Though it ranked 4 out of 100 in mathematicians, Paul and Jack Abad’s, list of 100 Greatest Theorems, I know it ranks number 1 in most middle school math teachers’ hearts.

Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

Before I jump into any topic, I like to see what students already know. Our units are complete with vertical planning, so I don’t have to search far to see that students have used equations to solve for unknown angles. Now we just need to make the jump to side lengths!

Plethora of Hook Opportunities

There are so many compelling ways to introduce Pythagorean Theorem to your students. In fact, the more context and real-world examples you can provide about the math they are learning, the more investment your students will have.

This Who Wants to Be a Millionaire video clip is kind of silly, but is a short and easy way to exclaim, “YOU MIGHT BE ASKED THIS ON A GAME SHOW FOR MONEY” or more likely, be asked on the street by someone making a video for TikTok. 

Day Mayer’s Three Act – The Taco Cart was recommended by many teachers in a Middle School Math Facebook group. I would show the first video and present it as, “By the end of this unit, you will be able to solve this problem.” This Desmos Adaptation is a great digital version.

Go Hands-On

Pythagorean Theorem is incredibly visual, but it is also incredibly kinetic. Let’s encourage students to manipulate and play to develop an understanding of how and why the Pythagorean Theorem works. You can do this in a variety of ways:

  • Cheez Its or Starbursts
Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Know the Parts

One of the most common misconceptions students will face is identifying the legs and the hypotenuse on a triangle especially when the triangle is orientated in a different way.

Provide ample opportunities for students to label and annotate the right triangle before moving onto any calculations. Here is a non-exhaustive list of all the ways to help students labeling parts correctly:

  • Start with the parts in the formula before using variables
    • hypotenuse^2 = leg ^2 + leg ^2
Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Hypotenuse is the longest word and therefore the longest side
  • Have students draw an arrow directly across the right angle (like I did in pink above) to the hypotenuse and label it first thing as hypotenuse = c first! This reinforces the idea that students should double check that it is a right angle before assuming it is a right angle.
  • If a student feels hung up on the orientation of a right triangle (because it isn’t “right”), encourage students to turn their paper until the right triangle looks “right” to them.

Practice, Practice, Practice

There is a hierarchy of math practice. Students need to build up fluency, so they are able to tackle the more complex problem types. If they can’t square a number, take a square root of a number, or solve an equation for a variable, then they will struggle to solve application problems involving Pythagorean Theorem.

Pythagorean Theorem Maze Practice – This practice is scaffolded. One maze uses solely whole numbers, and then students can move on to problems involving rational numbers. 

Pythagorean Theorem He Said, She Said ActivityError analysis is beneficial for procedural and conceptual understanding. It allows students to think behind the HOW and into the WHY. These types of problems are great for partner work and encourage mathematical discourse. 

Pythagorean Theorem Performance Task – If you are looking for an alternative to a unit test, may I recommend this math task? It provides multiple opportunities to show mastery of the Pythagorean Theorem, and it will encourage students to use multiple strategies of problem solving. What is the task? Students must design the layout of various attractions at a Harvest Festival. If you haven’t assigned a performance task in your classroom, be sure to check out these performance tasks tips and tricks.

Other Pythagorean Theorem Tips

  • Does this side length make sense? Reasonableness is always something to be challenging students to consider. This develops their number sense (which is important when 8th graders are using calculators). When students are solving equations that are multi-step, I find that students can get so excited they leave off the last step. In the case of the Pythagorean Theorem, it is taking the final square root. I like to faux forget the last step and box my answer and wait for students to call me out! Then I would ask, “Does this answer make sense?” If I have side lengths of 12 and 9 inches, would the last side make sense at 225 inches?
  • Posting an anchor chart of perfect squares can be a great way to reinforce students memorizing perfect squares. If students quickly know these math facts it will serve them well in Algebra 1, so this is a great time to work on that skill. Our 8th Grade Math and Algebra 1 Fast Pass have a list of perfect squares, so download the freebie and give it to your students to reference.

What tips do you have for teaching Pythagorean Theorem?

Read this blog post for tips and activities for introducing and teaching Pythagorean Theorem to your 8th grade students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Read Before Teaching Pythagorean Theorem appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-steps-to-mastering-systems-of-equations/ Tue, 09 Jan 2024 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=88817 Is there anything more satisfying than solving a system of equations problem? That might be the nerdiest sentence ever published on this blog, but it is true! I loved learning systems of equations as a student, and I loved teaching it as a teacher. Let’s jump into the 3 methods for mastering systems of equations. […]

The post 3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Is there anything more satisfying than solving a system of equations problem? That might be the nerdiest sentence ever published on this blog, but it is true! I loved learning systems of equations as a student, and I loved teaching it as a teacher. Let’s jump into the 3 methods for mastering systems of equations.

This post is full, so be on the lookout for part 2 where we will discuss various systems activities for your classroom.

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

Solving systems of equations starts in 8th grade and carries on being explicitly taught in Algebra 2. If you are an 8th grade teacher, you aren’t exactly starting from scratch.

Students will need to be proficient at:

  • Solving for a single variable (in this case y) and graphing lines in slope-intercept form (for solving by graphing)
  • Rational number operations (for elimination and substitution)
  • Combining like terms and distributing (for substitution)

If your students aren’t up to speed with these skills, don’t fret! There is plenty of time to refresh and practice as you introduce systems of equations. I mention this to remind you that students will not be able to solve systems of equations problems without this foundation, so give your students time + practice!

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

System of Equations Overview

We can often jump in with the methods to solve so quickly that we don’t properly explain what we are solving for apart from saying x and y.

Remind students daily (or even before every problem) that solving systems means we are looking for a solution that makes both equations true! Then reinforce that this is where the lines will intersect on a graph.

Let’s dive into each method for solving systems of equations. 

Graphing

The method that I recommend starting with is solving systems of equations by graphing. Due to its visual nature, I find that it makes the abstract nature of solving 2 equations more concrete.

As you introduce this skill, start with the basics of a single line. Remind and reinforce that any point that exists on that single line is a solution to that equation! You can ask students to choose a point on the line, plug in the x and y values, and show them that the equation is a true statement! You can also do the opposite – have students choose and plug in a point that is not on the line to prove that it is not a solution to the equation.

Then you can move to the conclusion that the intersection of two lines is a solution to the system of equations! When students find the point of intersection, plug that point into both equations to find that it is a solution for both equations! (Wow! I am getting pretty excited writing about this!)

Other tips:

  • If there was ever time to have your 8th grade or Algebra 1 students move their bodies around, it is this! Arms crossing for one solution, arms parallel for no solution, and arms overlapping for infinitely many solutions. 
  • Students often get stuck with how to graph vertical and horizontal lines, such as y = 3 or x = 2. It is helpful to say it as a sentence, “The y-values will always be equal to 5.” Students can plot 2-3 points with a y-value of 3 and visually see that it will be a horizontal line that also intersects the y-axis at 3.
These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Students will have to be proficient at solving for y! In fact, I wrote an entire blog post for this specific skill here.

Substitution

It is my recommendation that substitution is going to require a minimum of 2 days. For it to be done well, I recommend building a strong conceptual foundation of what substitution is before trying to actually solve anything by substituting.

I love these two ideas that I found while researching this topic. This first idea I can attribute to a teacher’s explanation in a Facebook Thread (I am going to summarize with bullet points to make it easier to follow):

  • Write a whole number on the board.
  • Ask students to write down as many different equivalent expressions of that number
  • If the number is 6, then: 3(2), 4+2, 7-1 and so on. 
  • Make the point that expressions can look different but still be equivalent.
  • Next, add variables. x=6, then: x=3+3 and x=3(2).
  • Now have students substitute their expressions for x: 3+3 = 3(2).

This blog post breaks down in painstaking detail how a visual aid (stars) makes substitution more concrete. While I used a similar technique with colored Post-it Notes, I think you will benefit from reading this teacher’s methodology. 

Other Tips:

  • One solution, no solution, infinitely many solutions will still pop up in substitution, so be sure to review. If variables cancel out and the remaining statement is true, the system has infinitely many solutions. Example: 2=2. If variables cancel out and the remaining statement is false, the system has no solution. Example: 2=/=3.
  • Distributing and managing negative signs is going to be a common error. Demonstrate and remind students that they can check their work by just plugging solutions in! This goes for elimination too!
  • If you need a fun, no-prep, and free activity for substitution, I recommend playing this “Who Wants to Be a Millionaire” style game as a class.

Elimination

This is my personal favorite – maybe it is because I like when standard form actually comes in handy!  I am hesitant to admit that I did not know why the elimination method worked until I wrote this post, so I want to share what I learned.

The Additional Property of Equality says that when you add the same quantity to both sides of an equation, you still have equality. 

For any expressions, a, b, c, and d,

If a = b

And c = d

Then a+c = b+d

Whenever I present that type of information to my students, I prefer to give a few examples with numbers.

So let’s says a = 2, b = 2, c = 1, and d = 1

If 2=2

And 1=1

Then 2+1 = 2+1

If you didn’t follow that, perhaps this color coded image will make more sense?

Other Tips:

  • Students seem to prefer elimination to substitution! I would give students the opportunity to practice changing y = mx+b into standard form. 
  • Provide lots of practice multiplying to clear the fractions.
  • Don’t forget to go back and solve for the other variable. This is why you should save elimination for after substitution. 

 What tips would you add to solving the system of equations?

These tips for teaching the 3 methods for solving systems of equations will benefit your students in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Steps to Mastering Systems of Equations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/division-strategies-for-5th-grade/ Tue, 12 Dec 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=87421 I will never forget my first day learning long division in third grade – the multiple steps, the division, followed by multiplication…then subtraction?? What? Fortunately, while that is the only way I ever learned division, there are now numerous other options for division, so students can feel successful. And though I believe the standard division […]

The post 4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I will never forget my first day learning long division in third grade – the multiple steps, the division, followed by multiplication…then subtraction?? What?

Fortunately, while that is the only way I ever learned division, there are now numerous other options for division, so students can feel successful. And though I believe the standard division algorithm is a necessity for math, it doesn’t have to be the only way students learn and internalize division.  

Before we jump into division, a quick reminder of the types of division we have. We have partitive division and measurement division.

In a Partitive division problem, the number of groups is known, and you are solving for the number in each group. Think of it like this – I have 12 cookies and want to divide them evenly by 4 children. How many cookies does each child receive?

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In a measurement division problem, the number in each group is known, and you are solving for the number of groups. For example, I have 12 cookies and want to give each child 4 cookies. How many children can receive 4 cookies?

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now that we’ve reviewed the two types of division, here are 4 division strategies to try!

1. Partial Quotient Division

Partial quotient division does exactly what it sounds like – you work to find parts of the quotient (answer) and then add them together to find the overall quotient. 

Let’s take 432/18…

Here is a takeaway that will make teaching partial quotient division more accessible for your students; don’t try to have students do all of their multiples of 18 (which is normal when teaching the standard algorithm). It isn’t necessary. Instead, have students do friendly numbers. Depending on your dividend and divisor, this could be 10 or 100. In our case, 10 makes more sense, so 18×10=180.  Also, if I go ahead and find 18×2=36, it is painless to find 18×20=360. 

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Another math tidbit I love is that instead of trying to multiply by 4, it is easier (to me) to multiply by 2 twice. 

You can see in the example above, that I was able to find that 18 went into 432 twenty times and then 18 went into 72 four times. I simply add the partial quotients of 20 and 4 to find the quotient of 24.

Lastly, partial quotients are a great tool because students can find the answer in a variety of ways. Take a look below for another way to solve 432/18.

2. Equivalent Ratios

This is a great strategy for division that reinforces ratios! This may not work for every division problem, but it is similar to partial quotients in that you can work in baby steps to get your quotient. Familiarize your students with these division rules:

  • Numbers that end in an even number are divisible by 2.
  • Numbers that end in a 0 and 5 are divisible by 5.
  • Numbers that end in a 0 are divisible by 10.

Once your students have mastered those rules, you can introduce:

  • Numbers with the last 2 digits divisible by 4 are divisible by 4 (ex: 1016, 3412, 1004)
  • If the sum of the digits is divisible by 3, then the number is divisible by 3 (ex: 342. 3+4+2 = 9. 9 is divisible by 3, therefore, 342 is divisible by 3.) 
If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Even if your student cannot get all the way down to 1, they can still divide smaller and more manageable numbers by simplifying. In this example, you can think of it as partitive division, 25 represents the number in 1 group.

3. Multiplying Up

To use the method of Multiplying Up, rewrite the division problem as a multiplication problem. Let’s take the example of 1665/15 =111. Multiplying up asks “15 x ___ = 1655?”

We know that 15×100 = 1500 gets us close to 1665. We can work from there by adding 150 (10 groups of 15) and then again 15 (1 group of 15). 100 + 10 + 1 = 111. Therefore, 1500 + 150 +15 = 1665.

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Repeated Subtraction

Repeated subtraction is similar to multiplying up (and partial quotient) but backwards. Obviously, these are all related! I think it works best when you are working with dividing numbers with unfriendly divisors (think 3 digit). 

Which division strategy will you try with your 5th grade or upper elementary students?

Related content: Check out this post on Dividing Fractions.

If your students are struggling with division using the standard algorithm, then try one of these 4 division strategies! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Division Strategies for 5th Grade appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/#comments Tue, 05 Dec 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/21/math-review-games/ Students do so much sitting in a day.  During a very long professional development, my principal looked at her watch and said, “We have just hit 75 minutes — the length of a class period.”  I was shocked at how much my body just wanted to escape my chair for a walk or a stretch […]

The post 3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Students do so much sitting in a day.  During a very long professional development, my principal looked at her watch and said, “We have just hit 75 minutes — the length of a class period.”  I was shocked at how much my body just wanted to escape my chair for a walk or a stretch break. 

According to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,Movement increases the heart rate and stimulates brain function, which facilitates a child’s ability to learn,” so here are three “Get Up and Move” activities that I implemented in my classroom. 

[Note: Some of these activities are included in Maneuvering the Middle’s All Access subscription or can be purchased here, but I am going to explain how you might prepare for and execute these activities if you are not a middle school math teacher.]

Math review games can breath life into your classroom and teaching. Most students enjoy getting out of their seats and going their work in another part of the class, whether that be with a group or individually. |maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math Review Game: FLYSWATTER

The flyswatter game was around when I was a student – I remember playing it in my Spanish class!  Students love this game, and they ask for it daily.  Since it is a very low lift, I would use it as an incentive for finished work.

PLANNING

Project around 10 answers on the board.  (I don’t recommend writing the answers on the whiteboard with dry erase markers because they will get rubbed off.)  You need two flyswatters.  Tape a line on the floor parallel to the board, about five feet from the board.  This is where students will stop to hear their problem.  

The flyswatter game works with problems that are fluency-based.  We are going for speed here.  Here is a suggestion: fraction, decimal, and percent equivalents.  You could project these answers: 40%, 25%, 0.6, ½, etc…

EXECUTION

Divide students into two groups.  Boys versus girls is my go-to. They should be in 2 lines facing the board.  Set the expectation that you will not call out a problem until it is silent.  When the first two opponents are up, you could say, “Two fifths!”  The student who hit 40% first would win and stay in the game, and the other student would take a seat.  The fly swatters are passed on.  The winner would go to the back of the line, and the next two students would be up.  You keep playing until there is one player left.

Math Review Game:  SCAVENGER HUNT

This is by far my favorite activity.  You can read more details on how to execute a scavenger hunt in this post. It’s self-checking, and you could pull or work with a small group during this activity.

MATH REVIEW GAME: Cake Walk

PLANNING 

Similar to a cake walk, students will be up and walking in a circle, so consider that when arranging desks/chairs and/or giving directions for how you want them to walk. I had tables and would push them to the side of the room and arrange chairs in a large circle. Each chair needs to be numbered. 

Have your problems ready on a slideshow. Students will need scratch paper and a clipboard to write on.

EXECUTION

Play music while students walk around the chairs. Stop the music, students sit, and you project a problem. Students then work on the problem. Use a random number generator to pick the chair number. The student sitting in that chair gets a prize (could be bonus points on a test, free homework pass, sticker, piece of candy) if their work is correct. This activity is great for review before a unit test!

If you don’t have time to plan something special for students to get out of their seats, but you can feel the restlessness in the classroom, then you can still have students get up and move!  You can have students find a partner, work out a problem, and then move to find a new partner for the next problem. 

Math Concepts for Kinesthetic Learning

These concepts are perfect for students to use their body to act out. If you have more ideas, please comment below! 

  1. Positive slope, negative slope, undefined, zero
  2. Angles – acute, obtuse, 90 degrees, 180 degrees
  3. Transformations – translate (slide), rotations, reflections, dilations (greater than 1? Act out e x p a n d i n g, less than 1? Act out shrinking)
  4. Adding and subtracting decimals (act out lining up your buttons on a shirt with lining up decimals for adding and subtracting)
  5. Coordinate plane (body is the y axis, arms are the x axis, negative space creates the quadrants)
  6. Inequalities – arms for the greater than and less than signs
  7. Types of Functions – linear, U for quadratic, and exponential
  8. Parallel and perpendicular lines
  9. Types of solutions – arms crossed for one solution, parallel arms for no solution, and arms on top of each other for infinite solutions)

How do you get students moving in your classroom?  

Check out this related post: Turn Any Worksheet Into a Math Activity

Maneuvering the Middle has been writing and publishing blog posts for almost a decade! This post was originally published in 2016 and has been updated for clarity and relevance.

Math review games can breath life into your classroom and teaching. Most students enjoy getting out of their seats and going their work in another part of the class, whether that be with a group or individually. |maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Math Review Games to Get Students Moving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-review-games/feed/ 11
5 Multiplication Strategies https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-multiplication-strategies/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=86172 Do your students often make mistakes using the standard multiplication algorithm? Then this post is for you! Here are 5 alternative multiplication strategies for your upper elementary and middle school students. 1. Open Area Model The area model demonstrates that when multiplying two numbers, you can find partial products and add them together to find […]

The post 5 Multiplication Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Do your students often make mistakes using the standard multiplication algorithm? Then this post is for you! Here are 5 alternative multiplication strategies for your upper elementary and middle school students.

1. Open Area Model

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The area model demonstrates that when multiplying two numbers, you can find partial products and add them together to find the overall product. The open area model is my favorite alternative multiplication strategy and where I would start. After your students understand the basics of an array, the open area model is the next best model for students to fully see what is happening conceptually when multiplying (especially when multiplying 2 digits times 2+ digits). 

The steps are already built in. They know that each box needs to be filled in. This keeps students organized and (hopefully) more accurate. 

Additional benefits: this format will help students in high school Algebra multiplying and dividing polynomials.

2. Partial Product Multiplication

Partial product multiplication is the open area model without the boxes. Essentially, students are completing the exact same steps in the same order, but without the array format. While I wouldn’t start here, I think reinforcing the open area model with a partial product number sentence is the perfect progression. 

3. Distributive Property

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Using the distributive property is a multiplication strategy that will later reinforce another important math skill. Have students break down one of the factors into its expanded form and then multiply. 

4. Chunking Using a Ratio Table

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

You can use a ratio table to split a factor into chunks (in this case 24 was broken down into 4 and 20) to find partial products that are then added together to find the final product. Have students take advantage of friendly math like doubling and multiplying by 10. 

5. Over and Under

In order to use friendly numbers, multiply by more (or less) groups than necessary. Then, subtract the extra groups, or add the missing groups. 

In this example, I traded 18 for 20. After finding the product of 31 and 20, I found the product of 31 and 2 (since 20 – 18 = 2). I subtracted this product of 62 from 620 to find the answer to our original problem 18 x 31.

In this case, I shot under by trading 31 for 30. I knew I would be missing one group of 18 so I added that to the product of 30 and 18.

What multiplication strategy is your favorite? Interested in more multiplication posts, check out our posts on Multiplication Facts and the Distributive Property.

The standard algorithm isn't the only way to multiply! Try these 5 other multiplication strategies with your middle school students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Multiplication Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Proportional Relationships https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-proportional-relationships/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-proportional-relationships/#comments Tue, 24 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1186 Proportional relationships are ingrained in our everyday life.  While most students pick up on the process to solve fairly quickly, there is so much foundational, conceptual knowledge that we want to acknowledge and emphasize. Today, let’s examine how proportional relationships go far beyond just solving for a missing number and how to set a foundation […]

The post Teaching Proportional Relationships appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Proportional relationships are ingrained in our everyday life.  While most students pick up on the process to solve fairly quickly, there is so much foundational, conceptual knowledge that we want to acknowledge and emphasize.

Today, let’s examine how proportional relationships go far beyond just solving for a missing number and how to set a foundation for success in Algebra.

THE STANDARDS

7.RP.2 Recognize and represent proportional relationships between quantities.

  • 7.RP.2A  Decide whether two quantities are in a proportional relationship, e.g., by testing for equivalent ratios in a table or graphing on a coordinate plane 
  • 7.RP.2B  Identify the constant of proportionality (unit rate) in tables, graphs, equations, diagrams, and verbal descriptions of proportions.
  • 7.RP.2C  Represent proportional relationships by equations. 
  • 7.RP.2D  Explain what a point (x, y) on the graph of a proportional relationship means in terms of the situation, with special attention to the points (0, 0) and (1, r), where r is the unit rate.

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

Ideas for teaching proportional relationships (7.RP.2) - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Visual Representations

These standards are heavily weighted with visual representations, including tables, graphs on the coordinate plane, and diagrams.  Some students will have been exposed to these multiple representations in 6th grade with standard 6.RP.3 and equivalent ratiosThe goal is for students to fluently connect the table, equation, graph, verbal description, and even diagram together.  When given one piece of information, students should be able to represent that same information in multiple ways. Students who can do this will have a firm foundation for 8th grade math and Algebra 1.

Ideas for Teaching Proportional Relationships

There are tons of great ideas and activities out there, but below are a few of my favorite “tried and true.”  They are all easy to incorporate and provide scaffolding for students who struggle in the math classroom.

1. Multiple Representations Graphic Organizer

Some students need to see everything together, and that is where this multiple representations graphic organizer comes in handy.  It is the perfect size for students to show their work. I really like how the components stay the same, but the given information changes.

These are perfect for introducing the various visual representations, but it also can be reused in a clear pocket to use in tutoring or in math intervention.  Once students are familiar with the graphic organizer, I would even give students butcher paper and various pieces of information. Then, they would use markers to represent the remaining information.  This is a quick informal assessment idea or can even function as partner work for a Friday.

2. Highlight the Unit Rate/Constant of Proportionality

A quick trick to help students see all the connections is to use a highlighter!  Model and have students highlight the unit rate/constant of proportionality within the different representations.  This is perfect for representing k in the equation and in the table or meeting 7.RP.2D by labeling (1, r) on the graph.

Ideas for teaching proportional relationships (7.RP.2) - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Emphasize Vocabulary

Hopefully, students are familiar with the term “unit rate” and how to find it.  Constant of proportionality sounds so cumbersome and challenging.  Unit rate is often emphasized when we are talking about unit price (cost per ounce, etc), so I think students have trouble seeing a graph or a table and also using the phrase “unit rate.”  Either way, students need to be familiar with the verbiage and understand what a question is asking. Here is a more detailed explanation for why they are the same.

Ideas for teaching proportional relationships (7.RP.2) - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Common Misconceptions

  1. A relationship is not proportional unless (0,0) is visible in the table or graph
  2. Dividing x/y to find k
  3. General confusion about k
  4. General disconnect between k and proportions
  5. Proportional relationships only involve positive numbers
  6. Mixing up x and y on the table, when it is not explicitly stated

Anchor Chart Ideas

Anchor charts are fabulous ways to showcase the content in a visual manner for students to reference.  They can easily be created before the lesson or as you are teaching, depending on the content.  The visual representations of proportional relationships are perfect for anchor charts.

Solving proportions is a win with most students; however, there is valuable foundational conceptual understanding that we want students to grasp too. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Ideas for Struggling Students

  1. Practice finding different points in the proportion that aren’t listed on a table.
  2. Begin with the equation and use and input-output table to create a table.
  3. Use a four corners graphic organizer.
  4. Match multiple representations.
  5. Practice graphing with four quadrants (from 6th grade).

Hopefully, this gives you some ideas for teaching proportions or even insight as to what knowledge your students are coming with.  I would love to hear other great activities or ideas you have used! Feel free to share in the comments.

Ideas for teaching proportional relationships (7.RP.2) - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Check out some of our other math concepts posts: percents  | ratios | integers

What concept would you like to hear more from us about? 

The post Teaching Proportional Relationships appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-proportional-relationships/feed/ 7
Student-Centered Math Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/#comments Tue, 17 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1232 Planning student-centered math activities takes work! There is the actual planning and creating that takes time, but then there is also the actual classroom time to squeeze the activities into. I have five 7 favorite activities that are fun and engaging, but also help scaffold the learning.  I think that is why I love math […]

The post Student-Centered Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Planning student-centered math activities takes work! There is the actual planning and creating that takes time, but then there is also the actual classroom time to squeeze the activities into. I have five 7 favorite activities that are fun and engaging, but also help scaffold the learning. 

I think that is why I love math so much; it can be broken down into smaller components.  The key is being able to practice the different steps and skills with student-centered math activities.

Note: I have utilized these activities in various levels of classes. At one point, I taught all three levels of 8th grade math – intervention, on-level, and advanced – within the same year. While the content of the activities may change, the activities are perfect for any level.

CUT AND PASTES

Students Practice Breaking Down the Process

Why I Love Them: While a little messy, cut and pastes keep students using their hands and doing math at the same time. They work well independently, in partners, or working with a small group. I like providing multiple incorrect answers as well. This keeps kids thinking and is a way to incorporate mathematical practices through error analysis.

When to Use Them: Cut and pastes are great for anything that requires a step-by-step process from solving equations to adding and subtracting integers. This is perfect for advanced kiddos who want to go straight to the answer or intervention students who need to focus on one step at a time.

Teacher Tip from Donna E: “Cut and Paste Activities. I actually laminate these so there is no cutting and pasting. I use these more as a sorting activity. It cuts down the time and still works out their misconceptions.” If you are going this route, you can also make it a group activity to reduce the number of individual activities you have to prepare.

SHOP CUT AND PASTES

CARD SORTS

Students Practice Differentiating Similarities and Differences


Why I Love Them: Card sorts are an excellent way to quickly assess a student’s understanding of the concept. They require higher order thinking skills, as students are required to analyze the given information and make a categorization. Although they take a bit of time upfront (cutting and laminating), they can be used over and over again. I have used card sorts for the real number system, proportional relationships, word problems, statistical and nonstatistical questions, properties of geometric figures, etc.

When to Use Them: They are fabulous as a classroom activity with pairs, an activity for early finishers, or an activity to keep skills fresh and improve fluency. In an advanced class, you could give the cards without the headers and ask students to sort them in any way possible. You would be surprised at what observations they are able to make. In an intervention setting, the headers will provide structure. 

Teacher Tip from Jordan:  “If you are at a 1-1 school or have access to technology, putting card sorts on Desmos is super easy and a great way to do activities like this digitally!” This blog post from Kate’s Math Lesson shows you how.

SHOP CARD SORTS

SOLVE AND COLORS

Students Practice Basic Math Skills 

Why I Love Them: Solve and colors are really perfect because kids get to color. Something about colored pencils in math makes the lesson more successful.

When to Use Them: My favorite use for solve and colors is for practice of basic math skills, whether that be adding and subtracting rational numbers or multiplying and dividing decimals. They are easy to leave for substitutes, to use after testing, or as fun homework assignments.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: “Use the coloring as the incentive to complete the math. Once the math was complete, I checked their work and then allowed students to start coloring.”

SHOP SOLVE AND COLORS

MATCHING CARDS

Students Practice Recognizing Multiple Representations

Why I Love Them: Matching cards require about the same amount of time upfront as a card sort, so get yourself some parent volunteers. I have found great success using matching cards to show multiple relationships. This can be depicted with ratio tables and graphs, proportional relationships, fraction, decimal, percents, and linear relationships.

When to Use Them: Again, these are perfect for sponge activities, review activities, or quick and easy lessons on Fridays. I personally loved using these over and over again with my intervention students. We would use matching cards to build number fluency with fractions, decimals, and percent representations, as well as many other necessary skills.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: Card Matches (and cut and pastes) can be great whole-class activities! When I taught 6th grade Ratio Unit, I used the Multiple Representation Cut and Paste for the entire class. Each student got a card and students had to make a group of 4 with the equivalent graph, table, equation, and verbal description. For more practice, 

SHOP MATCHING ACTIVITIES

TASK CARDS

Students Practice Individual Skills within a Small Group

Why I Love Them: Students can be working on the same concept with different types of problems. They are super flexible! In fact, we wrote an entire blog posts on task cards! Lots of teachers use them for scoot or various games, but my favorite is small groups. You can incorporate them into stations, use them for formative assessments, etc. Task cards are easy to prep and can be utilized multiple times throughout the year.

When to Use Them: When I pulled small groups, I loved using task cards, hands down. I would have a small group of students work on various problems that were all around a similar topic. I could easily scaffold the students within my small group based on the card, starting with the most basic problems and then moving on to a multi-step word problem.

Teacher Tip from Angelique: “I use task cards as an escape room activity. I have never had ALL group members engaged and truly holding each other accountable to complete the work.”

Find it, Fix It and She Said, He Said

Students practice analyzing work for errors

Why I Love Them: These error analysis type activities provide opportunities for students to not only solve the problem on their own, but evaluate how and why mistakes can be made on particular skills.

When to Use Them: I like to start with He Said, She Saids and build up to Find It, Fix It. He Said, She Said requires students to determine which answer out of 2 is correct. Find It, Fix It requires students to look at 4 different answers and determine which one is incorrect. I like using both of these activities for stations or for a whole group activity to practice skills learned that week.

Teacher Tip from Tyne: “I would post He Said, She Said and Find It, Fix It cards around the classroom, so student pairs could work together to solve. I would set a 3-5 minute timer and announce for pairs to rotate to keep students from gathering around the same problem and to also keep students on track to finish.”

If you haven’t used these student-centered math activities in class, I encourage you to try them out. All Access has all of these activities (and so so so much more), but you can shop individual activities on TpT.

The post Student-Centered Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-plan-student-centered-math-activities/feed/ 7
How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/#comments Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2022 Most math teachers would love a longer class period! I taught a 100 minute class one year, and it definitely had its pros and cons: Pros of a 100 Minute Class Period Cons of a 100 Minute Class Period Things to Consider Below is just one way to structure your 100 minute class period. Sometimes […]

The post How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Most math teachers would love a longer class period! I taught a 100 minute class one year, and it definitely had its pros and cons:

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Pros of a 100 Minute Class Period

  • More time
  • More instruction
  • More support
  • More practice
  • At the end of the year a student has had double the amount of time in that class than a traditional schedule
  • You should definitely be able to get through your scope and sequence with 100 minute class periods
  • If you had 100 minute classes, you probably have less students over all

Cons of a 100 Minute Class Period

  • 100 minutes is a loooooong time
  • Students get distracted
  • Classroom management is tough for that long of a time period

Things to Consider

  • Students are with you for double the amount of time, but that does not mean that you simply extend a 50 minute lesson. How can you be efficient and productive with the time?
  • Students need structure. How can you develop a routine that breaks up the 100 minutes but still provides structure?
  • Students (and adults) have a short attention span. A good rule of thumb is that new learning should not take longer than 1 plus your students’ age, so if you teach 12 year olds, your notes should last no longer than 13 minutes (12+1). 

Below is just one way to structure your 100 minute class period. Sometimes things do not go according to plan, but it is always a good idea to have a structured routine for both yourself and your students, especially if you will be with them for so long. 🙂  

Do First/Bell Ringer/Warm Up 5-10 minutes

I used a very straightforward warm-up routine to get students working when they entered the classroom. The goal is that students can get started without needing assistance from me or their peers.

I used this time to:

  • Greet students with a warm smile
  • Check homework completion (if I assigned it)
  • Take attendance

I would start a timer after the bell rang for 5 minutes and project it. When the timer went off, I spent the next 3-5 minutes either going over the warm up, going over last night’s homework, or a combination of both. 

Hook 2-5 minutes

These few minutes are a great time to introduce the objective and make real-world connections. It can also be utilized to review prior content that is connected or to have students review any new vocabulary. Anything that can create a bit of buy-in is beneficial.

Instruction 15-20 minutes 

The goal of instruction is to give students enough information to understand the concept, but not so much that you are doing all of the heavy lifting in class. It is a fine line to walk.

If you need more than that recommended amount of time for direct instruction, that is okay! Give students the opportunity to practice and engage in a meaningful way before returning to direct instruction. Another idea is to assign our student videos, since they adhere to this time recommendation. 

Remember that direct instruction isn’t your only option to teach a lesson. You could:

Lastly, I think it is important to note that if you are using our curriculum, you do not need to go over every single problem on a student handout. Work the problems ahead of time, decide which are the most important, and then save the rest for small group work time. 

Class Activity 20 minutes

This is the time period where students are engaging with the work in pairs or groups. In a 100 minute class, I recommend activities with movement, as well as collaboration. Sometimes we would do card sorts, but rather than sit at desks I would let students do the sort on the floor. Other times I would use stations or scavenger hunts to get kids up and moving or use math dates to have them work with various people. I would circulate and answer questions at this time. If you have a simple worksheet, make sure to read how to turn any worksheet into an activity.

Recap 5 minutes

As the activity wraps up, take a few minutes to recap what they have learned by asking students to summarize the lesson. Depending on the activity you could go over various responses or work a few of the difficult problems together.

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Skill Practice 5 minutes

Most students have some need for remediation, gaps in their mathematical foundation, or need to expound upon their problem solving skills. Each day I would spend no more than five minutes addressing basic math skills. At the beginning of the year this was multiplication charts with various missing numbers or adding and subtracting decimals. I often spent several weeks on number sense by practicing converting between fractions, decimals, and percents.  

Station Work 30 minutes

I used this time to focus on small groups and remediation. I would work with small groups on their assignment, some students would work independently on a computer, while others would focus on concepts that they needed additional help with. This is also the time that my co-teacher would come into class, which was a life saver. You can read more about this on my math intervention schedule post.

You can read more about planning for and implementing stations here.

Clean Up/Close 5 minutes

By this time we are all wiped! It was time to wrap up, clean up, put away supplies, and get everything back in order.  

One Hundred minute classes never failed to wear me out, but the extra time was a gift! Especially when I think about the whirlwind of a 45 minute class

Who else has 100 minutes for math? How do you structure a 100 minute class? I would love to hear how you break it down!

Do you have a double blocked class?  Are you responsible for teaching a 100 minute class? Ideas for how to structure a 100 minute class period. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.
Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

The post How To Structure a 100 Minute Class Period appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/structure-a-100-minute-class-period/feed/ 20
Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/staying-on-track-with-your-scope-and-sequence/ Tue, 03 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=84013 As a teacher, getting behind in your scope and sequence can feel especially stressful. These tips will keep you on track so when it comes to test review time in the spring, you have covered all of your material, and you aren’t rushing to fit it all in and trying to review too! 1. Use […]

The post Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
As a teacher, getting behind in your scope and sequence can feel especially stressful. These tips will keep you on track so when it comes to test review time in the spring, you have covered all of your material, and you aren’t rushing to fit it all in and trying to review too!

Getting behind with your scope and sequence is a common issue facing teachers!  These 8 tips will help you stay on track. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Use a Scope and Sequence (grab ours!)

If you fail to plan, you plan to fail. If you aren’t provided a scope and sequence by your school, or if you haven’t made one yourself, the task of organizing 50+ math standards into 180 instructional days can be daunting.

Download our free pacing guides for 6th, 7th, 8th grade math, and Algebra 1!

You can see how our Maneuvering the Middle curriculum organizes the standards. From there, download a calendar on Google Sheets, fill in district holidays and professional development days, and work backwards from your state test.

2. Give Yourself Some Cushion

When planning for a unit, give a minimum of 3 days for cushion. No new material is introduced on these days. You can use these days for review, extra practice, or reteaching content that the majority of your students did not master prior. 

In a unit that is 15 days long, I would have one day for reviewing before the unit test, one day for an activity followed by a short quiz, and one additional day for an extra challenging skill that required more practice. That means that out of 5 days of the week, on average, I am only teaching new content 4 of those days. 

3. Be Familiar with Vertical Planning

The first year I taught 6th grade math, ordering rational numbers was in my first unit. My district provided a unit plan that gave me one day to teach this very complicated concept. When we got to ordering decimals and fractions, I modeled how to divide in order to convert fractions into decimals. My highest students raised their hands in protest – “You can’t divide a smaller number by a larger number!” Students lost their minds. That didn’t even include all of the students who forgot the standard algorithm for division. I was trying to cover too much in one lesson!

The lesson I learned that day was this – you need to know what your students already know and don’t know to successfully introduce new concepts. This will come in time, but take a moment to read vertical planning documents (provided in our All Access curriculum). This will prevent you from wasting entire days because you have to pivot on the fly.

4. Formative Assessments Keep You On Track

Knowing how your students are actually doing with the skills they are learning is paramount to staying on schedule each year. I recommend a daily formative assessment on the material covered that day while it is fresh. This can be a 2 question exit ticket or it can be as simple as collecting their classwork and checking problem #5. I like to keep these open-ended (why do students love to just circle multiple-choice answers?!). These are not always graded assignments; they are simply problems that tell me if I can move on to new material the next day or if we need to spend an extra day on the material.

What you are trying to avoid is students making it all the way to the unit test only to bomb spectacularly, and then you are bewildered and overwhelmed trying to plan next steps. 

5. Save the fun stuff for the alternative schedule days

I love when you can make math applicable to the real world! Projects or performance tasks are awesome! I like to save these types of assignments for days where the schedule is already a little crazy. This usually falls before holiday breaks, after pep rallies or on early release days. This is also when there are various field trips, students are more likely to be absent, and it doesn’t really make sense to cover new material. (Which leads me to a side rant that Fridays are also a bad day to cover new skills.)

Projects and performance tasks are a great way to spiral previous learned standards, so it provides a fun way to review.

6. Don’t Waste a Day for Absences

Don’t waste a single day! With an All Access membership, your students don’t have to lose an instructional day because you are sick or need to take a personal day. The student videos cover the student handouts. Instruction can continue even when you are absent! 

7. Consider a Self-Paced Classroom

If your students have a wide range of abilities, you may want to consider a self-paced classroom. We have two blog posts and podcast episodes that I highly recommend checking out if you are interested in letting students work at their own speed (What is the Grid Method?The Self-Paced Classroom). 

Students who need more time to master a skill can receive more of your attention since students who have already mastered a skill can move on without you. 

8. Sometimes You Need to Move On

As teachers, I believe that the ideal state is for 100% of students to master 100% of the concepts that we teach. This is not the reality we live in but we can work toward it. However, 100% of our students will master 0% of the concepts that we don’t teach.

Teachers have to cover all of the material in roughly 180 instructional days. I know it can feel impossible some days, but you can do it! If you find yourself stuck in a unit and the majority of your students are truly struggling, then maybe you need to revisit the material at a later date. Maybe your students are fatigued by the skill and moving onto something new will give them the mental clarity to try it again. 

How do you stay on track with your scope and sequence during the school year?

Getting behind with your scope and sequence is a common issue facing teachers!  These 8 tips will help you stay on track. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Staying on Track with Your Scope and Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-tape-diagrams-to-solve-problems/ Tue, 19 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80871 Welcome to Part 3 of our Problem Solving Strategy series! Today we are diving into helpful tape diagrams to solve problems.  If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail. Be sure to read: Part 1: Three […]

The post Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Welcome to Part 3 of our Problem Solving Strategy series! Today we are diving into helpful tape diagrams to solve problems. 

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Be sure to read: Part 1: Three Word Problem Types to Teach | Part 2: Three Steps to Solving Word Problems

Diagrams are a way to model what is happening in a word problem. Diagrams help provide students with the “operational sense” that they need in order to write an equation and solve a problem. We cannot rely on keywords to determine an operation.

Let’s dive into two examples. (You can see my example of open number line diagram here.)

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tape Diagrams in a Relationship Problem

Let’s start with an example problem:

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

After we have restated the problem, we use a diagram to represent the problem. Notice that this tape diagram is helpful because of the whole in relation to the part.

There are 2 parts to this marching band: those in percussion and those NOT in percussion. These 2 parts will make up the total number of members in the band (this is our whole).

We also know that there are 28 in percussion, so one part is 28. That leaves the unknown value as our other “part” – those not in percussion. So we will write the variable x in our model.

And now we can use the bar model to write an equation.  We can see we need to add the two parts together and set it equal to the whole, so we could write the equation x + 28 = 196.

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The model helps a student develop the operational sense to write an equation with addition, but then perform subtraction to find the difference between the two values. They can see that their solution needs to be a value smaller than the total number of members.

Tape Diagrams in a Comparison Problem

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Without problem solving strategies, a student may write an equation like this, p + d + c = 10.50. They have an equation with 3 different variables and then are stuck. They don’t know how to solve for d, the price of the drink. Let’s try a tape diagram.

We know the popcorn is three times as expensive as the candy and the drink is twice as expensive as the candy. Let’s create a tape diagram under each food item in our bar model. 

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We know the popcorn is three times as expensive as the candy. This can be hard for students to grasp, so give them an example with simple numbers: “If candy is $1, how much is popcorn?” $3. We want students to see that popcorn is more expensive than candy and that the cost of 3 candies is equal to the cost of one popcorn. 

Similarly, the drink is twice as expensive as the candy so the drink is equivalent to 2c’s. 

Finally, we know the cost of the candy is represented with the variable c. Now we are ready to make a connection between our model and write an equation.

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The model clearly shows that 6c = 10.50. We have taken a complex word problem and written a one-step equation to solve for the variable c. Once a student solves for the value of c, they can refer back to determine the cost of the drink and popcorn.

Grab our Problem Solving Poster freebie to display in your classroom!

How do you use tape diagrams in your classroom?

P.S. Check out these related posts: Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving

Tape diagrams are a great tool for problem solving and can be used to solve action, comparison, and relationship word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using Tape Diagrams to Solve Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Steps to Solving Word Problems https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-steps-to-solving-word-problems/ Tue, 12 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80868 In order to be a successful math student, you have to persevere through various problems. This is a skill that can be taught and must be practiced.  (Noelle recently presented an amazing math training – Practical Problem Solving Strategies – this summer, and I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will […]

The post 3 Steps to Solving Word Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In order to be a successful math student, you have to persevere through various problems. This is a skill that can be taught and must be practiced. 

(Noelle recently presented an amazing math training – Practical Problem Solving Strategies – this summer, and I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will be breaking down the training into 3 blog posts over the course of this month, so if you missed the training, be sure to check back here for more updates.)

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Be sure to read Part 1, Three Word Problem Types to Teach, and grab our freebie below!

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Here are the 3 steps to solving word problems:

1. Restate the Problem Situation

Let’s use this word problem about Pedro as our example:

(Check back to last week’s blog post to understand why this scenario falls in the action category.)

By restating the problem, we want students to avoid seeing phrases like “leftover” and decide immediately that they must subtract. We want students to focus on the action taking place. Here is an example of restating the problem. You could have students do this verbally (think, pair, share style) or write down bullet points. Notice that there are no numbers present. 

  • Pedro makes a pitcher of lemonade.
  • He pours some for his friends and now he has some left over.
  • How much lemonade did he start with?

2. Represent the Problem Situation

There are numerous ways to represent a problem: draw a picture, create a diagram or model, use manipulatives, or write an equation (don’t think numbers and variables; it can be something like “Pedro’s pitcher = leftovers + what he poured”).

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The primary goal of this stage is that representations give students that “operational sense” they need in order to write an equation. We want them to know what to do next.

The 3 diagrams we use most in middle school math are open number lines, bar models, and ratio tables. For this problem, I recommend using an open number line.

You can also make the number line a vertical number line. Liquid in a pitcher as a vertical number line might make more sense visually to students. 

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

There was a starting amount of lemonade in the pitcher, but we actually don’t know what that is, so that is our unknown value that we will represent with the variable x on the number line.

Then Pedro pours 34 ounces of lemonade for his friends, here is our action or change, so we will represent that with a jump on the number line. Since we know our action describes removing lemonade from the pitcher, our jump will point down.

Now he looks at the pitcher and there are 20 ounces of lemonade left, this is the resulting value. The open number line allows us to identify what each value in the situation represents, and now we know that our unknown value was the starting amount. 

To finish out our lemonade problem, let’s use our representation to write an equation.

We have a starting amount, x, then we will subtract the amount he poured, 34, and that is equal to the amount remaining in the pitcher, 20.

Notice how the equation has subtraction in it, (which makes sense because the situation describes removing a quantity) but the operation we will perform to find the solution is addition. This is what we mean by developing operational sense for a situation.

The number line also helps students see that the solution needs to be a value greater than 20, since x is higher on the vertical number line. 

These representations can be so powerful as we help transition students from the concrete to the abstract!

Be sure to grab our free Problem Solving Posters that have examples of all of these representations.

3. Solve and Reflect

When we think about problem solving, we often think about the end goal being to find the solution, which of course is important.

But in order to grow our students as problem solvers, it’s important to also take time for individual and classroom reflection. Reflection is such an important part of making meaning. If students can construct mathematical arguments to justify their solutions, you know they fully understood the problem.

After students have worked through a word problem, encourage them to share the different models or equations that they came up with, and have them explain the operations they used to solve a problem. Students will learn from each other as they are exposed to different ways of thinking about the same problem.

Word problems can be tricky and students (and teachers!) need all the help they can get! Check out these 3 steps to solving word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

P.S. Check out these related posts: Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving

The post 3 Steps to Solving Word Problems appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Types of Word Problems to Teach https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-types-of-word-problems-to-teach/ Tue, 05 Sep 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=80859 Problem solving is a multifaceted process! While I’ve written about Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving, there is still so much more to cover. Noelle presented an amazing math training this summer on Practical Problem Solving Strategies. I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I […]

The post 3 Types of Word Problems to Teach appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Problem solving is a multifaceted process! While I’ve written about Math Problem Solving Strategies and How to Teach Word Problems and Problem Solving, there is still so much more to cover.

Noelle presented an amazing math training this summer on Practical Problem Solving Strategies. I was truly amazed at just how much I learned. I will be breaking down the training into 3 blog posts over the course of this month, so if you missed the training, be sure to check back here for more updates.

If you want to learn more, check out this book, Mathematize It!, that covers the topic of teaching how to solve word problems in much more detail.

Today we are going to talk about the 3 types or categories of word problems that you teach and your students may face: action, relationship, and comparison. The purpose of identifying word problem types is to force students to slow down and analyze what is happening in the word problem before jumping to computation.

You can also grab our problem solving posters freebie below!

There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Action Word Problems

Here is an example of an action word problem: 

How do we know that this is an action? Ask yourself:

  • Did something occur?
  • Was there some kind of change?

If yes, the word problem likely falls into the action category.

Relationship Word Problems

Here is an example of a relationship word problem: 

There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do we know this is a relationship? Ask yourself:

  • Are parts being described or referred to in relation to a whole? 
  • Is a whole being described or referred to in relation to a part?

If yes, the word problem is a relationship. Here we can see the parts of the marching band relate to the total number of marching band members. 

Comparison Word Problems

And lastly, here is an example of a comparison word problem: 

How do we know this is a comparison?

Ask yourself:

  • Is something in the word problem being described in comparison to something else?

In this word problem, we can see that the cost of popcorn is being described by the cost of the candy. 

Why is this helpful to know?

Why do students need to know this? Well, by observing and “making meaning” from the words and scenarios they are processing, students are less likely to rush to determine a path to the solution. 

Does this sound familiar? Students quickly perform some operations with the values given. In this first step of the problem-solving process, we want to take the focus off the values and direct students to notice what is being described in the problem.

The goal is not for them to be able to identify and put the word problem into the correct category. We simply want students to notice what is happening, and over time they will start to recognize patterns in word problems. 

Next week, I will dive deeper into how we take these word problem types and use them to help students with the first part of the problem solving process: restating the problem.

Grab our problem solving posters freebie!

In the meantime, can you identify the category these sample problems belong in?

  1. Ricky buys a package of chicken to use throughout the week. On Monday, he uses 28 ounces to make chicken salad for lunch. On Thursday, he grills 53 ounces of chicken for dinner. If Ricky determines he has 37 ounces of chicken remaining to cook, how many ounces of chicken did he buy at the beginning of the week?
  2. Gavin has two pet turtles, a red-eared slider and a map turtle. His red-eared slider weighs 2,680 grams and his map turtle weighs 670 grams. How many times bigger is the red-eared slider than the map turtle?
  3. Ivory created a paper chain of her school colors, blue, green, and white, as a decoration for a pep rally. The blue section measured 5.5  feet long, the green section measured 4.25  feet long, and the white section measured 3.75  feet long. What is the total length of the paper chain?
  4. A king-sized chocolate bar has a mass of 2.6 ounces. A regular-sized chocolate bar has a mass of 1.55 ounces. How many more ounces is the king-sized chocolate bar than the regular-sized chocolate bar?
  5. A nature center has a stocked pond with an automatic fish feeder. The fish feeder has 70.5 pounds of fish food and releases food into the pond twice a day. If the feeder releases 2.6 pounds of food in the morning and 1.2 pounds of food in the evening, how many pounds of food are remaining in the feeder at the end of the day? 
  6. The San Francisco Bay Area is hosting a triathlon, a race consisting of swimming, biking, and running. The athletes will swim for 0.75  miles and bike for 15.5  miles. If the total distance of the triathlon is 20.5  miles, how many miles is the running portion of the race?
There are 3 types of word problems that your students will benefit from knowing: action, relationship, and comparison. Learn more here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 3 Types of Word Problems to Teach appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Solving 5 Classroom Interruptions https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/solving-5-classroom-interruptions/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/solving-5-classroom-interruptions/#comments Tue, 29 Aug 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=81520 There are the classroom interruptions that you cannot control: fire drills, alternative bell schedules, and fill-in-the-blank with about a zillion other options. However, there are so many interruptions that you can minimize to maximize the effectiveness of your classroom time. Every minute counts! Let’s chat today about common classroom interruptions and some ways to combat […]

The post Solving 5 Classroom Interruptions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
There are the classroom interruptions that you cannot control: fire drills, alternative bell schedules, and fill-in-the-blank with about a zillion other options.

However, there are so many interruptions that you can minimize to maximize the effectiveness of your classroom time. Every minute counts!

Let’s chat today about common classroom interruptions and some ways to combat these time wasters. Plus, I have included a freebie to help get your time back.

Locker and Bathroom Requests

Problem: You see a raised hand and anticipate a math question or observation only to be met with, “Can I go to the bathroom?” 

Or perhaps, a student left their math folder in their locker. Whatever the reason, a student needs to leave the learning environment and we all know class time is precious. 

Solution 1: Know what a student needs before you call on them. Our classroom poster pack has hand signs for RR, locker, answer, question, and more. You don’t need our classroom poster pack to implement this procedure, but having the visual will serve as a reminder for students.

Classroom interruptions are inevitable, but you can be prepared! Grab this freebie + check out 5 ways to combat these class disruptions.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Solution 2: Use our MATH FAST PASS to hold students accountable to the number of restroom breaks or locker requests you deem necessary based on the length of your class period. I am not a fan of limiting restroom breaks for students who genuinely need it (and passing periods do exist for this very reason), but this tool can serve as a way to manage that interruption.

Classroom interruptions are inevitable, but you can be prepared! Grab this freebie + check out 5 ways to combat these class disruptions.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Personally, 3 emergency passes per grading period usually did the trick!

This freebie also has some helpful math tables and concepts to keep in students’ folders or binders, so it is a win-win for math teachers everywhere. Before a student could ask to use the restroom, they have to have their MATH FAST PASS out for you to sign and date.

GRAB OUR MATH FAST PASS FREEBIE

First Aid Needs

Maybe it is a math teacher thing, but if you aren’t actively vomiting, then I think you are healthy enough to learn math. 🙂

Keep band-aids, mints, and paper towels in your classroom for these small ailments. Your nurse or front office staff will thank you.

A wet paper towel across the forehead will satisfy the needs of a student with a headache and the student will feel cared for. Another win!

Keep in mind that in most cases, the nurse won’t be able to offer anything stronger and they will be sent back to class anyway.

Pencils Needing to be Sharpened

Pencils. Pencils. Pencils. These writing utensils are a necessary evil in your classroom.

Start by establishing a pencil routine that you feel confident you have the stamina to maintain by the end of the year. Here are 2 ideas that I have personally used:

  • Pencil Library. This is a trading system. A student who needs to sharpen their pencil can get up, drop off their old pencil, and grab a sharpened pencil. No need to run the sharpener. A student in my homeroom would sharpen the allotted amount of pencils for the day (around 10-20). The old traded pencils would get sharpened to use the next day.
  • Pencil Parking Lot. This idea comes from To The Square Inch. I love this system! I like it because I can SEE the pencils. 5 pencils are clipped to the whiteboard. Students sign out a pencil by writing their name on the whiteboard with a dry erase marker. At the end of class, I would remind students to bring my pencils back and I would erase their names as I clipped the pencils back up. 

After my pencil sharpener broke, my pencil sharpener stopped being for public use. If your pencil sharpener is for students to use, I recommend sharing your expectations for use:

  • How to ask to use it (use hand signs)
  • When they can use it (never during instruction)
  • Proper use (no colored pencils)

Cell Phones

Cell phones are tricky! Personally, I only ever worked in a school that had a school wide policy that they were off and stowed away. This made my job easier, but I know that is not always the case.

Phones aren’t going away anytime soon, so how do you manage the distraction? As I was doing research about this topic, I found that the teachers most successful with cell phones had 3 things in common:

  • A why
  • A clear and consistent routine and procedure
  • Allowed the occasional use with boundaries around usage, complete with consequences

A Why

Students need buy-in before they detach from their device. You can show them studies (like this one from The University of Chicago) regarding how the mere presence of phones reduces available cognitive capacity.

Ask students to reflect on their own relationship with their phone. Does it distract you? Do you find yourself stopping what you are doing to check your phone? 

A Clear and Consistent Routine and Procedure

When developing a procedure for cell phones, it is important to be super clear about everything! Power struggles usually occur over ambiguity.  

Let’s say that the procedure is for students to put their phones in an over-the-door shoe rack during class. Here are all of the details to go over with your students:

  • Phones go into the pocket before you sit down for class. (I would stand at the door for the first few days and send students over to the phone storage upon entry)
  • Phones are turned off or on silent. I would explain to students that I don’t want any phones making sounds during instruction.
  • I would have assigned pockets. Students need to place their phones in their designated spot.
  • Phones will be picked up when class is dismissed. Exceptions will be made only with permission from me. (Example: they need to call their parents)
  • Lastly, I would remind, remind, remind students at the beginning of class. It would be posted with their start-of-class instructions, it would be posted permanently on a wall, and I would also verbally tell students that, “If your phone isn’t put in the pocket in the next 10 seconds, I will have zero grace if you are caught with it or if it goes off.”*

(This procedure is just a suggestion to model the level of detail required.)

I recently saw a teacher, Mrs. O, suggest giving students brown paper bags to place their phones in, stapling the bag, and leaving it on their desk if they are struggling with looking at their phone during class. 

Boundaries + Consequences

If you have done everything from above, then I suspect you will have fewer problems (not saying zero!) with cell phones. When a student chooses to use their phone during class, they will know that a consequence is coming. Be sure to check with your administration, grade level team, or student handbook regarding appropriate consequences.

I wouldn’t recommend consequences that include first offense, second offense, or third offense since that is hard to track. 

Classroom interruptions are inevitable. How do you manage these common classroom interruptions?

Classroom interruptions are inevitable, but you can be prepared! Grab this freebie + check out 5 ways to combat these class disruptions.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Solving 5 Classroom Interruptions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/solving-5-classroom-interruptions/feed/ 1
How to Teach Problem Solving https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/#comments Tue, 27 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=35326 Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Perhaps, it is because we are trying to teach students to manage and implement a myriad of skills: thinking, observing, investigating, reasoning through situations, and accessing prior knowledge. Check out these strategies to get students thinking! LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Problem Solving with Word Problems […]

The post How to Teach Problem Solving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Perhaps, it is because we are trying to teach students to manage and implement a myriad of skills: thinking, observing, investigating, reasoning through situations, and accessing prior knowledge. Check out these strategies to get students thinking!

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Tackling word problems and find out what you should not be doing when teaching problem solving.| maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Problem Solving with Word Problems

In the book The Young Child and Mathematics, Juanita Copley states that problem solving happens through “doing, talking, reflecting, discussing, observing, investigating, listening, and reasoning.”

We can often mistake different methods for decoding word problems as problem solving skills. R.U.B.I.E.S. and C.U.B.E.S. and all of the acronyms where students are supposed to underline, box, or circle may feel productive, but they cannot produce the skills needed to solve real-world problems. 

Why Are Problem Solving is so Difficult

There are a lot of different factors that play into this challenge and it could be a single isolated one or it could be a combination of several factors.

  • Need for perseverance – some students can routinely go through all of the procedures involved in solving a math problem, but they haven’t yet acquired the perseverance needed to reason through a real-life situation 
  • Reading skills — tasks and real-world applications require reading comprehension and decoding skills to fully understand the situation and apply the mathematical reasoning skills necessary to solve
  • Multiple steps — requires students to create a plan with several steps and work through the plan
  • Incorrect vocabulary usage — when solving word problems, sometimes students have been instructed to primarily look for specific words like “per” “of” “each” “sum”…and then they attempt to apply the operation — but we know that doesn’t always work and can also over simplify the process.

Shift the Focus from the Answer

This post and video from Phil Daro (co-author of the CCSS) says that based on their studies, teachers need to shift the focus from answer-getting to sense-making. “When the answer is the only goal, genuine learning is undermined.”

He says that teachers put too much emphasis on the answers; answers are part of the process, but they are not the only learning outcome. That wrong answers are part of the learning outcome. 

  • Consider framing wrong “answers” as “discoveries.” If students reached a wrong answer, you talked more about why that approach doesn’t work instead of how to get the right answer.
  • Consider giving students the answers before solving, removing some of the power, and instead spent class time figuring out different ways to get to the answer.

The goal of solving math problems is the critical thinking that happens along the way. Not the answer.

How do we teach problem solving?

Learning is not necessarily the solution to a specific question. We want students to apply sense-making to the rest of their lives.

I really want you to watch the video, but one of Daro’s suggestions is to provide students the correct answer before having students solve. It removes some of the power of finding the right answer, and puts an emphasis on figuring out different ways to get the answer. There are so many different ways to solve problems and it encourages students to think in this way.

Tip #1 – Allow flexibility in how students solve problems.

Showing your work is said so often that it can seem meaningless to a student. Give students options for ways they can show their work.

Grab a free REPRESENT IT bulletin board that will provide a visual aid for different ways to represent their work!

Here are a few examples:

  • Write an equation
  • Solve a simpler problem
  • Draw a bar model
  • Draw a picture
  • Draw a graph
  • Use an open number line
  • Use manipulatives
  • Guess and check
  • Use logical reasoning
  • Make a ratio table

Tip #2- Focus on quality over quantity.

Quality over quantity is going to mean different things for different teachers, depending on the number of students, the length of your class period and even the different concepts being covered.  Here is one example for helping students focus on “sense-making” in a problem. 

Let’s take this pretty basic word problem >> Mr. Roy overdrafts his account by $25.50 and then is charged a $10.35 fee by the bank. What is the change in Mr. Roy’s bank account?

Before modeling a think-aloud to discuss how to solve this problem (and move on quickly to the next), ask so many questions that students will have no choice but to THINK about what the problem is asking for. Shift the workload to the students. Here are a few I brainstormed:

  • Who is Mr. Roy?
  • What is an overdraft?
  • Is a fee a good thing or bad thing? For who?
  • Why is Mr. Roy charged a fee?
  • What is the change measuring? 
  • Does he have more money or less money?

I just asked 6 questions and haven’t even gotten to the math yet! Model for students the type of critical thinking and questioning you want students to use when they are solving solo.

Then have students just try out the problem. Circulate to see the different methods. Come together to discuss the different ways you saw the problem solved. 

Bring this problem to life by providing Monopoly money to students to “act” it out. 

I love seeing students be problem solvers and I think it is such a lifelong skill that they will always carry with them. In fact, they may not frequently need to calculate the equation of a line or the probability of a compound event, but each and everyday they will use their “sense-making skills” to solve problems and make decisions. 

If you want to focus on teaching problem solving, then All Access may be right for you!

Problem solving can be a challenge to teach. Tackling word problems and find out what you should not be doing when teaching problem solving. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Problem Solving appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-problem-solving/feed/ 1
Math Problem Solving Strategies https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/#comments Mon, 12 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2667 How many times have you been teaching a concept that students are feeling confident in, only for them to completely shut down when faced with a word problem?  For me, the answer is too many to count.  Word problems require problem solving strategies. And more than anything, word problems require decoding, eliminating extra information, and […]

The post Math Problem Solving Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

How many times have you been teaching a concept that students are feeling confident in, only for them to completely shut down when faced with a word problem?  For me, the answer is too many to count.  Word problems require problem solving strategies. And more than anything, word problems require decoding, eliminating extra information, and opportunities for students to solve for something that the question is not asking for.  There are so many places for students to make errors! Let’s talk about some problem solving strategies that can help guide and encourage students!

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math Problem Solving Strategies

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. C.U.B.E.S.

C.U.B.E.S stands for circle the important numbers, underline the question, box the words that are keywords, eliminate extra information, and solve by showing work.  

  • Why I like it: Gives students a very specific ‘what to do.’
  • Why I don’t like it: With all of the annotating of the problem, I’m not sure that students are actually reading the problem.  None of the steps emphasize reading the problem but maybe that is a given.

2. R.U.N.S.

R.U.N.S. stands for read the problem, underline the question, name the problem type, and write a strategy sentence. 

  • Why I like it: Students are forced to think about what type of problem it is (factoring, division, etc) and then come up with a plan to solve it using a strategy sentence.  This is a great strategy to teach when you are tackling various types of problems.
  • Why I don’t like it: Though I love the opportunity for students to write in math, writing a strategy statement for every problem can eat up a lot of time.

3. U.P.S. CHECK

U.P.S. Check stands for understand, plan, solve, and check.

  • Why I like it: I love that there is a check step in this problem solving strategy.  Students having to defend the reasonableness of their answer is essential for students’ number sense.
  • Why I don’t like it: It can be a little vague and doesn’t give concrete ‘what to dos.’ Checking that students completed the ‘understand’ step can be hard to see.

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Maneuvering the Middle Strategy AKA K.N.O.W.S.

Here is the strategy that I adopted a few years ago.  It doesn’t have a name yet nor an acronym, (so can it even be considered a strategy…?)

UPDATE: IT DOES HAVE A NAME! Thanks to our lovely readers, Wendi and Natalie!

  • Know: This will help students find the important information.
  • Need to Know: This will force students to reread the question and write down what they are trying to solve for.
  • Organize:  I think this would be a great place for teachers to emphasize drawing a model or picture.
  • Work: Students show their calculations here.
  • Solution: This is where students will ask themselves if the answer is reasonable and whether it answered the question.

I have rolled this problem solving strategy out to students, and it went decently.  When I provided the boxes (seen below) for them to fill out, I received no heavy sighs that I was forcing them to show their work.  
I think the boxes made it clear that it was part of the required work – not something ‘extra’ I was wasting their time with.Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Ideas for Promoting Showing Your Work

  • White boards are a helpful resource that make (extra) writing engaging!
  • Celebrating when students show their work. Create a bulletin board that says ***I showed my work*** with student exemplars.
  • Take a picture that shows your expectation for how work should look and post it on the board like Marissa did here.

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Show Work Digitally

Many teachers are facing how to have students show their work or their problem solving strategy when tasked with submitting work online. Platforms like Kami make this possible. Go Formative has a feature where students can use their mouse to “draw” their work. 

If you want to spend your energy teaching student problem solving instead of writing and finding math problems, look no further than our All Access membership. Click the button to learn more. 

Students who plan succeed at a higher rate than students who do not plan.  Do you have a go to problem solving strategy that you teach your students? 

Problem solving strategies are a must teach skill. Today I analyze strategies that I have tried and introduce the strategy I plan to use this school year. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for nearly 8 years! This post was originally published in September of 2017. It has been revamped for relevancy and accuracy.

The post Math Problem Solving Strategies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/problem-solving-strategies/feed/ 18
5 Ideas for Open Number Lines https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-ideas-for-open-number-lines/ Tue, 06 Jun 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=73649 What is an Open Number Line? An open number line is exactly what it sounds like – a blank number line that students can use to solve a multitude of middle school math problems. Open number lines provide a great visual for abstract concepts.  Let’s talk about 5 ways to use open number lines in […]

The post 5 Ideas for Open Number Lines appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What is an Open Number Line? An open number line is exactly what it sounds like – a blank number line that students can use to solve a multitude of middle school math problems. Open number lines provide a great visual for abstract concepts. 

Let’s talk about 5 ways to use open number lines in middle school math!

1. Fluency

Adding friendly numbers – This method leaves one addend whole and adds the other addend in friendly amounts. 

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In this example, 275 was added to 173 in friendly chunks of 200, 50, 20, and 5 to get the final sum of 448.

Adding to friendly numbers – This method adds a small amount first to get a partial sum that is friendly, then adds the remaining amount in friendly chunks.

In this example, 2 was added to 398 to get the friendly number of 400. Then, the remaining 112 was added in chunks of 100 and 12 to get the final sum of 512.

Distance (Subtraction) – Because subtraction is the distance between the two values, students can use an open number line to count up to the total distance between the two numbers.  Values closer together are better suited for this method.

Removal (Subtraction) – Removal takes away to find the difference between two values. Values further apart may be easier to subtract using removal.

Constant Difference – Add or subtract the same number from both values to make the numbers easier while keeping a constant difference. 

In this example, 620-370 was adjusted by subtracting 20 from each value (620-20=600 and 370-20=350)  and finding the difference between 600-350. (I could have added 30 to 370 and 620 too!)

2. Ratios and Conversions

Double Number Lines – Double number lines are useful for ratios and conversions. If you typically use a table for solving ratio problems, then an open number line is not too far off.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Ordering Numbers

You can read more about this in our Ordering Rational Numbers post, but ultimately, no problem that involves ordering numbers is complete without a number line. It provides context and is a way to actually show student thinking. 

While starting with a completely blank number line can work for some students, I recommend writing in whole numbers first.

Example: -½, -2.2, -1.5

Before placing a single number from above on an open number line, I would ask students to provide the integer numbers (for simplicity sake, I am referring to -3, -2, -1, and 0) that make sense with the numbers provided in the example.

Once determined, students will have a much easier job placing -1.5 between -2 and -1 than on a blank number line with -½ and -2.2.

Hint: Use a vertical number line when involving negative numbers.

4. Problem Solving

These problem solving strategies are best explained in word problem format. Please read the word problems to fully understand the open number line diagrams.

Active Situations – This method describes a situation in which quantities are joined or removed. There is a start, a change, and a result.

Part Part Whole – This describes a relationship that includes two or more parts that relate to a whole.

Additive Comparisons – These are situations that describe how two quantities compare to each other. They include a smaller quantity, a larger quantity, and the difference between the two quantities.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I had no idea there are so many ways to use number lines to solve so many different types of middle school math problems. Do you use open number lines?

If you are interested in learning more about open number lines, our Maneuvering Math Intervention Program will be adding a new module called Jump Start in time for Back to School Season! Jump Start is an introductory component to equip students with tools and strategies for number operations and problem solving.

It will help students reason with numbers, recognize and effectively represent problem-solving situations and approach math with increased confidence and tools to use throughout challenging concepts.

These 5 ideas for open number lines will help your students solve math problems from fluency to word problems. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Ideas for Open Number Lines appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-performance-tasks/ Tue, 16 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=71678 The first performance task that I ever implemented was district provided and meant to replace the standard benchmark assessment. It did not go well; students felt defeated and I felt frustrated. Here is what I should have done: Before I begin, let’s talk about what a performance task is: “A performance task is any learning […]

The post 5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The first performance task that I ever implemented was district provided and meant to replace the standard benchmark assessment. It did not go well; students felt defeated and I felt frustrated. Here is what I should have done:

Before I begin, let’s talk about what a performance task is:

“A performance task is any learning activity or assessment that asks students to perform to demonstrate their knowledge, understanding and proficiency. Performance tasks yield a tangible product and/or performance that serves as evidence of learning.” (From Defined Learning)

Keep reading to get a free performance task for middle school math + algebra 1.

These 5 tips for Implementing performance tasks will make your job easier and your students feel more successful - check them out here!

1. Prepare Your Students

My first mistake was assuming that I could successfully replace a multiple-choice test with a performance task and act like they are the same. Performance tasks require students to not just recall what they have learned but apply what they have learned to a problem. The effort is more sustained. A student cannot circle an answer and move on to the next problem like they can on a traditional assessment. 

If you plan to use a performance task as an assessment to be completed independently, I recommend you model and complete a performance task together with your class at some point during the unit. Consider it like a test review. 

You will most likely receive higher quality work because students know what the criteria for success is. You can show how you want diagrams labeled, or how thorough their explanations need to be, or whatever your heart desires. 

Performance tasks do not have to be an independent assignment or assessment! Our Maneuvering the Middle performance tasks are designed to be collaborative. Here are some ways you could assign performance tasks:

  • Group Activity  – Provide roles so all group members contribute.
  • Partners – Assign partners. You can have a partner responsible for turning in one performance task that they both contributed to, or each student is still responsible for turning in their own task, but are still able to work collaboratively. 

2. Provide Checkpoints and Opportunities for Feedback

A performance task typically encompasses everything learned in a unit, so the material is still very fresh to students. We want students to do well, right!? That is why I recommend checkpoints. Depending on the performance task, you may want to check students’ work before they proceed. You can do this a variety of ways:

  • Draw a star on the performance tasks or circle a question number – when students reach this point, they raise their hand so you can check before they move on. (Bonus: this is also a great way to grade as you go! Instead of having a stack of paper to grade at the end, you can come up with a system on your clipboard that allows you to add or deduct points.)
  • Circulate and keep circulating – You are probably already doing this, so keep on keeping on! I like to walk and add checkmarks to correct answers to give students confidence and prevent students from raising their hands to ask if the problem is correct. I want raised hands to be for questions, so I can prioritize appropriately.
  • Check based on time elapsed – I also refer to this as chunking. Instead of telling students they have 50 minutes to complete the entire task, tell students they have 10 minutes for Section A, 15 minutes for Section B, and so on. Use these time restraints to circulate and check where students are and check for accuracy. “You should be wrapping up Section A. I am coming around to check while you work on Section B. You have 15 minutes to finish Section B.” *sets timer*

3. Complete the Performance Tasks Yourself Sans Answer Key

I recommend doing this for any assessment, assignment, or activity! Complete the performance tasks on your own without any assistance from a calculator (if students don’t get one) or without the answer key to guide you.

This will do 3 important things: 

  1. This should give you an estimate for how long it will take a student to complete it. It is safe to assume that a student will take around 3 times longer to complete than the teacher.  If this exceeds a class period, you can make plans to spend two class periods on the performance task or shorten the task to accommodate. 
  2. Most importantly, it will help you identify areas where students may feel confused or need extra support. If you hesitate or have to reference something to proceed, your students most likely will too! 
  3. If you created the performance task from scratch, consider asking another teacher to complete it to receive feedback. This might save you a headache later. 

4. Students Who Need Motivation

Performance tasks require sustained effort which can be a challenge for some students. You still want to hold these students accountable for their work, but you can do a variety of tricks to keep them motivated. Students are generally motivated by choice and by learning about things that they care about. Can you alter the performance task to be about something that they love? Even if that means you take a pen and mark up their task on the fly. 

Is the task accessible to them? If not, find an entry point. Perhaps, they need a formula or a filled-in-example . You may have to alter the task a bit for this to happen, but students have different needs and that is ok. 

Last but not least, pulling a small group is a great place for students to feel supported and successful. You don’t have to do the task for them, but you can prompt them and keep a closer eye on them. 

5. When to Implement a Performance Task

I love how Marissa implements a performance task! She assigns performance tasks the day after a test to her students who mastered their unit test. Performance tasks act as a perfect extension for these students who are ready to move on. For the students who did not master concepts from the unit test and need reteaching, she pulls a small group. 

Maneuvering the Middle’s performance tasks are low-prep and also come in Google Slides format.

What tips do you have for implementing performance tasks?

These 5 tips for Implementing performance tasks will make your job easier and your students feel more successful - check them out here!

The post 5 Tips for Implementing Performance Tasks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
3 Benefits of Math Word Walls https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/3-benefits-of-math-word-walls/ Tue, 09 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=71667 Word walls contribute function, beauty, and support students’ acquisition of math content. What is not to love?! Let’s chat about why every math classroom can benefit from a word wall. You can also read more tips about implementing a word wall here. What are the benefits of a math word wall? 1. BUILD A COMMON […]

The post 3 Benefits of Math Word Walls appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Word walls contribute function, beauty, and support students’ acquisition of math content. What is not to love?!

Let’s chat about why every math classroom can benefit from a word wall. You can also read more tips about implementing a word wall here.

Math word walls are beneficial for students - functional, useful, and beautiful to your classroom. Check out more benefits here!

What are the benefits of a math word wall?

1. BUILD A COMMON VOCABULARY BANK

Word walls are a necessity for math. In middle school, each unit introduces (on average) around 5 new vocabulary terms. If new terms are necessary for success in a unit, then your students better know them!

What better way for students to internalize these words than to see them, reference them, and then use them? A word wall makes this process accessible.

When you have trained your students to find new or unfamiliar words on the word wall, then you are setting them up to use their resources and promote independent thinking. 

For the most useful word wall, include the term, the definition, and a visual. It is inevitable that your students will need the occasional brain break and may need to stare off; if that is the case, I find it a good use of time if they can be staring at math words. You can read more about math vocabulary here.

2. SUPPORT BILINGUAL STUDENTS

All students benefit from easy access to frequently used words, their definition, and an image, but for bilingual students, it can be especially helpful! Word walls provide a visual aid for students who are learning English. 

For your Spanish speaking students, our new Middle School Math Word Wall Resource includes the Spanish term and Spanish definition to support your bilingual students even more!

3. INTRODUCE NEW TERMS AND REVIEW PREVIOUSLY LEARNED WORDS

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

That is a copious amount of words for students to know and use, which makes a word wall even more necessary. While they may only learn around 50 new words each year in math, they also will need to access words from previous grade levels. 

While students may be introduced to the term “product” in elementary school, that term will continue to appear in later grades. This is also true of words like equivalent, volume, area, difference, expression, and well, so on and so on. Math vocabulary terms continue from elementary to high school because math builds with each subsequent year. 

TIP: Don’t start the year with a complete word wall. Either add to your word wall as the vocabulary term is introduced or display terms unit by unit. 

The phrase “out of sight, out of mind” rings true. When students don’t see something every day, they tend to forget it. How does your classroom benefit from a word wall?

Math word walls are beneficial for students - functional, useful, and beautiful to your classroom. Check out more benefits here!

The post 3 Benefits of Math Word Walls appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Using a Word Wall in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/#comments Tue, 02 May 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1892 Word walls can feel like one more thing to maintain in the classroom, but when I see a student reference the word wall for help, then the word wall is well worth the extra effort. Here are a few tips I have for creating, maintaining, and maximizing the use of a middle school math word […]

The post Using a Word Wall in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Word walls can feel like one more thing to maintain in the classroom, but when I see a student reference the word wall for help, then the word wall is well worth the extra effort.

Here are a few tips I have for creating, maintaining, and maximizing the use of a middle school math word wall.

Keep reading to check out Maneuvering the Middle’s new Middle School Math Word Wall.

Word walls can provide scaffolding, visual reminders, & increase academic vocabulary!  Ideas for setting up & using your word wall in a middle school class.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Structuring Your Word Wall

A word wall that includes the math term, the definition, and a visual representation will make the most impact.  The text should be visible from across the room, and should be in a place where a majority of students can see it.  I have many English Language Learners in my classes, so word walls are especially helpful for them.  Some of my fellow teachers even use the Spanish translation as additional leverage for students. (Keep reading to learn about a new resource from Maneuvering the Middle!)

I like my words to stay up all year as we learn and review the words.  This helps students use academic vocabulary and make connections between the different units.  I love when a student can see how a proportional relationship and a linear equation are connected!

At the beginning of the year, I only have the categories posted at the top of the wall.  I then include the words as they are introduced, then move on to the next category of words included in the next unit. 

2. WAYS TO USE

Incentivize Academic Vocabulary

While word walls make a classroom beautiful, their ultimate function is to be used.  This means that you need to make students aware of its existence and its usefulness.  

To do this, incentive using vocabulary terms from the word wall by rewarding students who use the vocabulary correctly when answering a question or explaining an answer.  When students are about to begin practicing a new skill, I ask students to point to the word that will help them if I am unavailable. 

During mad minute exercises, I include vocabulary that they can provide a definition with one word (example: quotient=division).  If they don’t know it, they can take an extra second to look up at the word wall.  

Flyswatter Game

If you want students to get familiar with your word wall, use the Fly Swatter Game.  This is a very engaging review game. If you are like me and don’t bother to cover up anything in your room before a test, this will help remind students where to look when they are stuck.  Two students face off with fly swatters in hand.  You give them a prompt such as “2, 4, 6, 8” are examples of ______”  And the first student to swat the word ‘multiples’ earns their team a point.

Non-Content Words

Word walls do not have to be specific to your content area.  I have character terms like tenacity, curiosity, courage, and community on my wall too.  These are our school values, and it is important that these words are referenced by students and me daily.

Flashlight Game

This game is great for those last few minutes of class as a sponge activity.  Turn off the lights and use a flashlight to point to a word on the wall.  Students can then shout out an example, the definition, or even a counterexample. 

3. Making a Word Wall

Knowing that teachers have more to do than hours in the day, creating the word posters is a task easily assigned to students who finish early or those students in your homeroom who are always asking how they can help. 

After a unit test, I would have early finishers complete this as an activity for the next unit.  I would give the word + definition + example + picture that I wanted them to use, and choose the best ones to go on the wall. I did this for several years before I wanted a more uniform look. 

There are also lots of resources on Pinterest or TPT to choose from. My advice is to batch this task during the summer. Print everything you need, laminate, and decide how you will store them. Then you can post the new words for each unit to your growing word wall. 

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

At first a word wall might seem excessive or more like an “extra” thing to do, but now that I have seen how my students use it, I am sold!  How do you use your word wall in your middle school classroom?  

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for 8 years. This post was originally published in November of 2016. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

Word walls can provide scaffolding, visual reminders, & increase academic vocabulary!  Ideas for setting up & using your word wall in a middle school class.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using a Word Wall in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-word-wall-middle-school/feed/ 6
Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/#comments Tue, 04 Apr 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3201 It doesn’t get more real-world in math than Personal Financial Literacy! I appreciate that real life concepts that impact growing teens and adults are incorporated into Texas state standards.   Today, I am sharing ideas that support the personal financial literacy standards for middle school. Let’s take a moment to at what is included in the […]

The post Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
It doesn’t get more real-world in math than Personal Financial Literacy! I appreciate that real life concepts that impact growing teens and adults are incorporated into Texas state standards.  

Today, I am sharing ideas that support the personal financial literacy standards for middle school.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Let’s take a moment to at what is included in the Texas Personal Financial Literacy standards. *The standards below have been edited for conciseness.*

Comprehensive curriculum that is aligned to the TEKS can be a challenge to find. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has already created the student handouts, homework, study guides, and assessments for this very subject.

In addition, Maneuvering the Middle has already created a variety of activities – scavenger hunts, card sorts, solve and color, online exploration activities, stations, and more to provide practice and keep Personal Financial Literacy engaging.

Think Long-Term

Remember that while we do teach the standards, we can emphasize the most long-term concepts.  While sixth grade calls for students to be able to explain the items on a credit report, we really want students to have a great understanding for what a credit report is and how short-term poor decisions can impact us for a long time.  In 8th grade, this concept is driven home with the emphasis on ways to save money with interest over time. To me this is a great takeaway for middle schoolers! 

Make It Relevant

I appreciate the vertical alignment of specific strands, specifically G and H. Sixth graders look at the larger scope of how career fields impact your lifetime income, 7th graders explore just how expensive it is to maintain a household, and lastly 8th graders are asked to devise a savings plan for college. This strand shows how personal this concept is to students’ futures. This is something that you will use in the real world (*gestures wildly*).

Activities to Try

Dollars and Sense – This free activity is similar to the game of Life. While it isn’t ink friendly, you could laminate and have a class set. Students choose a career, and have various opportunities to flip a coin to either incur a costly expense or financial favor. They decide how to spend and save their money on transportation, clothes, and housing. At the end of the game, they have to fill out a budget based on their choices. This is aligned to 6th, 7th, and 8th grade standards.

Financial Football – This computer-based activity requires students to answer financial multiple-choice questions between plays. The football aspect will engage some students, and it isn’t 100% aligned to one grade level’s standards, but overall, I think this would be a great extension for students over the course of the unit.

Comparing Salaries in Various Fields Project – In this project, students will research and compare annual salaries of various careers requiring different levels of education and calculate the effects of different salaries on lifetime income. The project even allows for a career fair! This project is directly aligned to TEKS 6.14G and 6.14H.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Real-Life Bills – Similar to Price of Right games, give students a category – water, electricity, cable, phone, rent, groceries, etc – and have groups guess what the average or median cost of those types of bills would be. You can use your own bills as a reference or Google averages in your area. 

Household Budgets and Percent Practice – Students will take on the role of an employee working for “Remote Possibilities”,  a company that helps clients who work remotely to determine the best location to live based on the client’s income, financial goals, and lifestyle desires. Students will understand and apply concepts of personal budgets and minimum household budgets. This project is directly aligned to TEKS 7.13B and 7.13D.

Planning and Saving for College Project – Students will take on the role of a financial advisor working for Scholarly Savers, a company that counsels families through various financial situations. Students will research the cost of colleges and create a savings plan for a fictional client. This project is directly aligned to TEKS 8.12G and 8.12C.

EMPHASIZE VOCABULARY

When writing the units and really digging into the standards, I was blown away by the level of new concepts and terms that are introduced.  Ask students to use the academic vocabulary, and spend a few minutes at the beginning of each class reviewing. To spice it up, you could do a quick fly-swatter game, Quizizz, or Kahoot.

The 6th grade standards have 10 new vocabulary words introduced! For comparison, most units average around 5. 

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com
Word wall labels are from Jamie Roberts on TpT

Common Misconceptions

Overall, I think the biggest challenge is that while these terms are familiar to us as adults, they are foreign to students.  Credit reports? Grants? Work-study? Like I said before, this unit is probably the most vocabulary dense unit in middle school math. 

  • Grants are needs-based, while scholarships are needs- and merit-based
  • Confusing total value with interest in the compound interest formula
  • Confusing the terms “assets” and “liabilities” on a net worth statement
  • A debit card is different that than the verb, “debit”

Anchor Chart

Anchor charts are fabulous ways to showcase the content in a visual manner for students to reference.  They can easily be created before the lesson or as you are teaching, depending on the content.

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school!

Do you have any other great ideas for teaching the personal financial literacy standards?  

Teaching ideas and activities to support the personal financial literacy standards in middle school! maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts since 2014. This post was originally published in March 2018. It has been updated for relevance and clarity.

The post Personal Financial Literacy Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/personal-financial-literacy-activities-for-middle-school/feed/ 2
5 Ideas for Teaching Surface Area https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-ideas-for-teaching-surface-area/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=70004 Surface Area is the amount of space covering the outside of a 3D shape. This math concept allows students to visualize and is concrete, but that doesn’t mean all students will immediately excel. Let’s talk about some of our best tips for teaching surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids. Standards Let’s start with the […]

The post 5 Ideas for Teaching Surface Area appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Surface Area is the amount of space covering the outside of a 3D shape. This math concept allows students to visualize and is concrete, but that doesn’t mean all students will immediately excel. Let’s talk about some of our best tips for teaching surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids.

Standards

Let’s start with the standards. While surface area is covered in 8th CCSS, it spans both 7th and 8th grade in the TEKS.

Teaching surface area is hands-on and engaging! Check out these 5 ideas for surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids! | mneuveringthemiddle.com

One thing to note is that in 7th grade, students will use a net to determine the surface area of 3D shapes. In 8th grade, students will have access to formulas to solve.

Lateral vs. Total Surface Area

In the standards above, lateral and total surface area are distinct. Students must be able to carefully read a problem and determine if the area of the bases should be included. I have students who would absolutely see the net below and start finding the surface area without even reading whether the question was asking for the lateral or total surface area. A tip here would be to ask students to write “no bases” when they see lateral surface area and draw Xs on the bases.

Problems in which lateral surface area is often seen:

  • Surface area of a soup can label
  • Surface area of an oatmeal canister
  • The amount of square feet covered when rolling a paint roller or rolling pin 
  • The amount of paint needed to paint the walls of a room

Tips for Teaching

Because 7th grade requires use of nets to solve for total and lateral surface area, students are going to need a method for organizing their work. Sara, a member of our curriculum team, recommends, “Find the area of each face and write the area on the net, then students add up each face to find the total or lateral surface area.”

Teaching surface area is hands-on and engaging! Check out these 5 ideas for surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids! | mneuveringthemiddle.com

This is also helpful when it comes to grading because you can give credit to students who may have made a computation error on one of the faces, impacting their final answer. This may be enough motivation for students to show their work. 

In the image above, the pen colors for the formulas and calculations match the shading for the corresponding faces. These are small things that can really help students follow along. (This image is a screen grab from our All Access Student Videos.)

You can also ask students to create a table to organize their work, similar to our Surface Area Student Handout 2 shown below. 

8th Grade Formula Chart

For 8th grade, the STAAR reference sheet for surface area looks like this (outlined in green).

Teaching surface area is hands-on and engaging! Check out these 5 ideas for surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids! | mneuveringthemiddle.com

You will need to repeat the phrases, “perimeter of the base,” “area of the base” and “height of the prism” until you lose your voice. This is a great time to rapidly cold call students to ask what each variable represents. 

Triangular and Rectangular Pyramids

Pyramids are included in 7th grade TEKS and 7th grade CCSS.  

A pyramid is composed of a base and triangular faces. The pyramid is named by the shape of the base – so triangular prisms have a triangle base while rectangular pyramids have a square or rectangle as a base.  Pyramids have one base and the lateral faces all come to one point, the vertex. 

It is important to differentiate between the lateral height (which is the height of the triangular face) and the height of the pyramid. This will be an important distinction when they transition to calculating volume in later units. 

Students sometimes struggled with differentiating between pyramids and triangular prisms.  To help students, ask,  “Are there more triangles or quadrilaterals?” If there are more triangles, then you have a pyramid. If there are more quadrilaterals, then you have a triangular prism. 

Activity Ideas

1. Make it hands on

In 7th grade, surface area is a brand new concept, so students will need time to understand what surface area is. Reusing amazon boxes, cereal boxes, or cracker boxes can be a great exercise to make the connection between 3D figures and their nets. You can provide student groups with a 3D box, they measure the dimensions (length, width, height), and then carefully cut to form the rectangular prism’s net. They will see those same dimensions that form the box’s net. 

In addition, bring in soup cans (cylinders) and peel off the label to show the rectangular face of a cylinder.  It can be tricky for students to see how a rectangle fits on a cylinder’s net.

2. Digital Activities

Our 7th Grade Surface Area Digital Activities do a fantastic job of breaking down the nets (see below). Our 8th Grade Surface Area Digital Activities provide great application opportunities.

Teaching surface area is hands-on and engaging! Check out these 5 ideas for surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids! | mneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Change Up the Writing Utensil

Using formulas over and over again can be pretty repetitive. Allowing students to practice using dry erase markers or chalk outside is a great way to break it up.

4. Assess Creatively

This performance task activity is a great way to apply surface area. 

5. Match Nets to Shapes

This Surface Area and Nets Cut and Paste (no time to cut and glue? Just make it a matching activity) is perfect for students to practice matching nets with their corresponding 3D shape.

Teaching surface area is hands-on and engaging! Check out these 5 ideas for surface area of prisms, cylinders, and pyramids! | mneuveringthemiddle.com

Common Misconceptions

There are quite a few, so let’s dig in:

  • Assuming the base of the figure is the face is at the bottom. Make sure to emphasize that the base must be congruent and parallel for prisms and cylinders. 
    • I love this simple idea from a member of our curriculum team, Ashleigh, “Students assume the figure is always sitting on its base, so I would hold up a triangular prism (this one was hardest for them). I would lay it in my hand where it was “sitting” on the triangle. They would tell me it was a triangular prism. Then I would flip it over where it was laying on one of the rectangular faces and ask them what it was again. They would say it was still a triangular prism. This helped them see that no matter which way it was facing or which shape was on the bottom didn’t matter.” 
  • Using the formula, students will plug in a length or width of the base instead of the total area of the base. Our curriculum writers, Reagan and Asheigh, recommend always solving for the area of the base first and separately and clearly label it a B
  • Students think that height is always a vertical measurement. Height is perpendicular to the base no matter where the base sits.
  • With triangular prisms, there are so many heights and so many bases. This can be so confusing! Avoid using the words “height” or “base” without saying “height of the triangle” or “height of the prism.” Base is now and forever “area of the base” and always solved first separately. 
  • When working with cylinders, students may confuse the diameter and the radius. Radius, as a word, is shorter than diameter which supported my reminder that the radius is half of its diameter.

What tips do you have for teaching surface area?

The post 5 Ideas for Teaching Surface Area appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Utilizing Our STAAR Question Bank https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/utilizing-our-staar-question-bank/ Tue, 28 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=67866 STAAR is a registered trademark of the Texas Education Agency. Maneuvering the Middle® is not affiliated with or sponsored by the Texas Education Agency or the State of Texas. For Texas Teachers The STAAR (State of Texas Assessment of Academic Readiness) is moving online with a variety of new open-ended question types. Maneuvering the Middle […]

The post Utilizing Our STAAR Question Bank appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
STAAR is a registered trademark of the Texas Education Agency. Maneuvering the Middle® is not affiliated with or sponsored by the Texas Education Agency or the State of Texas.

For Texas Teachers

The STAAR (State of Texas Assessment of Academic Readiness) is moving online with a variety of new open-ended question types. Maneuvering the Middle has designed a bank of questions to prepare middle school math teachers for these changes.

This post is part 2 in our series about the STAAR redesign. To learn about all of the changes, go back and read last week’s post

Today we are going to be chatting about our STAAR Question Bank and how you can use it in your math classroom. 

Using the Question Bank

Every classroom is different – different students, different learning styles, and different class lengths. We sought to create a resource that can be flexible for teachers to use based on their students’ needs. 

Recommendations:

  • Gradually work through the questions together in class – Don’t assign students 20 STAAR new question types for homework. Testing can be stressful for students, and their confidence needs to be built not in isolation. 
  • Allow questions to encourage discussion and helpful clarification – Assigning the question bank as an independent assignment can result in missed opportunities for students to ask about the functionality of the online assessment.
  • Select and use the questions your students need the most – The resource can still be effective even if your students don’t work on every single problem. 
Texas is changing with adding new STAAR questions. Check out MTM's tips for utilizing Maneuvering the Middle's STAAR Question Bank. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Classroom Routine Idea

I would recommend spending around 10 minutes on preparing students for the new question types by following this routine.

  • Project a question and provide a paper copy to students (makes a great warm-up)
  • Allow students a few minutes to work through the question on their own. Circulate and observe.
  • Come back together to discuss solutions, strategies, and misconceptions. Provide feedback to students. 

The STAAR Question Bank is intended to look exactly like what they will see on the STAAR test, but it doesn’t have the technology functionality. Fortunately, TEA has provided a STAAR online practice test (just click the green “Sign In” button at the bottom of the screen). Choose a day before STAAR to allow students to take a practice test where they can play with the functionality of the new question types and you can circulate and answer questions.

Strategies and Support for New Question Types

This is not exhaustive, but here is a list of things I would point out to students about the new question types. 

  1. Equation Editor 
    • Allow students time in class to look at examples of keypads and ask any questions about unfamiliar keys.
    • Ask questions such as – How would you handle a fraction? An equation or inequality? An exponent?
    • When a question requires a fraction or exponent, pull up an equation editor sampler question to look at how certain functions appear.
  2. Graphing
    • In most instances, students need to be able to identify correct points and not actually create the line aspect of the graph themselves; so in your practice, focus on discrete points and being able to test (x, y) values that are true for their scenario.
    • After they have chosen points, ask – does the resulting line or shape make sense/seem reasonable? (Example: the slope should be negative but their points created a positive slope)
    • Students will need to carefully observe the scales of the x and y-axis before creating the graphs.
  3. Number Line
    • Highlight the differences in the button options (open, filled, left, right) as the buttons might all look similar and details can be easy to overlook.
    • Remind students that there are two steps to creating a number line – selecting a button and then dragging the circle to the correct point on the number line. 
    • After the students create the number line, have them select a point in the solution set to check their answer.
  4. Inline Choice
    • Encourage students to re-read their final selections as sometimes choosing an option mid sentence can interrupt their train of thought.
  5. Hot Spot
    • Be sure they read to understand exactly what detail they are looking for (is it one point, two?).
    • These are like multiple choice questions, but instead of A, B, C, D, they are choosing points on the graph.
    • Remind students that they are often selecting more than one single point. 
  6. Drag and Drop
    • Read to see if options can be used more than once.
    • Treat these like multiple choice questions and apply any same strategies – process of elimination or  “plug in” choices to see if true 
  7. Match Table Grid
    • Take time first to read columns and understand what they are identifying, sorting, or classifying each statement by to provide guidance in how they read through each example
    • Highlight that an answer must be selected in each row and not to leave a row unmarked
  8. Multiselect 
    • How many should I choose? Which are obviously incorrect? 

STAAR Test Prep Unit + Question Bank

The STAAR Redesign Question Bank serves as a gradual practice where kids are becoming familiar with the question types over time. In addition, they are benefitting from spiral review over the readiness standards. 

The test prep units, instead, provides a more intensive and immersive content review organized by unit concepts.

Texas is changing with adding new STAAR questions. Check out MTM's tips for utilizing Maneuvering the Middle's STAAR Question Bank. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Teachers could combine the test prep unit together with the STAAR question bank. In both resources, there is more content than there are days to prepare, so teachers will need to prioritize what to focus on. But hey, that is what data is for! 

What questions do you have about the STAAR Redesign Question Bank?

Texas is changing with adding new STAAR questions. Check out MTM's tips for utilizing Maneuvering the Middle's STAAR Question Bank. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Utilizing Our STAAR Question Bank appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
TEA STAAR Redesign https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tea-staar-redesign/ Tue, 21 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=67846 STAAR is a registered trademark of the Texas Education Agency. Maneuvering the Middle® is not affiliated with or sponsored by the Texas Education Agency or the State of Texas. For Texas Teachers If you teach middle school math in the great state of Texas, then this is for you! The STAAR (State of Texas Assessment […]

The post TEA STAAR Redesign appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
STAAR is a registered trademark of the Texas Education Agency. Maneuvering the Middle® is not affiliated with or sponsored by the Texas Education Agency or the State of Texas.

The TEA STAAR Redesign is coming Spring 2023! Check out what changes you and your students can expect to see on the Math STAAR and what MTM resources can help.| maneuveringthemiddle.com

For Texas Teachers

If you teach middle school math in the great state of Texas, then this is for you! The STAAR (State of Texas Assessment of Academic Readiness) has made some pretty significant changes starting in the 2022-2023 school year which means your students will be taking a different test than in years prior. Let’s check out what the TEA STAAR redesign has in store for you.

This is probably not your first time to hear this information. I imagine you will be attending (or have already attended) some professional developments regarding STAAR changes, but this post will serve as a general synopsis of what the changes are and how Maneuvering the Middle will aid in your preparation. Come back next week where I will give more tips on how to use this new resource effectively with your students. 

Why is STAAR changing?

STAAR is changing to better align with how students are learning in the classroom. According to TEA, “Classroom practices that over-use multiple choice questions… can get small, short-term gains on STAAR, but evidence has shown they don’t lead to high performance or long-term mastery.”

What is Changing?

House Bill 3906 (first time I have reference a specific law on this blog, I believe) requires these changes to improve the STAAR (not all of the changes are listed):

  • 75% multiple choice question cap
  • Transition to 100% online testing

75% multiple choice question cap means there will be 25% (or more) free response type of questions that will be NEW question types. This means your students are moving away from filling in the griddable and will need exposure to the new question types. This will allow students more ways to show their understanding. 

The TEA STAAR Redesign is coming Spring 2023! Check out what changes you and your students can expect to see on the Math STAAR and what MTM resources can help.| maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Equation editor – Students can write responses in the form of fractions, expressions, equations or inequalities
  • Graphing – Students select points, draw lines, drag bar graphs and more to create different types of graphs
  • Number Line – Students select a point, an open or closed circle, and a direction arrow to demonstrate a solution set on a number line
  • Inline Choice – Students select the correct answer(s) from a drop-down menu
  • Hot Spot – Students respond by selecting one or more specific areas of a graphic
  • Drag and Drop – Students evaluate given options (words, numbers, symbols, etc) and chooses which response(s) to drag to a given area (a diagram, map, chart, etc)
  • Match Table Grid – Students match statements or objects to different categories presented in a table grid
  • Multiselect – Students can select more than one correct answer from a set of possible answers

If you are feeling a little anxious reading this list, you aren’t alone. Let’s take a collective deep breath together… ahhhhhhh. (Did you read that as screaming? No? Me neither.)

Source: TEA Website

Maneuvering the Middle’s STAAR Question Bank

Our curriculum team has been working hard behind the scenes to prepare a question bank with a variety of practice problems presented in the new question type formats.  Your students get exposure to the new question types while reviewing the year’s content all at once. Win – win! 

While reviewing the content is of primary importance to encourage students’ success in answering questions correctly, we believe practicing the new question type formats achieves two main goals:

  1. To relieve students’ anxiety that inevitably comes when seeing something presented in a new way. 
  2. To increase success on all question types – even multiple choice formats. Many of the new question type formats require deeper thinking that can translate to success on the multiple choice questions.

How did we create a Question Bank?

When creating this STAAR Question Bank, we researched and became familiar with the new question types based on the released materials and practice tests.

Every readiness standard was studied and their historical trends were analyzed. Based on our findings, we asked ourselves, What question types would the standard naturally lend itself to?”

  • Open-ended questions or multiple choice questions with a single value answer could be assessed as an equation editor on the new test
  • Vocabulary concepts, comparisons, or procedures could be assessed as inline choice
  • Sorting or classifying concepts might be assess as a match table grid
  • Questions that lend themselves to multiple follow-up questions, observations or more than one correct representation/answer might easily be asked as multi-select 

Grab Your STAAR Question Bank Resource

Next week will be talking about HOW to use the STAAR Question Bank in your classroom, so be sure to come back!

Texas teachers, how are you feeling about these changes to the TEA STAAR redesign?

The TEA STAAR Redesign is coming Spring 2023! Check out what changes you and your students can expect to see on the Math STAAR and what MTM resources can help.| maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post TEA STAAR Redesign appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Pi Day Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/pi-day-activities/ Tue, 14 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=67856 Pi Day (3.14 – March 14) is on a Tuesday in 2023. Embrace the chance to celebrate this mathematical holiday by circling back (see what I did there?) to these FREE activities for your students! We are happy to share that we have the perfect FREE activities (that’s right, plural!) for your students! Download your […]

The post Pi Day Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Pi Day (3.14 – March 14) is on a Tuesday in 2023. Embrace the chance to celebrate this mathematical holiday by circling back (see what I did there?) to these FREE activities for your students!

We are happy to share that we have the perfect FREE activities (that’s right, plural!) for your students! Download your free resources below and read our best tips on teaching circles. 

Pi day activities are perfect for March 14! Grab 3 free activities and check out our tips for teaching circles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tips for Teaching

Before I jump to the activity list, let me please share some tips for teaching the various intricacies regarding circles. 

Vocabulary and Formulas

  • Vocabulary is key! I never tire of saying that. Circles have their unique set of terms (radius, diameter, circumference), so embrace it. Create arm movements, put them on your word wall, or create and reference an anchor chart that has all of the parts of a circle labeled. 
  • Label, label, and then label some more! One criteria for success I had in my geometry units was to always label the shapes. If a circle is provided, label the parts! If a model with a diameter is given, require students to draw and label the radius before moving on to solve the problem. 
  • d=2r and r=d/2 is something I made students write on every problem. Problems generally give diameter when asking for the area or radius when asking for the circumference, so the first step would be to find the measurements actually needed to solve. It helped bypass the mistake of just plugging in any ol’ number into the formula. 
  • Pizzas are circles! The crust represents the circumference (which they both conveniently start with C) and the sauce is the area.
  • Write the relevant formulas! Not only does this help students internalize the various formulas, but it also helps students practice substitution. 
  • Be sure to highlight that the radius and diameter pass through the center of the circle. This will be an important distinction as students see different segments in a circle in high school geometry. 
Pi day activities are perfect for March 14! Grab 3 free activities and check out our tips for teaching circles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

More Tips

  • Draw your shapes! If no model is provided, require your students to draw a circle and label the given parts. This helps contextualize the problem! 
  • Consider purchasing sewing measuring tapes in addition to rulers for your classroom. They make measuring the circumference of a circle easier than using a string that will then have to be measured too. Not to mention, they are easier to store! You can also print your own paper rulers that do the exact same thing but will be limited by the length of a standard 8.5×11 piece of paper. Lastly, places like IKEA, HomeGoods, and TJ Maxx have long paper rulers too!
  • Sir Cumference and the Dragon of Pi is a book that I have not personally read, but I have seen recommended by many math teachers. Middle schoolers are not too cool for story time.

Helpful Videos

What is Pi?This video comprehensively explains pi and just about everything else regarding circles. I would fast forward to 3:20 for an excellent visualization of 3.14 diameters going around a circle’s circumference or you can watch the clip below.

Area of Circles – This video may be the best explanation I have ever seen of how the formula for area of a circle is derived. The visuals are not something you can recreate without the help of video editing, so I highly recommend showing it to your students before you cover calculating the area of circles.

Circumference of a Circle – This video explains circumference and solves a few circumference problems. 

Free Activities

Maneuvering the Middle Pi Day Activities – Choose from a variety of activities in this freebie, or use all 3 if you think that pi deserves more than just a day of celebration!

  • Pi Day Discovery Activity – Students can work collaboratively to explore the relationship between the circumference and diameter of circles by measuring mini pies. 
  • Pi Day Two Truths and a Pi – This play on two truths and a lie has students finding which statement is false about various measurements related to circles. 
  • Pi Day Riddle Activity – This self-checking activity asks students to calculate circumference and area of circles. The riddle is a nice touch!

Make Bubbles

Grab a jumbo container of bubble solution, mix in food coloring, and allow students to blow a bubble on paper. Once the bubble pops, students measure the diameter and from there can calculate the area and circumference.

Go Outside and Run Idea

Have an especially active class? This idea is for you! Go outside and form a giant circle with your class. Choose two runners. One runner will be running the diameter of the circle while the other is running the circumference. The idea is to see how many times the diameter runner can go back and forth before the circumference runner makes it back to their original spot. Assuming the runners’ speeds are fairly similar, it should be a little more than 3 times. Repeat with different students to get all of the wiggles out. 😉

Measure Circles

Circles are everywhere! Tops of tupperware lids, paper plates, old CDs, cups, and Hula hoops. Ask students to bring something circular from home to class and now you have 30 hands-on, practice problems for students to complete.

Need more Circle Practice?

Pi day activities are perfect for March 14! Grab 3 free activities and check out our tips for teaching circles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Pi Day Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Ways to Make Math Relevant https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/#comments Tue, 07 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2873 We encounter math on a daily basis, but it can be a challenge for students to connect what they learn in class to the outside world. Here are 4 (update: 5!) ways teachers can engage students by making math relevant to their lives. LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY 1. Share Your Enthusiasm The key […]

The post 4 Ways to Make Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

We encounter math on a daily basis, but it can be a challenge for students to connect what they learn in class to the outside world. Here are 4 (update: 5!) ways teachers can engage students by making math relevant to their lives.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Share Your Enthusiasm

The key to modeling what it looks like to be a math person is to share your excitement! Excitement is contagious. In my classroom, I loved teaching ratios and proportions! As a class, students performed so high on the concepts. While I can’t be certain it was caused by my enthusiasm, it sure did help!

2. Promote Problem Solving

A second way to make math relevant is to promote problem solving in your classroom! (We talk about problem solving more in depth here.)

“When are we ever going to use this?” used to scare me. I used to think students were asking as a ‘gotcha,’ but I think most students genuinely want to know. They are curious how the unfamiliar concept connects to their life.  

So, I love to set the stage at the beginning of the year. I say that math is all about learning to problem solve. Problem solving is a skill that is limitless in where it will take you. Regardless of your future profession, you will be required to problem solve, and persevering through a math problem gives you the confidence and grit to do so in the real world.  

Make this a mantra in your class and continue to reinforce it all year long.

3.  Tailor Curriculum to Students’ Interests

This study shares that when the curriculum (in this case, Algebra 1) is personalized to students’ interests, they are more successful.

“In the study, half of the students chose one of several categories that interested them — things like music, movies, sports, social media — and were given an algebra curriculum based on those topics.  The other half received no interest-based personalization… Walkington found that students who had received interest-based personalization mastered concepts faster.” 

While changing your entire curriculum and/or rewriting problems may not be something you can realistically manage, consider Walkington’s approach. “We picked out the students who seemed to be struggling the most in Algebra I, and we found that for this sub-group of students that were way behind, the personalization was more effective.”

So this may be something that you consider as you write future problems or consider future projects. What are your struggling students genuinely interested in? How can you include that in your math class? Can your classroom economy be related to an interest? What about the names of your groups? 

One quick win comes to mind. When I was teaching small groups, I had 3 students who needed a little extra incentive to stay engaged. They loved soccer, so we made everything soccer related. As they got problems correct, they scored “goals,” counters were soccer balls, and all word problems were changed on the spot to be soccer themed

4.  Teach Students to Ask the Questions

In the book Quality Questioning, the author breaks down the importance of the questions we ask in the classroom and the responses we accept from our students.  One of the key things they mention is teaching students how to ask questions on their own and providing them the opportunity to do so.  

This easy lift is a great way to engage students. 

  • It extends students’ thinking
  • Makes for great math discourse
  • Any student can participate
  • Allows for students to flex their creativity muscles
  • Students make interesting connections

There are a few options here. 

  1. When presenting a word problem, cover up the question. Typically, a world problem gives information and then asks a question. Instead cover up that last question, and ask students to come up with a question. 
  2. Put up a graph, a table, a picture of a price at the grocery store, a receipt, whatever you can find that has some numbers of it, and ask students: “What could the question be?”
We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Try it with your class at the beginning of your rates or proportionality unit. What could the question be? And then ask again at the end of the unit and see what your students have learned. 

Another idea could be to simply take your receipt from your latest gas purchase, project it, and ask students: what could the question be? 

5. Include Projects to Your Scope and Sequence

Project Based Learning is popular for a reason! Students take more ownership in their learning, and experience first hand how math can help solve real-world problems. Maneuvering the Middle’s projects are perfect for this. 

When students ask, “When will I ever use this?” then it may be time to start a project. Here is a snippet of what our projects ask students to solve:

RATIONAL NUMBERS + LINEAR RELATIONSHIPS

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

FINANCIAL LITERACY

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze the best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

What are some of the ways you make math relevant to your students?

We use math everyday, but sometimes students struggle to see this. Here are 4 ways to make math relevant in that classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 4 Ways to Make Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/make-math-relevant/feed/ 4
Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/#comments Tue, 24 Jan 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=66610 If you haven’t had a chance to read part 1 Teaching Factoring Trinomials, then go back and do that before reading anymore. Today we are going to discuss Factoring Polynomials with special cases. Factoring Trinomials When A>1 I hesitated to put a>1 in this blog post since it isn’t necessarily a special case, but I […]

The post Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you haven’t had a chance to read part 1 Teaching Factoring Trinomials, then go back and do that before reading anymore. Today we are going to discuss Factoring Polynomials with special cases.

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Factoring Trinomials When A>1

I hesitated to put a>1 in this blog post since it isn’t necessarily a special case, but I considered that you probably would teach this AFTER you teach factoring trinomials when a=1.

Let’s dive in! 

Double check that there isn’t a GCF that can be factored out the a, b, c terms. 

The AC method is a great way to teach your students how to factor. Explaining this method through text is hard to follow (I tried), so again, I am going to pass it to Sara to teach you how to factor trinomials when a>1.

Insert video here

If you love this video, then check out All Access, our curriculum membership that includes ~3 videos for every single lesson! She is also using the Student Handouts that are available in our Factoring Polynomials Unit.

Using the Box Method

The box method is excellent, and if you taught it when factoring trinomials when a=1, then there isn’t much new to cover. This video shows how to do this, but I also included a few graphics for you to reference. 

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Factoring with Difference of Squares 

I love difference of squares! We like to start by explaining how difference of squares exists. Let’s take x^2 -16. You can still ask your students, “What multiplies to -16 that also adds to 0?” Remember that b=0 in a difference of squares polynomial.

Forgive my repetitiveness, but remember that we still have to check to see if there is a Greatest Common Factor!

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When I taught Algebra 2, we did Around the World or Head to Head Challenges using squares and square roots. I wanted students to internalize squares and square roots (for a multitude of reasons) but it served this skill very well. You may consider putting up an anchor chart so students have a visual.

Perfect Square Trinomials

By the time you are teaching perfect square trinomials, it is likely that students may have already factored a few perfect square trinomials. In fact, you don’t actually have to teach perfect square trinomials as a special case – it is helpful for students to recognize patterns, absolutely! Students can still factor these trinomials using the methods already taught!

Teaching students to recognize the form is helpful and will increase their proficiency in taking the square root of numbers. 

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do you teach factoring trinomials and polynomials?

Factoring polynomials with special cases: difference of squares, perfect square trinomials, and a>1. Check out our tips for teaching! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Factoring Polynomials with Special Cases appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/factoring-polynomials-with-special-cases/feed/ 1
Teaching Factoring Trinomials https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-factoring-trinomials/ Tue, 17 Jan 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=66608 Factoring trinomials relies on many prerequisite skills (distributing, multiplying polynomials, finding a greatest common factor, exponent rules, and integer operations… I’m sure there are more). It also sets the stage for future success in solving quadratic equations and graphing quadratic functions. This makes factoring polynomials so important for students to conquer. As a student, I […]

The post Teaching Factoring Trinomials appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Factoring trinomials relies on many prerequisite skills (distributing, multiplying polynomials, finding a greatest common factor, exponent rules, and integer operations… I’m sure there are more). It also sets the stage for future success in solving quadratic equations and graphing quadratic functions.

This makes factoring polynomials so important for students to conquer. As a student, I remember only learning to guess and check, and lucky for us now, there are better ways!

Introducing Factoring with Algebra Tiles

I learned this method from Making Math Moments. You can watch the full video here or read on. Before even introducing factoring polynomials, ask your students to represent a trinomial using Algebra tiles like this one below: 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Before proceeding, make sure your students understand that the area of the x tile is x*1. 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Then ask your students to arrange the tiles in a rectangle using all of the pieces. Let them solve this puzzle – they may leave pieces out or create a shape that isn’t a rectangle.

Then ask them to figure out what the dimensions (the length and the width) of the rectangle would be. You haven’t explicitly taught factoring at this point. You are letting students explore and come up with their own patterns using hands-on practice. Here is the solution:

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle’s Factoring Polynomials Modeling Activity is the perfect way to introduce or practice this skill. You can find it in our Factoring Polynomials Activity Bundle.

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with the Greatest Common Factor

Students won’t get far without mastering factoring out the GCF. 

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start by teaching students to write all of the factors of each term and circle/highlight the factors that they each have in common. Then whichever factors are not in common, will be the terms that remain.

This idea is from our curriculum writer, Reagan. “When my kids struggled with factoring, it was usually because they didn’t have multiplication facts memorized.  When students struggled with this, we taught them to use their calculator to type y = #/x and look at the table to easily see all the factors.”

Factoring Trinomials When A=1

Keeping students’ work organized is key when teaching this skill, which is why I highly recommend showing students to organize their work using a sum and factors table. In the example above, you can see that the b term is the sum of 4 and 6 while simultaneously, the c term is the product of 4 and 6. Simply put, I would ask my students when trying to factor: 

  • What multiplies to c (24) that also adds up to b (10)?

If we couldn’t think of it off the top of our heads, we would make a table (which is especially helpful when you have a  negative b or negative c term.)

Watch the video to see how Sara teaches this:

If you love this video, check out All Access for more student videos!

Using The Box Method

The box method is also a great tool to familiarize your students with factoring. The same thinking of “what are the factors of c that will also add to b?” is required, but your students will practice more with finding the GCF of two terms which will set them up nicely when a>1. This silent video explains how to do this quite well.

You can also follow the visuals here:

If you are looking for some additional resources to use with your students, then check out the links below:

Make sure to come back next week when we talk about Factoring When a>1 and Difference of Squares and Perfect Square Trinomials.

How do you teach factoring trinomials?

Factoring trinomials sets the stage for solving and graphing quadratic equations. Check out the best methods for teaching this skill! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Factoring Trinomials appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Coordinate Plane Activities to Try https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/coordinate-plane-activities-to-try/ Tue, 20 Dec 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=65428 The coordinate plane is a personal favorite of mine. It is hands-on, reinforces the ordering of rational numbers, and spans all of secondary education. If there is a unit that I look most forward to – it is this one! Today I will share some tips for teaching the complexities of this grid and some […]

The post Coordinate Plane Activities to Try appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The coordinate plane is a personal favorite of mine. It is hands-on, reinforces the ordering of rational numbers, and spans all of secondary education. If there is a unit that I look most forward to – it is this one!

Today I will share some tips for teaching the complexities of this grid and some engaging activities that you and your students will love.

Three Tips for Teaching

The most common misconception you will see is students moving up and down on the y-axis before moving right or left on the x-axis. There are many memory tricks like “you have to crawl before you can climb” or “you have to cross the street before you can get on the elevator” to help students plan their steps. Because graphing on the coordinate plane doesn’t require “showing work” like setting up a proportion, I have no problem asking students to annotate the coordinates. I will model and require students to write a tiny right or left arrow over the x-coordinate and a tiny up or down arrow over the y-coordinate every single time they encounter a set of coordinates. I also ask students to label their graphs with “x-axis” and “y-axis.”

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Don’t overestimate students! It can be easy to think your 6th graders can graph on all 4 quadrants on day 1. Start by just graphing in Quadrant I on the first day. Then move to graphing on all 4 quadrants the second day. By the third day, you will be more successful graphing rational numbers.

Graphing on the axes can be particularly challenging. When I saw students mix up coordinates, it was usually because one of the coordinates was 0. Tip: remind students that if there is a 0 for that coordinate, then it won’t show up on that axis. For example, (0, 4) means that it cannot end up on the x-axis because it has a 0 for the x-coordinate. It has to end up in the y-axis. 

Coordinate Plane Activities

Coordinate Plane Unit – This 6th grade unit does an excellent job scaffolding instruction. Plus, student handouts, homework, a study guide, and an assessment are done for you!

Demos Coordinate Plane Activities – Desmos really delivers on this skill. I’ve linked the entire scope of their coordinate plane practice, but this Mini Golf Marble Slide is especially useful in plotting points, while incorporating error analysis. Battleboats is a play on Battleship, and I can visualize the engagement!

Coordinate Plane Digital Activities – Do you need practice for all of the 6th grade CCSS coordinate plane standards – introducing the parts of the graph, graphing, reflections, and distance? These digital activities cover everything, come with a 2-question exit ticket per skill, and include 16 total activities.

Stock the Shelves Online Game – I came across this website from a member of our Maneuvering the Middle VIPs facebook group. This is online practice for graphing integers on all 4 quadrants. I like that if a student is incorrect, they have to keep trying before they can move on to the next problem.

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Design a Dorm Room Performance Task – This Coordinate Plane Performance Task can be a typical assignment, group project, or an extension.  It requires students to think outside of the box as they solve real-word and mathematical problems by graphing on the coordinate plane. 

Create a Coordinate Plane on your Floor – Our MTM team member and current teacher Marissa is a big fan of this activity. She pushes all of the student desks to the edge of her classroom, and uses painters’ tape to create a giant coordinate plane. Students are then asked to walk the graph as they would plot points (start at the origin, walk the x-axis and then move vertically along the y-axis). In this activity, she has students practice reflecting over the axes using a partner to represent their reflection. 

Coordinate Plane Scavenger Hunt – Students will move around a coordinate plane map of the city using the clues provided at each station. Hands-on and interactive!

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Coordinate Plane Battleship – Students just need coordinate planes. Have them mark various points as their battleships. You call out various coordinates. Students say ‘hit’ when you say a coordinate that has one of their battleships on it. The student that still has a battleship at the end of the activity wins!

Flyswatter Game – The flyswatter game was perfect when I ended a lesson early or if I needed to inject some energy into my morning classes. Simply provide 2 students a flyswatter and give them locations to smack like:

  • The origin
  • The y-axis
  • The x-axis
  • The various quadrants
  • (5, -3) and more

What coordinate plane activities do your students love?

These coordinate plane activities are hands-on and engaging. These tips and ideas will help your students master this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Coordinate Plane Activities to Try appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math Activities to Survive December https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-activities-to-get-you-through-december/ Tue, 06 Dec 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=65404 The end of the semester is upon us! While the energy in your classroom may be brimming with anticipation, there is still math to be taught and deadlines that loom. Here are some December math activities that will get you to winter break. Math Activities to Survive December Business as Usual – Perhaps, you have […]

The post Math Activities to Survive December appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The end of the semester is upon us! While the energy in your classroom may be brimming with anticipation, there is still math to be taught and deadlines that loom. Here are some December math activities that will get you to winter break.

Math Activities to Survive December

Business as Usual – Perhaps, you have timed it perfectly; the end of the unit or your midterm falls on the last day before the break. Bravo! You are a planning wizard. 

1. Projects

If you haven’t heard, Maneuvering the Middle launched projects for 6th, 7th, 8th, and Algebra 1! These projects are flexible in nature and can span 3-7 days. They are purposeful, standards-based and make a great alternative to an assessment.  

Math activities for December are necessary to get you to the end of the semester. Here are 9 ideas plus a freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

RATIONAL NUMBERS + LINEAR RELATIONSHIPS

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

FINANCIAL LITERACY

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

2. Winter Solve and Color Freebie

If you need a day or two for your students to complete something calmly, but also keep it math related, check out our winter solve and color freebie.

Click here to get it!

  • 6th – Ratio Application
  • 7th – Proportional Relationships
  • 8th – Non-Proportional Relationships
  • Algebra 1 – Writing Linear Functions
Math activities for December are necessary to get you to the end of the semester. Here are 9 ideas plus a freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

These concepts are typically taught in the Fall and will be great for review.

*** Fun tip: Project a fireplace, turn on some tunes, provide some colored pencils, and walk around blissfully as the fire hypnotizes your students into a peaceful calm. 

3. Cookie + Dessert Recipe

This is a project that requires little planning and has a festive energy, but also engages students in a unique way. You can also give students a choice! Print off a variety of dessert recipes and allow students to pick what they would like to “make.”

Then students have to determine how much they need to make (ex: enough for the class, enough for the whole school, enough for the staff). Students have to use rational operations to calculate how much of each ingredient they will need.

You can go even further and have them shop for all of the ingredients using the various curbside or delivery options available. Texan here to recommend HEB.com.

4. Shop for Friends and Family

Let students go shopping! Give students a budget for how much they can spend to buy gifts for their friends and family. Give students a specific website to stay on like target.com and have them record their total. To spice it up, provide coupons and BOGO opportunities.

5. Jigsaw to Review

If you are preparing for a midterm, then a jigsaw may be right for your students! If you aren’t familiar with a jigsaw, essentially students become an expert in a specific math skill and then come back together with students who became experts on other math skills. Then, they teach each other their respective skills. If you need more ideas for test review, check out this test review post.

Just For Fun

While these are not December activities that are math specific, there are sometimes opportunities to do something winter themed and festive.

6. Gingerbread Houses

At my last school, we used the last few days of the semester to do celebratory type activities. I would ask students to save their milk cartons (they act as the base) from lunch for the week leading up to the activity, and have  students bring in various candies, frosting, and graham crackers. I would use butcher paper to cover my tables, we would decorate for an hour and then students would take their gingerbread houses home. 

Tip: You need plastic knives for spreading frosting, paper plates as a base, and gallon-sized plastic bags to transport.

7. Holiday Cards

This is the perfect activity for your class after a midterm or on an adjusted bell schedule class period. Students can make holiday cards for custodial staff, cafeteria workers, or administrators. You could also adopt a nearby assisted living facility! 

8. Make Snowflakes

I used this activity for our adjusted bell schedule (30 minute classes) after our benchmarks. Students needed a brain break, and I needed something for them to do. This is the video I used to make colossal snowflakes that were hung in the gym for the winter dance. 

No matter what you choose to do to make it the end of the semester this December, remember that students are jazzed for an upcoming break and to use that energy to create excitement for math. What December math activities are you planning on implementing?

The post Math Activities to Survive December appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Finding Percents Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/finding-percents-activities/ Tue, 29 Nov 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63990 Finding percents can be difficult for students – they are conceptually rigorous and typically found in a word problem. The solution? Strong instruction and plenty of practice. Here are a few tips and activities for calculating and finding percents. Make Percents Visual Percents are perfect for visual representation! There is no better way to do […]

The post Finding Percents Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Finding percents can be difficult for students – they are conceptually rigorous and typically found in a word problem. The solution? Strong instruction and plenty of practice. Here are a few tips and activities for calculating and finding percents.

Make Percents Visual

Percents are perfect for visual representation! There is no better way to do this than using a tape diagram. In fact, if you teach your students to set up a part/whole = %/100 proportion, then a tape diagram is just a picture of that exact proportion . The best part of the tape diagram visual is that students instinctively are better able to estimate answers based on using benchmark fractions like 50%. This modeling percent activity is perfect for practicing those tape diagrams!

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This Interactive Fraction Model is an awesome tool for exploration! When the numerator and the denominator are manipulated, the model, decimal, and percent are changed. You can also limit the number of denominator options or adjust how the model looks. 

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some questions and ideas for your class: 

  • What do you notice about the percent when the numerator is greater than the denominator?
  • What fractions give you repeating decimals?
  • Give students a percent, and ask them to discover the equivalent fraction.

Bring a king size Hershey bar to class.  Discuss what size it is and then draw the connection to a percent bar (aka tape diagram).  Ask students to describe how many rectangles would be one-half, one-fourth, etc. Then connect this to 50%, 80%, etc.

What percent of Manhattan is Central Park? As an adult, I estimate percents more than I actually calculate or find percents, so I thought this lesson was a great way to get students to begin estimating percents. The video introduces the question, “What percent of Manhattan is made up of Central Park?” Students will have to discuss and ask questions about what information that they still need in order to solve. 

Percent Application

Percents are everywhere. Introducing percents was met with a lot of buy-in from students; they have some prior experience with percents in their grades or at the store. Let’s capitalize on that interest by using as many real-world opportunities as possible. 

Financial Literacy + Percent Project – This project is a homerun! Students are tasked with helping their “clients” who work remotely find the best place to live based on their income, financial goals, and lifestyle. Students will use finding percents to make decisions about the best use of their client’s income. 

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Posing Percent Problems on Desmos – “Students apply what they’ve learned about increasing and decreasing by a percentage to generate and answer questions about the society in which we live.” This activity is more paper-based than what we traditionally see from Desmos, but it puts the responsibility on the student to determine the question. For example, a student is provided facts about wage gaps, and then asked to come up with the question and the answer based on that wage gap fact. There is opportunity for some interesting responses.

Percent of Change Class Demonstration – Check out what one of our teachers had to say about this activity:

“Today’s lesson is always one of my absolute favorites. We do the shopping activity for percent change…It not only gives the kids a bunch of practice with percent change, but gets them asking so many big questions! “Why would magazines get so expensive? Don’t they want us to read and learn?” “Why aren’t coffee prices higher? Are the coffee workers making enough money?”

Finding percents is a skill that requires lots of practice. These 7 activities will help your students success in calculating percentages. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

General Tips

There are several ways to determine the percent of a number, including an equation, a proportion, or a tape diagram (percent bar).  I suggest teaching all of the methods to see what clicks the best with your students. Additionally, I would assign some problems to only set up the problem without solving. 

Consider using a similar problem and similar information to show students how to set up problems and solve for different parts of the equation/proportion.

  • Example 1: A carnival is made up of 80 booths. Of those 80 booths, 14 sell food. What percentage of the booths sell food? (finding the percent)
  • Example 2: At a second carnival, food booths make up 40% of the total booths. There are 16 food booths. How many total booths are at this carnival? (finding the total)
  • Example: At a third carnival, there are 75 booths. 30% are food booths. How many food booths are there? (find the part)

When annotating word problems, I would require my students to write a fraction bar with 100 under any percent that they came across. This reminded students that we were going to use 100 in our solving.

FDP Everyday – Students calculate the number of days they have been at school over a total (it could be the month, number of days until the next break, or total number of school days there are) and then calculate the decimal and percent.  It’s a perfect warm-up or extension activity. 

If you have a Flocabulary Account, your students will enjoy this Percent rap

What finding percents activities do your students enjoy? 

The post Finding Percents Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Mastering Order of Operations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/#comments Tue, 15 Nov 2022 12:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63701 Order of Operations is a student and teacher favorite! Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally might be the most common mnemonic device to ever exist, so let’s chat a little bit about how to make order of operations engaging for your students. What is/are the Order of Operations? Order of Operations is the rule provided […]

The post Mastering Order of Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Order of Operations is a student and teacher favorite! Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally might be the most common mnemonic device to ever exist, so let’s chat a little bit about how to make order of operations engaging for your students.

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is/are the Order of Operations?

Order of Operations is the rule provided to standardize how to solve any problem involving multiple operations.

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

You have probably seen popular memes like the one below where you can find a spirited debate in the comments. In fact, showing this to students would be a great hook! “By the end of today, you will be able to tell these people what is ACTUALLY the correct answer!” (Though there are arguments for both!)

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start Simple by Scaffolding

Like most (all?) math skills, order of operations benefits from scaffolding. It is actually the perfect skill to scaffold – you are in direct control of how many steps are included in each problem! Start with a two-step problem, move to a three-step problem, then continue until your students have mastered multiple-step problems. 

Depending on the grade level you are teaching, you will either be working with whole numbers, possibly integers, and finally rational numbers. If you teach 7th grade, then you will be covering everything! Start with whole numbers before moving to problems that include integers and rational numbers.

I love this 6th grade Maneuvering the Middle Student Handout 2 problem. Each problem is just asking for what the first step would be. Brilliant!

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Showing Your Work Tips

I can’t think of a math skill where students want to try to do it all in their heads more than order of operations. Not rewriting the problem after each step makes students prone to error. Here are three ideas that make showing work fundatory (fun + mandatory):

  1. Don’t ask for the final answer.  Instead, ask what would the problem look like after they “insert an operation”
  2. Tell students that you aren’t grading their final answer at all – just their work! This will make students who are okay with losing credit for not showing their work think again since they won’t even get credit for their correct answer. 
  3. Try a round table activity! A group of 2-4 students will work on a problem together rotating through the problem after each step. Teamwork requires every step to be written down.

Make it Visual

As you can see, my PEMDAS poster lived on my wall year around. And you can have it for free! Click here to get your free PEMDAS poster. 

Encourage students to write down the acronym vertically down their page and cross off the letter/operations as they solved the problem. Students can be enormously successful using this strategy! When I modeled order of operations problems, I highlighted or underlined the step I was completing. This helps students too!

Try These Activities

All of these activities were a hit in my classroom! Students really can’t practice a skill too much. 🙂

Order of operations is a student and teacher favorite. Check out our tips for mastering this math skill in your middle school classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do you teach order of operations?

The post Mastering Order of Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/mastering-order-of-operations/feed/ 1
Self-Checking Activities in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/#comments Wed, 09 Nov 2022 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63725 One of the best classroom procedures that you can teach your students is the routine for self-checking work. Self-checking activities and self-checking routines were a game changer for me!  Does this sound familiar? You just sit down with your small group when you see a raised hand. You vacate your small group table to check […]

The post Self-Checking Activities in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
One of the best classroom procedures that you can teach your students is the routine for self-checking work. Self-checking activities and self-checking routines were a game changer for me! 

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Does this sound familiar? You just sit down with your small group when you see a raised hand. You vacate your small group table to check on this student when they point to their first completed problem and ask, “Is this right?” You can’t fault this student for wanting feedback, but there has got to be a better way!

Benefits of Self-Checking

Self-checking procedures and activities will give students the autonomy to take control of their learning. Not only are they taking more ownership of their math understanding, but they are now able to work at their own pace. (Reminder to provide extension opportunities!) They are able to get the feedback they need to move on.

Like in the example above, students just want to know if they are doing it right. Who wants to complete an entire worksheet of problems to find out at the end that they had made a critical error over and over again that could have been corrected after the first problem? On the other hand, there are also students who won’t ask if they are solving correctly, so they could end up in the same boat of making a repeated mistake too.

For the teacher, giving students the ability to check their own work in real-time, gives you the opportunity to circulate to look for common misconceptions, facilitate stations, or host a small group. 

Simple Ideas for Self-Checking

These are a non-exhaustive list of self-checking ideas that I have tried in my own classroom. They are all very tweakable!  Find out what works best for you and your students. 

  • Mixed answer key – This was my go to! I would simply project or write the answers to all of the problems in a random order on the board. Students would solve a problem and look up on the board to make sure that they saw their answer somewhere. To be extra clear, these answers were not numbered with the problem number. 
  • Formative – We have a blog post from 2020 all about Formative that I recommend taking a look at. This technology is gold! You can post an assignment and students can submit answers and receive immediate feedback. Win-win!
  • Hidden answer key – I would create an exemplar answer key with all of the work displayed, make copies of it onto a bright color cardstock, and then put the copies into a folder that each table group shared. After every 2 or so problems, students were able to check their work and answers against my answer key. I found that the answer keys being placed in the folder prevented students from being tempted to copy while also giving them the opportunity to check their work against my work. That way if the student did miss a problem, they were able to look at my work to figure out their mistake which was perfect before a test.
  • Odd answers Only – Similar to textbooks, I would just write the answers to odd problems on the worksheet right next to the corresponding question.
  • Post the answer key to Google Classroom or Schoology for them to check after a certain timeframe. 
  • Mazes or Scavenger Hunts – These activities are self-checking by nature. Scavenger hunts are a student favorite! And we have this incredible self-checking Corn Maze Activity freebie.

Best Practices for Self-Checking

Before you begin implementing this routine, it is important to explain the why to your students. If you can instill the purpose of self-checking their work (see any of the benefits above), students will be less likely to take advantage. 

Remind students that they won’t have the answer keys on assessments or in the real-world, and that the work that they do in class prepares them for both of those times. 

Lastly, give students steps for what to do when they get the answer wrong. Do they move on? Rework the problem? Get help from a neighbor? Mark it wrong? That will be up to you and depend on the assignment. 

One last reminder is that a self-checking routine doesn’t replace teaching students what to do if they do not know how to solve a problem. One of the downsides of providing a self-check is for students who need help to not ask for help or that they just write down the answer. This How to Get Help Flowchart freebie is a great jumping off point. 

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Do you have a self-checking routine in your classroom? What self-checking activities have you tried?

Self-checking activities and routines are so helpful. Students get the feedback they need to move on. Check out our self-checking tips here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Self-Checking Activities in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/self-checking-activities-in-math/feed/ 2
The Benefits of Math Projects https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-benefits-of-math-projects/ Tue, 01 Nov 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=63976 In my classroom, students would respond with an emphatic, “YES!” when I announced the start of any type of math project. Despite that unanimous affirmation from students, I found projects were a challenge to plan and implement. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has been hard at work to do this heavy lifting, so teachers and students […]

The post The Benefits of Math Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In my classroom, students would respond with an emphatic, “YES!” when I announced the start of any type of math project. Despite that unanimous affirmation from students, I found projects were a challenge to plan and implement. Fortunately, Maneuvering the Middle has been hard at work to do this heavy lifting, so teachers and students can enjoy projects!

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We are so excited to announce our amazing middle school math projects for 6th, 7th, 8th grade math and Algebra 1 are complete and ready for your classroom! 

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Benefits of Implementing Projects in Math

There are numerous benefits to students working through the open-ended nature of projects in math. This list is non-exhaustive, and I would love to hear additional benefits in the comments below. 

You get to see different students shine – This is exciting to see! The students who may not excel in a traditional math setting can truly step up to really surprise you when given the opportunity to complete a challenge creatively. 

Students are able to use different parts of their brain – Projects, by nature, involve synthesizing and analyzing information in a way that does not always happen in a standard instructional setting. Not only that, but students will practice skills like orally presenting their findings or displaying their work in a visually appealing way.

Students problem solving in real-world scenarios – When students ask, “When will I ever use this?” then it may be time to start a project. Here is a snippet of what our projects ask students to solve:

Rational Numbers + Linear Relationships

  • 6th graders research and calculate the costs of flying or driving to various destinations. Grab it here.
  • 7th graders will calculate the cost of traveling to various National Parks and calculate the percent change in park and gas prices. Grab it here.
  • 8th graders will plan a vacation and apply discount options to their vacation expenses to explore the effect on the linear relationship. Grab it here.
  • Algebra 1 students will use and represent linear relationships to help them plan a vacation on a budget. Grab it here.

Financial Literacy

  • 6th graders plan a career fair and compare the lifetime earnings of various careers. Get it here.
  • 7th graders calculate household incomes and analyze best cities to live in based on earnings. Get it here.
  • 8th graders calculate and plan saving for college. Get it here.
  • Algebra 1 students find and use an exponential function to predict the rising cost of college. Get it here.

All of our projects are jam packed with everything you need to implement a project from start to finish.

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Projects are an alternative to tests – Students take so many tests in a year. Why not replace an assessment with a project that does the same thing?

Projects are great for that interim time –  Do you have 4 days before winter break that you aren’t sure what to do with? Is Thanksgiving Break coming up, and starting a new unit doesn’t make sense? Projects are your solution!

Projects help create a positive classroom environment – You can read more about how to build a classroom environment conducive to projects here, but in my personal experience, my classroom felt more joyful when projects were taking place.

Have you implemented projects in your classroom? What benefits have you and your students experienced by working on projects in your classroom?

Math projects have so many benefits to your students. Check out why you should try a math project in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Benefits of Math Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Linear Equations Activity Ideas https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/linear-equations-activity-ideas/ Tue, 18 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62212 Linear equations require lots of practice as the skill progresses to include more steps and increases in complexity. Any of these activities can be used from the basics of simplifying expressions to solving equations with variables on both sides.  Model by Using Algebra Tiles Are you surprised I am starting with Algebra tiles? They are […]

The post Linear Equations Activity Ideas appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Linear equations require lots of practice as the skill progresses to include more steps and increases in complexity. Any of these activities can be used from the basics of simplifying expressions to solving equations with variables on both sides. 

Model by Using Algebra Tiles

Are you surprised I am starting with Algebra tiles? They are foundational for concrete understanding! You can learn more about using Algebra tiles in your classroom by grabbing our free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles guide, which can be found by checking out our post on Solving Equations. This Modeling Equations with Variables on Both Sides activity is a great way to practice solving equations with Algebra tiles. You just need some Algebra tiles (or your students can draw them!).

Student Teacher

Put students into pairs and show an equation on the board. Have one student instruct the other on how to solve as the student listening writes each step and solution. Then, show a new equation and have students switch roles. This gives students a chance to teach and reinforce what they remember about linear equations. I love this activity because it is simple and it makes every student explain their thinking. You, as the teacher, can circulate listening to each pair.

Round Table

Give students individual white boards and have them work in teams of 2-4.  With one equation written on the board, the first person will solve step one.  The second person will complete the second step in solving and the third will complete the next step. Keep rotating until the problem is solved and the last person checks the solution.  Have groups hold up their boards when they are finished.  If you want something like this, we have this Solving Equations with Variables on Both Sides Round Table available! 

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Board Races

After students have had time to practice, implement “Board Races.” Two students will come up to the board and race to solve an equation shown on the board. The person who solves it correctly first stays up at the board for the next equation with a new competitor. I like to have the students who aren’t at the board working the equations on notebook paper to help check the solutions. An element of competition makes repetitive practice more fun! For race type activities, I like to have teams compete (boys v. girls or one side of the room v. the other side of the room).

Digital Activities 

I love our digital activities! This linear equations set of digital activities includes simplifying expressions, solving one and two-step equations, solving multi-step equations, and equations with variables on both sides, making it the perfect review before a linear equations test. 

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What are some fun ways that students practice solving linear equations in your class? You can check out how to turn any worksheet into an activity which can easily be used for linear equations too!

Linear Equations require lots of practice as the skills continues to increase in difficulty. Keep students engaged with these 5 ideas. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Linear Equations Activity Ideas appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Distributive Property https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-distributive-property/ Tue, 11 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62199 The distributive property is an important building block for algebraic concepts such as multiplying polynomials, recognizing equivalent expressions, and factoring polynomials. Since it starts as early as 6th grade, let’s talk about how to make this as concrete as possible for students. If you haven’t already, go back and read last week’s post on simplifying […]

The post The Distributive Property appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The distributive property is an important building block for algebraic concepts such as multiplying polynomials, recognizing equivalent expressions, and factoring polynomials. Since it starts as early as 6th grade, let’s talk about how to make this as concrete as possible for students. If you haven’t already, go back and read last week’s post on simplifying expressions by combining like terms.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Sidenote: I have to admit that when I first taught the distributive property, I focused solely on the procedure. I had students draw two arrows from the term outside of the parentheses to the two terms inside and called it a day. This is how I was taught. I tell you this to remind you that there are more ways to teach a skill than the way you may have learned it. 

Let’s get to it!

Introducing the Distributive Property

By the time you are teaching the distributive property, students are familiar with order of operations. If you give them a problem like 3(8+2), they will jump at the chance to solve. Students will add 8+2 to get 3(10) and then multiply to get 30. 

You can have students discover that the distributive property allows for another way to solve.  3(8+2) = 3(8) + 3(2) = 24+6 = 30. Proving to students that a property works instead of just telling them a property works will always earn a thumbs up from me.

Introduce Variables

Students may be wondering, “Why can’t I just keep following the order of operations? Why do I need to use the distributive property?” This is a fair question, and a perfect opportunity to introduce the distributive property using variables.

Let’s look at: 3(2x+4).

Ask students if 2x+4 can be combined or added together. No, they do not have the same variable.

Combining like terms only applies to addition and subtraction. You can multiply and divide terms that do not have the same variable or exponent, so you can use the distributive property to simplify this expression further. 

3(2x+4) is like having 3 groups of (2x+4). I encourage you to use Algebra tiles as every possible opportunity, so here is a beautiful visual.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Use the CRA Method

Just like I explained in the previous post, Simplifying Expressions by Combining Like Terms, the Concrete, Representational, and Abstract Framework will help your students develop a solid understanding of the distributive property. 

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Area Models with the Distributive Property

As you can see in the “representation” column above, teaching and requiring students to use an area model for distribution, especially when you are teaching the distributive property in Algebra 1 can be extremely helpful. An area model will set them up for success when they are multiplying polynomials and factoring trinomials. 

Distributing with a Negative

The most common error you will see regarding the distributive property will be related to signs. Those sneaky little negatives can get lost pretty easily. I have some ideas that I have not used in my classroom (in full transparency), but came to mind when writing this blog post. 

Since multiplying by a negative, always results in the opposite, you can teach students that if there is a negative outside the parentheses, then it will always change the inside signs to the opposite. (Reviewing integer rules will reinforce this, but sometimes economy of language wins). 

I actually think that this is best introduced using a visual. Here is how I would show it and ask students to show their work using this method too.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Other Tips

There are so many ways to introduce this topic! Here is another idea from our Student Handouts below.

 Saying “I want one drink, 2 slices of pizza, and one ice cream cone” 4 separate times isn’t efficient.  “I want 4 drinks, 8 slices of pizza, and 4 ice cream cones” makes a lot more sense.

Angie, our amazing editor (and so much more), found this test problem on a New York 7th grade state assessment. This problem could definitely benefit from sketching a square and labeling each side. This would be an excellent problem to talk about why the wrong answers are wrong.

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

That about covers it! How do you teach the distributive property?

The distributive property is a great property for hands-on learning. Check out our tips on making the distributive property concrete. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post The Distributive Property appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-for-teaching-simplifying-expressions/ Tue, 04 Oct 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=62181 Simplifying expressions is foundational in Algebra! Clear understanding of this concept will help students solve equations in middle school and high school math. Come back next week when we will expound on this concept with the distributive property. Let’s dig into simplifying expressions by combining like terms. Vertical Alignment As always, I like to take […]

The post Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Simplifying expressions is foundational in Algebra! Clear understanding of this concept will help students solve equations in middle school and high school math. Come back next week when we will expound on this concept with the distributive property. Let’s dig into simplifying expressions by combining like terms.

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

As always, I like to take a look at the standards. Simplifying expressions starts as early as 6th grade in some states and continues to be used through… all future math.

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

In my experience, students need a thorough review of the basics of simplifying expressions each year, so these tips are for 6th grade teachers, 7th grade teachers, 8th grade teachers, Algebra teachers, and so forth.

Ideas for Hooks

As you introduce or review simplifying expressions, grab your students’ attention with a hook. Help them relate to the content with a real word example! Here are a few ideas for simplifying expressions hooks that I have used or have heard other teachers use.

  • Watch this MadTV clip with your students. Ask them – what would be an easier way to communicate his order? 
  • Ask students to group like items. Display a picture with different objects and ask how they would group them. You can see an example of this on one of our 7th grade student handouts below. Connecting this to ordering food in the drive-thru is a real-life example that students can probably connect. The drinks are usually grouped in a drink carrier, the fries are all in one bag, and the chicken nuggets are typically in another bag. Combining like items is all around us!
  • Write down various animals on notecards (1 animal per notecard). Give each student a notecard and ask them to group themselves accordingly. Don’t give them any additional instructions. After they make groups, ask them why they chose their groups. Ideally, students will have found “like” animals, giving you a perfect segway into like terms.

Instructional Ideas

Anchor Chart  – The basis of simplifying expressions is thoroughly understanding that a “like term” is a term with the same base (or variable) and the same exponent (or power) and that combining like terms is adding and subtracting them. Because this is so important, I recommend creating an anchor chart with some examples and non-examples of like terms. In addition, there are lots of vocabulary terms that will be sticking around for a long time – coefficient, variable, and term – so be sure to have those words and definitions posted for easy reference. 

Use the CRA Framework – It’s no secret that we are fans of the CRA framework (you can see the many posts we have written here and here), and simplifying expressions by combining like terms is another perfect skill that fits into this method. 

  • Abstract – When students are ready, they can combine like terms using the rules that they now have conceptual understanding of.

Simplify the Expressions by Annotation

Once students are working in the abstract part of the framework, you will want students to use a method for grouping to keep their work organized and create barriers for simple errors. Here are some popular ideas:

  • Underline or draw various shapes around like terms including the sign right before the term
  • Highlight using different colors for different like terms
  • Rewrite on different colored sticky notes and then rearrange
Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Use a T-chart. Personally, this is what I used with my students since I found that sometimes the shapes could make the signs hard to read.
Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Other Tips

  • You can have students put an exponent of 1 on terms like x.
  • Physically show your students the difference between 2x and x^2 using algebra tiles. 
  • Easy activity – write a bunch of different terms on your whiteboard and play the flyswatter game! Say a term, and students have to hit a like term. 
  • Integer fluency is pretty key when combining like terms. If it has been a while since they have practiced, go over some of the basics before jumping into combining like terms.

Simplifying expressions is truly the foundation of algebra – you have to simplify before you can solve equations. Make sure to come back next week where we talk about simplifying expressions with the distributive property. 

Simplifying expressions by combining like terms is foundational for algebra and all future math. Check out these great tips! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Tips for Teaching Simplifying Expressions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-scientific-notation-and-exponents/ Tue, 20 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=59644 Let’s chat about scientific notation and exponents!  I have found that the simplest skills in math are often the most miscalculated and confusing for students. Exponents and scientific notation can fall into this trap.  Vertical Alignment Exponent Tips It is important with both exponents and scientific notation that students understand that they show a different […]

The post Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s chat about scientific notation and exponents!  I have found that the simplest skills in math are often the most miscalculated and confusing for students. Exponents and scientific notation can fall into this trap. 

Vertical Alignment

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Exponent Tips

It is important with both exponents and scientific notation that students understand that they show a different way to represent a value.

Before even showing an exponent, start by showing the expanded form like  7*7*7*7*7. You can start by asking students:

  • Is this the most efficient way to write this?
  • Would 7*5 give you the same result? Why or why not?

Tip: I have learned the hard way to NEVER use 2^2 in any of your early examples because it will just confuse students into thinking you multiply the base and exponent.

Easy, no-plan activity idea: A fun way for students to practice exponents is by using concentric circles. The inside circle is the base and the outside circle is the exponent. Assign students numbers 1-10 and have them rotate to a new partner each round. Students pair up, write down the exponent form, the expanded form, and then calculate the standard form. Keep rotating until your time is up. 

Laws of Exponents

The laws of exponents are so fun! I love how students can build on their previous knowledge to come up with the laws themselves. For example: 

On a Facebook thread, I recently saw a teacher say, “When in doubt, expand it out.” If a student forgets a law, all they need to do is expand it and calculate to discover the law again. That is something a student is more likely to do if you are modeling it consistently.

Because the laws are so accessible, this content really shines as a discovery-based lesson. Your students could also participate in a jigsaw. Each group becomes experts at their assigned law, then they present the law, the proof, and examples to their peers. 

If you go the traditional teaching route, I recommend splitting this skill up over at least 2 days. Maneuvering the Middle 8th grade curriculum covers multiplying/dividing like bases, power to power, and product to power on day one. Negative and zero exponents are covered on day two.

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I highly recommend an anchor chart with all of the laws for easy reference. Sometimes in my last class on a Friday, my brain needed to look at an anchor chart to give it the boost it needed (and I am the teacher).

Scientific Notation

Like I said before, scientific notation is just a different way to represent a value. Here is a great way to introduce why we might use scientific notation. Write down the mass of Earth and Mars on your whiteboard or project it. Make sure students will have to copy it down themselves since that is part of your point. 

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start by asking students to read the numbers to you. You will get some funny responses. Then ask students to add them or subtract the masses. As students write and count all of the zeros and inevitably miscalculate or miscount the number of zeros, you can introduce why we used scientific notation. (Less room for error, more efficient) Scientific notation is similar to typing TTYL instead of typing “talk to you later.”

Tips for Scientific Notation

Avoid using right or left when describing the direction to move the decimal. Instead, emphasize that smaller numbers will have negative exponents and larger numbers will have positive exponents. This re-enforces the negative exponent law.

Speaking of exponent laws, scientific notation operations reinforce the laws of exponents. If you look at the vertical alignment, scientific notation only shows up in 8th grade (in TEKS and CCSS), so at least, it reinforces other important concepts that students will use in Algebra 1 and 2.

I have never (and will never) teach Science, but it did occur to me to look up the Texas Science standards, and take a look at this chemistry standard – 

“C.2(G)  express and manipulate chemical quantities using scientific conventions and mathematical procedures, including dimensional analysis, scientific notation, and significant figures”

An opportunity for cross curricular?! Wahoo! If this is something that has peaked your interest, here is a NASA themed exploration lesson with resources for practicing scientific notation. This demos activity is also a great science based activity.

What tips do you have for teaching exponents and scientific notation?

Scientific Notation and exponents - check out our tips and ideas for covering these 8th grade and Algebra skills! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Scientific Notation and Exponents appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/#comments Tue, 13 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=59631 At the beginning of the school year, we are often asked about math pre-assessments:  Does Maneuvering the Middle have pre-assessments? Should teachers give pre-assessments? If yes, what are some best practices? It is likely that your school already has something in place like MAP or benchmark testing. In those cases, I would say that your […]

The post Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
At the beginning of the school year, we are often asked about math pre-assessments: 

  • Does Maneuvering the Middle have pre-assessments?
  • Should teachers give pre-assessments?
  • If yes, what are some best practices?

It is likely that your school already has something in place like MAP or benchmark testing. In those cases, I would say that your pre-assessment is good to go. If you’re interested in other approaches to pre-assessments, then keep reading. 

Math pre-assessments are often given at the beginning of the school year, but are pre-assessments necessary for your students? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is a Pre-Assessment?

Pre-Assessments are typically a test students take at the beginning of the year or unit. The data can help teachers make decisions about lessons, pacing, and differentiation.

Pros of Math Pre-Assessments

Pre-assessment data can provide teachers with the information they need to make strategic decisions about the support students will require. Perhaps, across the board, students performed low on proportional relationships, a teacher may add extra days to their unit on proportions. 

According to the Tar Heel State Teacher, pre-assessments provide students with evidence of their growth and prime students for their upcoming learning. I completely agree! Keep reading to see this in action. 

Cons of Math Pre-Assessments

Students are over tested. According to the Washington Post, “the average student in America’s big-city public schools takes some 112 mandatory standardized tests between pre-kindergarten and the end of 12th grade – an average of about eight a year.” 

Your school may already require multiple benchmarks in addition to the state tests. Does testing foster a love of learning? A pre-assessment would easily eat up at least one class period. Time is precious! 

If your students are taking one big, comprehensive pre-assessment at the beginning of year, that is an exorbitant amount of data to comb through. A question to ask yourself is, “Will I actually look at this data to make future decisions about instruction?” If I were being 100% honest, this would be overwhelming for me. And is it fair to tailor instruction of a unit covered in the spring based on something students did in August?

If pre-assessments are given at the beginning of the year, then your data will reflect the “summer slump.”

Math Pre-Assessment Recommendations

Ask yourself, “Why do I want to pre-assess?”

If you are pre-assessing because you think this is something you should do or something your students expect to do, then you are likely better off spending that class time in other ways.

Avoid one large pre-assessment. Shoot for a short pre-assessment at the beginning of a unit with content specific to the unit you are about to begin. The timeliness will ensure that you can actually use what you observe. 

  • Marissa McCarthy, an All Access 6th grade teacher, only pre-assesses on 3 units – decimals, fractions, and the coordinate plane because those are covered in 5th grade and built upon in 6th grade. She gives students 4 problems at the beginning of the unit. At the end of the unit, she gives the exact same problems. “Students love seeing that they went from 1/4 to 4/4. You can use Maneuvering the Middle’s editable unit test to do this!” Or our end of year assessments to pull questions from.

Consider only pre-assessing previously taught content – not new to the grade level content! For example, in 7th grade, probability is introduced. If students are assessed on probability, they are more likely to miss questions due to lack of prior knowledge. However, a short fraction assessment that covers simplifying and multiplying fractions would do the trick. This data could tell me if I need to spend an entire lesson reviewing fraction multiplication or if I can jump straight into probability.

Short on time? Perhaps, you have 45 minute class periods, and you do not have the time to devote to extras. You can completely avoid pre-assessments by using existing data. Use the state assessment data that already exists! We work so hard to prepare students for a state assessment that we almost never look at that data. If you can, review the data reports of your incoming students (this may be trickier if your students come from a different school). 

  • Don’t spend too much time on the knitty gritty – look at overall trends. 
  • Find where a misunderstanding may impact your grade level content.
  • You can even use this data to decide if you need to include pre-assessments for future units. 

There is no one right way to pre-assess or collect data from your students. Do you give pre-assessments?

Math pre-assessments are often given at the beginning of the school year, but are pre-assessments necessary for your students? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Are Math Pre-Assessments Necessary? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/are-math-pre-assessments-necessary/feed/ 1
A Plan to Unfinished Learning https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/a-plan-to-unfinished-learning/ Tue, 30 Aug 2022 11:47:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=57697 In July, Noelle presented an incredible training about what teachers can do to combat unfinished learning in math. Because the information was so relevant and useful, I thought it would be helpful for it to exist in a blog post as well. When your students aren’t where you want them to be, it can be […]

The post A Plan to Unfinished Learning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In July, Noelle presented an incredible training about what teachers can do to combat unfinished learning in math. Because the information was so relevant and useful, I thought it would be helpful for it to exist in a blog post as well.

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When your students aren’t where you want them to be, it can be easy to just keep trucking along. Ignoring the unfinished learning in your classroom is a sure way to be frustrated when your students aren’t making the gains you are hoping for. 

Keep reading if you want to learn more about creating a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well, without sacrificing your sanity and mental health. 

What is unfinished learning?

Concepts or skills that have not yet been mastered – can be from yesterday or years ago.

For example, your students may have never mastered squares and square roots. Where would this unfinished learning be present? Pythagorean theorem.

Unfinished learning can be addressed through planning, formatively assessing, and differentiating. 

Step 1: Planning

Determine what the standard is asking students to do and how they are expected to do it. Consider the potential challenges students may face. If you haven’t taught this content before, you may need to ask a fellow teacher what common misconceptions students may face tackling that specific skill. 

For example, in teaching the Pythagorean Theorem, you may spend much of your lesson on solving for the missing side using the formula, only to realize that students can’t differentiate between the hypotenuse and the legs.

When presenting the concept, provide multiple ways of solving. This is obviously easier said than done. I love the CRA framework, so be sure to check out the linked post for more context. You can provide multiple ways to solve by:

  • Making the math concrete (introduce hands-on opportunities like manipulatives)
  • Giving math context (create some real-world connections)
  • Visualizing the concept (drawing pictures)

Step 2: Observation through Formative Assessments

Formative assessments do not need to be formal. Using what you already have is effective and efficient! Here are some simple ways to assess:

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

White boards are a favorite of mine! By observing through formative assessments, we can use our time and energy to address any misconceptions early on.

Step 3: Adapting using just-in-time supports

What is a Just-in Time support? It is a support provided based on a demonstrated need.

How do we adapt just in time?

When observing your students’ work, there are two outcomes. Either students are correct and can continue working, or students demonstrate a misunderstanding and it is time to act.

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

If you already have task cards on your agenda, you don’t have to change it. The rest of your class works on task cards in groups; the students who demonstrated a misconception join you at your small group table where you have an extra set of task cards already organized from easiest to most difficult. As you work with your students, start by asking guiding questions. 

  • “What do you know?”
  • “What do you need to know?”
  • “What can we do to get started?”

Swapping the values is another quick way to differentiate for students that are demonstrating a misunderstanding. Let’s say that your students are working on surface area. You don’t want to spend lots of time readdressing how to multiply fractions or decimals. You are working on surface area after all. Swap the numbers! That way you can focus on what students need to understand to calculate the surface area of different 3D figures instead.

Error analysis is a great way to create an extension for your students, as well as address misconceptions. For students who got it when formatively assessed, you could push them to analyze how the incorrect answers were constructed. For students who need additional support, you can share the correct answer and scaffold your question in a small group.

Making small adaptations to an activity allows us to support students with unfinished learning, without the pressure to reinvent the wheel. The process outlined is ongoing – daily, weekly, all year long, so don’t get discouraged. 

All Access is a great tool for tackling unfinished learning. Since the stress of planning is done for you, you can use your energy to implement these tips.

How do you combat unfinished learning in your math classroom?

Create a sustainable plan for tackling the unfinished learning in your classroom so you can serve students well. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post A Plan to Unfinished Learning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/#comments Tue, 23 Aug 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1915 What I love so much about inequalities are the infinite solutions. For so much of students’ previous math experience, there is one exact answer. When it comes to inequalities, it is fun to push students to think of their answers beyond “x<4” and brainstorm all of the infinite solutions that x can be and then […]

The post Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What I love so much about inequalities are the infinite solutions. For so much of students’ previous math experience, there is one exact answer. When it comes to inequalities, it is fun to push students to think of their answers beyond “x<4” and brainstorm all of the infinite solutions that x can be and then connect it to the graph.

  • Can x be 3.9999?
  • Can x be 4?
  • Can x be -100? 

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Below, I have outlined a few ideas and things to consider when planning to teach one- and two-step inequalities.  

Let’s take a look at the standards, shall we?

Many of my recommendations for solving one or two-step inequalities are the same as solving one and two-step equations. This post talks about how using algebra tiles is my favorite practice. 

Something I did not learn until I was teaching is the why behind changing the sign when you divide or multiply by a negative number. As

You can do whatever you want to an inequality as long as it is done to both sides, it will remain a true statement.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This is true of inequalities with one exception. If you multiply or divide by a negative number, the inequality becomes untrue.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

While this mistake still persisted, I found that my students did much better than previous groups in remembering to flip the sign.

Able to Read an Inequality Statement

Another big misconception that I have found to be true is the “alligator.”  Sure, “the alligator eats the bigger number” works when you are comparing 3 and 7, but what about when it’s 3 and -7 or 4x and 6?   Students need to be able to read an inequality statement and explain what it means in terms of the numbers around it.  They need to feel confident choosing a number for x to test the inequality.  

I have found the students struggle identifying “<” as less than and “>” as greater than, so when they do solve an inequality and they are left with x<4, they don’t actually know what that symbol means. 1<4 is something that a student can say but replace one of the numbers with a variable and the inequality becomes unclear. This is definitely a trick, but showing students how the less than symbol can be slightly rotated to be an L will allow them to actually state, “x is less than 4.”

Using Number Lines

The graph can seem like one more thing to do, but the solution(s) and the thinking lies within the graph.  The number line representation is a perfect visual to actually get students talking about the potential solutions.  Some questions to get students thinking:

  • What is a value of x that is in the solution set?  Is there another?
  • Why is _____ not a solution to inequality?  What other numbers would not be a solution?
  • Describe the process for graphing the solution.
  • Given the graph, what inequality statement best describes it?
Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When we are given a graph and are trying to figure out what inequality is the match, I avoid the trick that the arrows should match the inequality sign. Instead I might ask:

  • What are the potential solutions? 
  • Are the potential solutions greater than or less than the given amount?
  • When I substitute a solution into X, is the original inequality true?
Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Common Misconceptions

  1. Forgetting to change the inequality sign when dividing by a negative number
  2. General confusion when the answer is “4 > x” or written with the constant on the left
  3. Unclear of what number is considered a solution
  4. Unable to make connections between the inequality and the actual solution on the number line
  5. Writing inequality statements from situations when the terms “less than” or “greater than” are not included

Anchor Chart Ideas

Anchor charts are fabulous ways to showcase the content in a visual manner for students to reference.  They can easily be created before the lesson or as you are teaching, depending on the content.  This example includes the emphasis on vocabulary, as students tend to struggle with writing inequalities.

Ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities - including activities and common misconceptions to avoid in your math classroom.

The real-life example that I think students have the most understanding of is related to movie ratings and/or height requirements for roller coasters. These very real-life experiences will help students understand the terms minimum means greater than or equal to. The minimum height you can be to ride this roller coaster is 48 inches. That means you can be 48, 49, 50 … inches to ride. Similarly, a person must be the minimum age of 17 to purchase an R-rated movie ticket.

Maximum was also another term that confused my students. Again, relating it to something that students experience daily seemed to do the trick. I would use seat belts as an example. I would ask students how many seat belts were typically in a car (or their car). Then I would say that the maximum number of people that could safely ride in said car was, let’s go with 5, which means 5 people or fewer could ride in the car. Maximum meant less than or equal to.

IDEAS FOR STRUGGLING STUDENTS

  1. Bring out the manipulatives – algebra tiles, pattern blocks, etc – have students group like items
  2. Break down the steps into a simple checklist
  3. Go back to positive whole numbers to see if students are struggling with the concept or the mathematical skills
  4. Give students a possible solution and ask them to work backwards

Hopefully, this gives you some ideas for teaching one- and two-step inequalities or even insight as to what knowledge your students are coming with.  I would love to hear other great activities or ideas you have used! Feel free to share in the comments.

Be sure to check out these resources for inequalities:

How do you teach inequalities?

The post Teaching One- and Two-Step Inequalities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-one-and-two-step-inequalities/feed/ 1
Solving Equations in Middle School Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-solving-equations/ Tue, 09 Aug 2022 11:44:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6749 Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students actually have been doing this since first grade! However, students can make careless errors or struggle when it comes to following the many procedural steps required to solve an equation. The Standard Why the struggle? Solving equations is very revealing. If your students struggle […]

The post Solving Equations in Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students actually have been doing this since first grade! However, students can make careless errors or struggle when it comes to following the many procedural steps required to solve an equation.

The Standard

Why the struggle?

Solving equations is very revealing. If your students struggle with integer operations, then it will show up again when solving equations. If your students struggle with rational number operations, then it will show up again when solving equations.

We asked our Facebook group what students mostly struggle with, and here are some of the responses:

  • Combining like terms incorrectly
  • Dividing/multiplying a negative coefficient. Students trying to add instead.
  • Not distributing when they should. Example: 5 – 2(x + 2) = 10 simplifying to 3(x +2) = 10  
  • Students completing inverse operations on the same side of the equal sign instead of combining like terms (see below for picture)

Does this sound familiar?

Use Algebra Tiles (No, really, use them!)

I was resistant! Manipulatives can cause undue stress (tiny items + 30 children); it is a lot! However, I think that if I had used algebra tiles in my classroom, students would have been way more engaged! I occasionally drew a model to demonstrate solving equations, but then Noelle showed me all the ways algebra tiles could be used to combine like terms, distribute, and solve two-step equations (even quadratics). I was on board!

Before using algebra tiles to introduce students to solving equations, use algebra tiles to demonstrate combining like terms. Combining like terms can be challenging for students, but when you ask students to combine all of the long green tiles (x), the long red tiles (-x), the small yellow tiles (+1), and the small red tiles (-1), it provides excellent concrete practice. It will also assist with zero pair understanding, which will be essential to solving equations with algebra tiles.

What would you rather combine as a student? The terms or the algebra tiles?

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Let’s move on to solving equations. Look at the following example:

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Before exposing your students to two-step equations with variables on both sides, let them practice with one-step equations first. Scaffolding is key. I chose this example to show you how versatile algebra tiles are (variables on both sides and negative values)

To isolate the variable, students would need to recognize that they needed to get rid of positive 2.  To do this, they would add two negative tiles to make a zero pair. Adding negative 2 to one side would mean they would add to the other side to keep the equation balanced.

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

After students have removed the two zero pairs on the left side of the equation, they might be a little stuck. They are exploring, after all. Remind students that we want all variables on one side, since we want to find out what one x is equal to. Students would then add a negative x to both sides to create another zero pair.

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.comSolving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Lastly, to get the solution for one x, students would divide the remaining red tiles among the two x tiles: X = -4.

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students are actually solving for x by undoing the problem, by using inverse operations (adding -2 to both sides and dividing by 2), and by keeping the equation balanced (they are adding tiles to both sides). All the procedural steps that might mean nothing to students in a traditional problem have meaning when students have been exposed to practicing with algebra tiles.

Remember that algebra tiles (like most manipulatives) exist to make the math visual. They provide conceptual understanding. Eventually, students will move into the algorithm. When students are exploring, make sure all of the solutions are integers (you can’t break the tiles into pieces).

To learn more about students making the jump from concrete to abstract, please check out our posts about the CRA Framework – Part 1 and Part 2

Another tip I recommend is to have students write out what is happening as they are using algebra tiles to solve an equation. If they are combining 3 green tiles with two red tiles, then they would need to write 3x-2x with evidence of only 1x remaining.

If you don’t have access to algebra tiles, students can use this website.

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Be sure to grab our Getting Started with Algebra Tiles freebie to learn more about using algebra tiles to tackle simplifying expressions, the distributive property, solving linear equations, adding and subtracting polynomials, multiplying and dividing polynomials, and factoring polynomials.

Helpful Tips

These teacher tips from our Math Teacher VIP Facebook Group might help your students.

  • Draw a line to separate the two sides of the equation.
  • Do Undo Line – this is another strategy that can help students.
  • Color-coding to help with combining like terms
  • Making sure to actually say (and make students say), “2 times x equals 5” as opposed to “2x = 5.”

For more resources, check out these units and bundles.

What additional tips do you have? Do you use algebra tiles in your classroom?

Solving equations is foundational for middle and high school math. Students can struggle to complete the many procedural steps required. Teach students the conceptual knowledge necessary using algebra tiles! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Solving Equations in Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Best Math Practices for New Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/best-math-practices-for-new-teachers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/best-math-practices-for-new-teachers/#comments Tue, 26 Jul 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=53261 Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :)) We will be […]

The post Best Math Practices for New Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :))

We will be attempting to cover everything that will set you up for success in your first year. This is the last post in our series, so be sure to go back and read the previous three posts to get caught up.

Today’s post will be all of the little things that will set you up for success. I am calling them best math practices, but since I have no scientific data to back them up, I will refer to them as favorite practices too. Let’s do it!

Work Out Every Problem Before You Teach the Lesson

This is probably my #1 best math practice. I like to do this for three reasons. 

  1. As I work through problems that I will use for my direct instruction, partner work and independent practice,  I am prepared with the misconceptions my students may encounter. By mentally scripting what I might say or ask to combat these misconceptions, I am more prepared to teach. If while working through some problems, I am not really sure why [blank] is the next step, I can watch a video to help my explanations be clear and concise. 
  2. When I am circulating while my students are working, I have my worked out answer key in hand, so I can check student progress. Instead of just looking at final answers to monitor progress, I like to quickly look at the students’ work too. If their work matches my work, I can give them a thumbs up, and move on to the next student. This idea also reinforces to students that their work is just as, if not more, important than the answer. In addition, if I do see an incorrect answer, I can look at their work, compare it to mine, and find the error faster. 
  3. My first principal, Luz, told me this before my first year. It will take students 3 times longer than you to complete a problem. By working out every problem, I was able to assess whether I would need more work to fill up the class period … which leads me to my next point.

Always Have More Prepared

Your students will have varying math skills and speed levels. Some students will accurately complete all of their work before another student finishes the first problem.

Another best math practice is to provide meaningful work for students to work on after they have completed their assigned work. If these students need a challenge, make sure that it is rigorous enough to keep them engaged (don’t give them fluency practice) but not so challenging that they need your help. 

My go-to would be to ask them to write a test question based on what they learned that day, complete with answer choices and an answer key. Our digital activities are a great supplement too!

Assign Seats

Often I see teachers recommend to abandon seating charts at the beginning of the year, so you can learn who is friends with whom. This is not my advice! 

While you may not know your students well enough to create an informed seating chart, creating a seating chart that will help you learn names! I would start with alphabetical order because it helped me learn first and last names and made attendance easier.

Here is my rationale for starting with a seating chart. You can always give students seating choice after they have earned it. It is always easier to loosen up an expectation than try to wrangle students back in after they aren’t meeting your expectation. 

In addition, students without friends in that class or who are new, will feel more comfortable and safe in a classroom with a seating chart. You can read more advice about seating charts here.

Don’t Talk Over Students

There are entire books written about classroom management, so advice in this department cannot really be summarized in one paragraph in a blog post. I am going to pick the tool that packs the biggest punch. Don’t talk over students.

When giving instructions (not direct instruction), get your students’ attention, stand still, and wait. For example, it is time for students to go from working in stations back to their desks to start their exit ticket. 

*Attention Getter*

Teacher is standing still, squared up, and facing a majority of students. 

“I am waiting for all eyes to be on me. Thank you, Gabriel. Thank you, Max.”

“Most voices are turned off. Thank you. I am waiting on two more.”

*Teacher turns body and makes eye contact with the two students who were talking.*  (non-verbal redirection)

Students are still talking. *Teacher walks over to them.* (proximity) 

Students are now silent, and the teacher gives clear and concise directions. Teacher stops and waits if there are any interruptions.

When you give a direction while students are talking, you are communicating to them that what you have to say is not that important and they have a choice whether they need to listen to you or not.

Be Flexible

Being in the classroom for any length of time will result in a variety of mishaps – fire drills in the rain, copies running out, technology rendered useless since the internet is down, vomiting by both students and teachers, and a mouse running around. (These are examples from my classroom. Yes, the mouse visited my classroom during state testing, so that was …fun.) 

You can’t really get too worked up when something chaotic happens. Your students will follow your lead, so take a deep breath, problem solve, and make the best of it.

Build Relationships

Students will work harder for teachers they like and feel like them. Here are some ways to build relationships with your students on a daily basis.

  • Use an individual’s name (so learn those names quickly 🙂 )
  • For every correction or redirection a student needs, be sure to praise them two times
  • If a student invites you to a game or performance, go! If they went out of their way to invite you, then they love you and want you there.
  • Be consistent. You can’t treat every student the exact same, but you have to hold all students to the same bar. 

Become an All Access Member

Finally, my best math practice is to become an All Access member! It bears repeating that the best thing you can do as a first year math teacher is find a reliable, standards-based curriculum. You will be spinning so many plates; don’t add curriculum writing to your very full scope of work.

Veteran teachers, what are some of your best math practices? New teachers, what questions do you have?

These 7 best practices will help you be the best new math teacher for your students! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Best Math Practices for New Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/best-math-practices-for-new-teachers/feed/ 2
Are You An Overwhelmed New Teacher? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/overwhelmed-as-a-new-teacher/ Tue, 19 Jul 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=53252 Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :)) We will […]

The post Are You An Overwhelmed New Teacher? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :))

We will be attempting to cover everything that will set you up for success in your first year. This is part 3 in our series, so be sure to go back and read the last two posts to get caught up.

Today’s post will be all about how to overcome being an overwhelmed teacher and how to manage your to-do list. Let’s do it!

If you are a new math teacher who is stressed about your to-do list, then this post will help you manage feeling overwhelmed. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Feeling Overwhelmed

In my first year teaching high school math, I remember receiving a weekly update email from my principal on a Sunday night with many deadlines and tasks (on top of planning and preparing content for two preps), and I started to panic. How was I supposed to get all of this done? 

My husband, Taylor, asked me, “How do you eat an elephant?” I looked at him with a this-is-not-helpful stare. His response? “One bite at a time.”

In your first year of teaching math (or teaching at all), you will feel overwhelmed with the sheer number of tasks ahead of you. It is inevitable. The only way to overcome this sense of overwhelm is to start. Not sure of where to start? Make a list of everything you have to do for the next day and start with the easiest task. Use that momentum to knock out the next task and then the next. When you are feeling overwhelmed, any progress (even progress on peripheral tasks) will help you overcome your stress. 

Plan Your Work then Work Your Plan

When I have a written plan (in this case, a to-do list), I am efficient and I can knock things out. When I sit down to work with no plan, I am literally and figuratively listless.

No minute of your planning period should be wasted. Especially since planning periods tend to be commandeered by meetings or (possibly, but hopefully not) covering other classes. When you do have a full planning period ahead of you, take advantage of every second.

So how do you take advantage of every second?

  • Make sure students are gone. That means that when the bell rings you are dismissing students, not asking them to start cleaning up.
  • Know ahead of time what you need to accomplish during that planning period. This process is unique to each person, but personally, I liked to dedicate a day to the same tasks. Monday was for planning for the next week, Tuesday was for making copies and answer keys, Wednesdays was for grading and entering grades into the computer, Thursdays and Fridays were for miscellaneous or unfinished tasks. 
  • Close your door. This sounds unfriendly, but if you are often interrupted or slow to recover after an interruption, then this gesture will keep visitors at bay. You can always chat with teachers in the workroom. 

If you want to read more about saving time during your planning period, check out these posts:

Focus on What is Most Important

Teachers don’t just teach. Teachers do everything. They host clubs, they organize fundraisers, they plan field trips, they coach other teachers, and so much more. Nothing makes an overwhelmed teacher feel more overwhelmed than taking on more.

You may be tempted to take on an extracurricular or host an after-school club. If your heart is set on that, then go for it!

However, I do believe your first years in math should be dedicated to familiarizing yourself with your content and developing strong mathematical practices.  Give yourself permission to decline taking on additional roles, so you can participate in math professional developments or stay updated with new pedagogical practices. Being a lifelong learner of math and instructional practices is the sign of a great teacher!

If you haven’t read part one of this series, How to Teach Middle School Math as a New Teacher, you can read more about getting to know your math content.

Done is Better than Perfect

Since you will have a very full plate, sometimes we have to finish a task at a B- level. We want to strive for our personal A+, but when we have 900 things to do, done is better than perfect. 

If a B- has the same result as an A+, then don’t waste your time making it an A+. For example, bulletin board displays. Some teachers go all out with a theme and change the look each month – good for them, but not for me. I put one bulletin board display up in August, and only switched up the student work when it was required. 

Another example was something I saw an Algebra teacher do at my school. Since typing formulas and various mathematical symbols into the computer slowed her down, she would hand write problems for her students to complete. She would handwrite the problems, scan it to email it to herself, and then make copies. Would the worksheet look better printed? Sure. Did it matter? No. Done is better than perfect. 

Become an All Access Member

The best thing you could probably do as an overwhelmed teacher is to find and use a reliable, standards-based curriculum. If you can save yourself the time that it takes to scour the internet for worksheets or starting from scratch, you will already be so many steps ahead!

Veteran teachers, how do you tackle your to-do list? New teachers, what questions do you have?

If you are a new math teacher who is stressed about your to-do list, then this post will help you manage feeling overwhelmed. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Are You An Overwhelmed New Teacher? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Tips for a New Math Teacher https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-new-math-teacher/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-new-math-teacher/#comments Tue, 12 Jul 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2450 Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :)) We will […]

The post Tips for a New Math Teacher appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :))

We will be attempting to cover everything that will set you up for success in your first year. If you haven’t read part 1, do that first. 

Today’s post will be all about cultivating a strong math classroom culture. Let’s do it!

Be Proactive

A strong classroom culture is predicated on students knowing what is expected of them and rising to meet that bar.  This means you will need to communicate what you want students to be doing 100% of the time they are in your classroom. 

I can talk at length about routines and procedures and we have 4 blog posts dedicated to them, so I won’t belabor those systems anymore. Please be sure to check them out though because they are pretty comprehensive.

Create a Safe Space

I had a student who would pick up her bell ringer from the door and stare at it for 5 straight minutes. This student was not off task in the slightest; she had her supplies, she came to class early, and she wasn’t chatting with classmates. She would just stare at her paper. After inquiring about her inactivity, she revealed to me that she feared making an error. 

This took me back to my math experience as a student; I couldn’t think of a single instance that I volunteered to answer by raising my hand. I was so scared to be wrong that I avoided eye contact any time a teacher asked a question. 

Creating a safe space for making mistakes is vital to your students’ success in math. 

I will point you to Jo Boaler’s research on how mistakes make our brains grow which is a fascinating read. This quote really nails it:

In our work with students we have found that when students realize that mistakes are helpful for their brains it changes them, significantly. They become more willing to struggle and try harder mathematics, and keep going. Understanding the power of mistakes is critical, as children and adults everywhere often feel terrible when they make a mistake in math. They think it means they are not a math person, because they have been brought up in a performance culture in which mistakes are not valued—or worse, they are punished.

– Jo Boaler

So how can you encourage mistake making? Start with yourself.

If a student points out an error, celebrate it: Wahoo! I made a mistake! My brain is growing!

If a student asks you a question that you do not know the answer to, admit to that. Great question! I am not sure I can answer that right now, but I will find out. 

If a student shares something incorrect, tell them that their brain just grew instead of telling them their answer is incorrect and then give them a moment to try again.

After I learned that the student was fearful of making an error, I started to hand-write (before making copies) “You don’t have to be right, but you do have to try!” on my bell ringers.

Lean into the Productive Struggle

If you are teaching middle school (particularly math) then you should prepare yourself for this second point… teach students to work through hard things, also known as productive struggle

This is still a battle I fight daily.  The first thing I begin teaching my students to say is, “Mrs. Brack, will you clarify this part to me?” or even simply, “I need help.”  “I don’t get it” suggests that you are passive in the understanding of a problem. 

You can respond with, “I don’t get it yet.” Or you can come up with a norm (see next point) for how to combat passive learning.

Then, you need to shift those “I don’t understand” type responses to a specific question about the content. Or by asking, “What do you understand?” We want them to make a connection to something they already know and then construct a plan based on that.

This flowchart (that you can grab for free below) is something I would point to when my students were stuck.

Click here to get your own copy of my How to Get Help in Math Flowchart.

New math teachers start here! These 5 tips are what I wish I would have known before I started teaching math. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Create Norms as a Class

This goes hand-in-hand with being proactive. With your students, come up with 3 or more “norms” or practices that will hold everyone accountable to learning math. To start the brainstorming process, you can ask students and yourself, “What needs to be in place for everyone to be successful in our classroom?” Students may respond by saying:

  • Don’t give up. 
  • Ask for help when stuck.
  • Respect each other.
  • Mistakes help us learn.

After you and your students have brainstormed a list of norms, post these norms on your classroom walls and refer to them daily. Students are bought in because they have a say in the very foundation of your classroom culture.

Start With Yourself

As a new math teacher, you don’t know what you don’t know. Even veteran teachers are lifelong learners of instructional math practices. Get comfortable asking for help from a trusted colleague, or even the brilliant teachers that are readily available in many Facebook groups.

Join All Access

An All Access membership will save you time and energy in your first year of teaching. I wish All Access existed my first year teaching – I believe it would have made for a less stressful year!

“Maneuvering the Middle gave me my life back and I know my students are getting what they need!” – All Access Member

Click here to learn more about All Access.

When it comes to teaching math, many things have changed. If you are relying solely on how you learned it growing up, then you are likely missing out on some great strategies. The way that I taught students to divide fractions during my first year teaching is nowhere near how I would approach teaching dividing fractions today.

Veterans, what tips do you have for new math teachers? New math teachers, what questions do you have?

New math teachers start here! These 5 tips are what I wish I would have known before I started teaching math. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: Maneuvering the Middle has been publishing blog posts for teachers for nearly 6 years. This post was originally published in June of 2017. It has been revamped for accuracy and relevancy and to include a Good Morning Teacher podcast episode.

The post Tips for a New Math Teacher appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-new-math-teacher/feed/ 17
How to Teach Middle School Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-middle-school-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-middle-school-math/#comments Tue, 05 Jul 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=51587 Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :)) Let me […]

The post How to Teach Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Welcome, New Math Teacher! If you have made it to this blog post, you are most likely about to enter your first year of teaching or your first year of teaching math. (And if you are a veteran math teacher, we would love for you to share your tips in the comments :))

Let me be the first to offer my congratulations! I hope that you will find our blog useful, so please stay a while. 

We will be covering everything that will set you up for success in your first year. Be sure to check back to read:

Today’s post will be all about what to spend your time and energy on this summer. You have a huge task ahead of you and still a month before you begin. How should you use this time before you? Let’s dive in!

How to teach math, specifically, your first of math is a huge undertaking to cover. Our 4 part series for newbies will help you start strong! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What To Focus on This Summer 

Most advice (including my own) around being a first year teacher is about building relationships with students and creating consistent routines and procedures for your classroom. But if you are reading this in July, you don’t have a classroom of students to start working on this yet. So what to do while you are anxiously waiting for the start of the year? 

Get to Know Your Content

This was a hard reality I discovered when I started teaching math: being a good math student does not always make a good math teacher. Math was always my best subject, so when it was time to reach struggling students, I felt stuck. I had learned math this one specific way and it worked for me, so I lacked additional tools that could help me help my students.

You don’t know what you don’t know, but you can assume that the way you may have learned a math skill is not the only way that you can teach it. So it is time to educate yourself! 

Before I get into specific math skills, I want to recommend reading about and implementing the Concrete, Representational, Abstract framework in your daily lesson plans. This study is short and does a great job of summarizing the CRA framework. We also have two posts: here and here.

The CRA framework helps guide students from the hands-on materials (Concrete), to the drawings and models (Representational), and finally, to the equations and algorithms (Abstract). By using the CRA framework, you are setting students up to understand the WHY behind the procedures of various skills which develops their conceptual understanding, builds math confidence, and gives students multiple methods for solving a problem. (Hint: you don’t need a huge supply of math manipulatives to use the CRA framework – check out our favorite math manipulatives here and how to get them on a budget.)

Let’s talk about what you are teaching! If you know what grade you are teaching, then I would start by looking at the standards for that grade level. You can find Common Core standards by Googling “CCSS + math + grade level” and by clicking here for the TEKS (if you are in Texas). If your state does not teach Common Core, I would search your state + grade level + math standards

Don’t expect to read your grade level’s math standards and instantly understand what you are reading and supposed to teach. But do read through the standards and make some observations. Here are some guiding questions:

  • Are any topics or skills mentioned more often than others?
  • Are there any words or phrases that I am unfamiliar with?
  • Are there any skills that I only know one method of solving?

For the last question specifically, if you noticed a few or many skills that you only know one way of solving, use the internet to learn more. Before teaching 6th grade math, I knew exactly one way to solve a proportion: cross multiply and divide. I now know about 16 ways to solve a proportion: finding the scale factor, bar models, double number lines, scaling, graphing, and so forth.  This is something that you can expect to do throughout the school year. A good rule of thumb is to come ready to teach with at least two different ways a student can solve. 

Now I am going to make a few plugs 😉

You can grab our middle school math + algebra 1 pacing guides by clicking below. This will help you get an idea of how our Maneuvering the Middle curriculum is organized.

Math teachers are incredibly helpful and we have almost 10k in our Maneuvering the Middle VIP Facebook Group. Join us, read and learn, and post your own questions. 

Join All Access! I truly believe if I had access to this curriculum in my first year of teaching math, I would have been less stressed and 100% more confident to tackle these standards. You can learn more about All Access here (like how it has everything you need and more to teach math), but we hear from teachers and administrators all the time about how our student video library helps new teachers learn and internalize the content.

What to Spend Your Money On 

If you can help it, try to resist the temptation to start spending money on your classroom until you have done some research.

First, find out if you have a budget from the school. I have been given $50 to unlimited funds (within reason) to spend on my classroom. Unfortunately, (and might I add, wrongly) some teachers receive zero dollars for their classroom. If you see something that you MUST have, at least hang onto the receipt since it may be reimbursable. 

Next, find out what the school already provides (or doesn’t provide). Your school may keep the teacher workroom stocked with #2 pencils, so you may never need to make that purchase. You may find out that you have a budget of $200 for the year, but the school doesn’t provide copy paper, so you may want to use that $200 on a paper supply.

You may want to purchase classroom posters and decorations! I get it, but it can get expensive, so be sure to check out how I decorated my classroom on a serious budget. All you need is colored cardstock and a printer.

Whether your school is paying or you are paying out of pocket for your classroom, I would recommend checking out our list of essential classroom supplies. This list even includes how necessary I think the item is. 

Lastly, remember that asking for donations from parents at Open House is totally acceptable. 

If you are a new math teacher, let us know how you are spending your summer. Veteran teachers, any additional advice you would include for the summer before school starts? Be sure to come back next Tuesday for more new math teacher tips.

How to teach math, specifically, your first of math is a huge undertaking to cover. Our 4 part series for newbies will help you start strong! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Middle School Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-middle-school-math/feed/ 2
How Teachers Use Our Math Videos https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-teachers-use-our-math-videos/ Tue, 28 Jun 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=51032 At Maneuvering the Middle, we take pride in the versatility of our resources. There is not one right way to use a student handout, activity, or even the student math videos. Teachers in our Facebook Group shared how they used the student videos to meet the needs of their students and I was blown away. […]

The post How Teachers Use Our Math Videos appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
At Maneuvering the Middle, we take pride in the versatility of our resources. There is not one right way to use a student handout, activity, or even the student math videos.

Teachers in our Facebook Group shared how they used the student videos to meet the needs of their students and I was blown away. What is most fascinating is how teachers use them in ways we didn’t even think of when we were in the planning stages of that project. Teachers are so creative!

Math videos can help teachers and students. Here are 6 ideas on how you can use them to benefit your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

FOR ABSENT STUDENTS

“I use them for when students are making up missed assignments or in ISS.” -Jennifer

“They watch vocabulary and intro to the lesson and then one or two problems per video then do a few on their own. Videos are great for students that are absent or need to review the concept.” – Courtney

FOR TEACHERS

“They work great when you have a sub, so you do not get behind in your curriculum. These videos are great tools for new and seasoned teachers.

Teachers on my team have watched the videos, especially if they are in a new grade level!!! – Courtney

“I watch them sometimes to make sure that I’m teaching the concept to the depth the students need.” -Jennifer

FOR REFERENCE LATER

“I post them to Google Classroom, so if students are absent or need to revisit the material, they are there!” – Amy

“I post them in Google Classroom. Students can use them if they are out or if they need more instruction.

I think it would work great for a flipped classroom. You know multiple voices, word choices, explaining the same thing only benefits the kids.” – Karen

IN CLASS 

“I have found that using the videos frees me up to pull small groups, provide feedback while students are applying the content, etc.

The biggest impact is allowing me the time to work with students more. To proactively intervene as needed.” -Amber

“I play the first video or two for each set of notes in class. I can circle around and check homework/attendance/make sure every child has a pencil and is writing. I then usually work through the example problems then it’s off to stations in independent practice and small groups with me.” – Brittany

“I use them (6-8) in class for my SpEd students to take notes. I will stop the video and we have discussions or have turn and talks. I love the videos because they chunk lessons that our other text (Big Ideas) lump together.” – Ann

Math videos can help teachers and students. Here are 6 ideas on how you can use them to benefit your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

FOR FLIPPED OR SELF-PACED CLASSROOMS

“I use the videos for every lesson to partially flip my class. There isn’t enough time to do all the lesson problems and have students practice within a class period. Students watch the videos and complete those problems as homework. The next day, I do the rest of the problems and students do the “homework” page in class. Works pretty well. I teach 6-8.” -Carla

“I have a self-paced classroom. I upload all instruction videos and assignments for a unit so that students are able to work at their own pace. I hold small groups at the same time for my struggling students so they are able to ask questions and get the face-to-face instruction they may require. My higher level students love it because they aren’t held up by questions and small talk that cause notes to go on forever.” -Emilie

GENERAL

“They allow the kids to hear from a different person besides you. She presents them in different ways.” -Sandra

“Parents of my students have watched them to help their children study for tests, complete study guides, etc.”  -Marissa 

If you are thinking that you would like your students to benefit from these math videos and all of these incredible ideas, then click over to learn more about All Access.

There you have it! This list is in no way exhaustive, so I would love to hear – how do you use our student math videos in your classroom?

Math videos can help teachers and students. Here are 6 ideas on how you can use them to benefit your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How Teachers Use Our Math Videos appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Ordering Rational Numbers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=50737 Comparing and ordering rational numbers is a complex skill with many steps, often complicated by the number of ways the problem can be presented. These tips and ideas will help scaffold this skill and make it more hands-on and engaging for your students. Standards Comparing and ordering rational numbers is predominantly a 6th grade skill […]

The post Ordering Rational Numbers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Comparing and ordering rational numbers is a complex skill with many steps, often complicated by the number of ways the problem can be presented. These tips and ideas will help scaffold this skill and make it more hands-on and engaging for your students.

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Standards

Comparing and ordering rational numbers is predominantly a 6th grade skill in both Common Core and TEKS. It will also support students locating and plotting rational numbers on the coordinate plane.

  1. 6.NS.7 Understand ordering and absolute value of rational numbers.
  2. 6.2D Order a set of rational numbers arising from mathematical and real-world contexts (Readiness Standard)
Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Released Staar Question

Looking at a test question isn’t a way to “teach to the test,” but rather, a way for me to make sure that I am teaching the complexity of the standard. By looking at the test question above, it helps me to understand that:

  • Students will need to order a set of 5 (or possibly more) rational numbers
  • These rational numbers will vary in type (fractions, mixed numbers, improper fractions, whole numbers, and decimals) so I can assume that test questions can also include percentages
  • It also helps me recognize that I need to make sure students pay attention to the order in which the question is asking
    • Greatest to least – which can also include words like “descending”
    • Least to greatest – which can also include words like “ascending” 

Convert to the Same Form (fraction, decimal, percent)

Before you can jump into ordering rational numbers, you will need to spend a few days on converting between fractions, decimals, and percentages. 

But I wouldn’t start by ordering a set of numbers that include fractions, decimals, and percentages. Start by scaffolding! Order a set of decimals, then a set of percentages, and lastly a set of fractions before introducing a mixed bag of rational numbers. 

For decimals, I suggest asking students to line up the decimal point and compare the digits going from left to right. 

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Have students add zeros to numbers after the decimal point so no student confuses a number with more digits as greater.

For percentages, I would use the same method. Remind students where the decimal point is in a percentage if it is not visible.

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

For fractions, this is where I don’t have strong opinions. Perhaps because I have not seen one method to be more successful than others. Butterfly method, finding a common denominator, converting fractions into a decimal, reasoning through it – I think each student will gravitate toward their favorite based on their past experiences. 

Once students have mastered ordering from the same type of rational numbers, have students order a small set of 3 rational numbers by converting them to the same form. In my experience, students (and me, the teacher) like to convert most rational numbers to decimals. I think this is because they are the easiest to compare and then order.

Use a Number Line

When negative numbers are included, a number line is an absolute must. The number line gives us context! A quick sketch of a number line with a zero in the middle immediately serves as a reminder that the numbers with the least value will be the furthest left and the numbers with the greatest value will be the furthest right!

In fact, a number line was a requirement for work shown when we ordered numbers in class. A dry erase marker and a desk allowed for lots of space for converting between the fractions, decimals, and percentages and placing them on the number line.

Quick Hits

  • Have a half day or need an extension activity? Have students make flashcards of benchmark fractions: ¼, ½, ¾, ⅕, ⅖, ⅗, ⅘. Once my students could ace this in a flyswatter challenge, I would add ⅛, ⅜, ⅝, ⅞. If students had these benchmark fractions memorized, it lightened the mental load for ordering rational numbers.
  • Make ordering numbers hands on! This can be done by using these cards. Print a set, laminate, and then have a living number line using the sticky side of painter’s tape (see the idea here). 

  • Get students moving! Give each student a card with a rational number. Tell them to get into groups of 4 and stand in order from least to greatest. Then tell them to find a new group with 3 people and stand in order from greatest to least. Go around the room and listen to their reasoning. You can do this as many times as you want using a different number of students and in a different order. You can finish the activity by having all the students stand in ascending or descending order.

How do you teach comparing and ordering rational numbers?

Ordering rational numbers is a middle school skill that requires a whole lot of other prerequisite skills. Check out post for tips to help students master. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Ordering Rational Numbers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ordering-rational-numbers/feed/ 1
Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/planning-and-designing-pbl-projects-in-math/ Tue, 07 Jun 2022 15:29:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=50717 If you are  interested in Project Based Learning, you might be wondering – where do I start? How do I find these projects? All of the ideas in this post come from Project Based Teaching, a book that we are reading to learn more about implementing projects in our math classrooms this year. Click the […]

The post Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you are  interested in Project Based Learning, you might be wondering – where do I start? How do I find these projects?

All of the ideas in this post come from Project Based Teaching, a book that we are reading to learn more about implementing projects in our math classrooms this year. Click the link here to grab your copy – a must for any teacher’s shelf.

Make sure to scroll down to grab a “50 Ways to Use Math in the Real-World” printable!

Planning projects can be tough. Find out WHERE to find projects and WHAT makes a good project for your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And make sure to grab our “50 Ways to Use Math in the Real World” printable for your classroom. This printable can be used as a jumping off point for projects, classroom decoration, or a resource to answer the question, “When are we ever going to use this (math skill)?”

And we are very excited to announce that two projects will be added to All Access in time for Back to School!

Update October 2022Math projects are now available for purchase! You do not have to be an All Access member to implement these standards-based projects in your classroom.

Click here to learn more about each project!

The standards-aligned projects focus on content covered in the fall semester with the second project covering content in the spring semester.

Each project is flexible in nature and includes teaching slides, warm-ups, exit tickets, student recording sheets and a project overview to help you structure class time and implement project components as smoothly as possible. Here is a little sneak peak of the 7th grade project.

Where to Find Good Projects

Borrow and adapt – Don’t start from scratch, especially if this is your first rodeo.  Editing and adjusting an existing project is a great place to start. Check out www.bie.org. This project library allows you to filter by subject and grade level. 

Remodel – Evaluate previously taught units to see which unit may lend itself to being taught using a project instead. Since you are familiar with the content, you will be able to focus on the execution. Consider the units in which students weren’t as engaged; a project may be the perfect way to turn that around.

Listen and codesign with students – “Student questions offer a renewable source of project inspiration.” Consider surveying them about their interest and what they would like to learn to get their ideas. Once you have identified the problem your students want to tackle, you can incorporate the required academic standards. 

Use current events – Headlines in recent events offer perfect examples of using data and statistics in favorable or unfavorable ways. 

Connect to popular culture – What are your students interested in? Is there a movie, book, or video game that has captured their attention that you can capitalize on? 

Respond to real requests – Does the community have needs that your students could meet using your subject matter?

Build on your passions – While students’ passions are important, so are yours! For me, I love architecture, so I always made sure to include a project on designing a home for a client and building a scaled model using what we knew about ratios and scale factor.

All AccessIn each grade level, we’ve added two real-world projects (to our already amazing curriculum and videos) intended to be engaging opportunities for extension and application of skills! Each project can serve as an assessment of students’ understanding while encouraging inquiry and critical thinking amongst your students. Coming in August 2022 – so exciting!

What Makes a High Quality Project

While you are creating or editing an existing project, you may be wondering what makes a good project? What components are necessary to make sure that students are thinking through, analyzing, and solving problems?

  • Challenging problem – The problem needs to grow students’ thinking muscles. Too hard and students won’t sustain; too easy and students will disengage.
  • Sustained inquiry – Students “need to be asking questions, conducting research, carrying out investigations, and weighing evidence to arrive at answers.”
  • Authenticity – The project must connect to the real world. 
  • Student voice and choice – Students are driving the learning. 
  • Critique and revision – Students are constantly giving and receiving (from peers and teachers) feedback to improve their project.
  • Public product – Students will present their project to a public audience – an extension of the classroom. This increases the engagement of the students and the quality of the projects. 

Preparing Your Resources

While you are planning projects, don’t forget to prepare and secure what is needed for students to execute successfully. Don’t forget to reserve items and spaces to keep your students engaged and excited about the project. Here is a non-comprehensive list to get your started:

  • Technology – apps, software, tools
  • Content Experts – mentors, panel members, clients or product users
  • Connecting to other subjects – can you go cross curricular? 
  • Community or school resources – video cameras, science labs, art studios 

Planning projects can be so fun! What projects do you want to try in your math classroom?

Planning projects can be tough. Find out WHERE to find projects and WHAT makes a good project for your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Planning and Designing PBL Projects in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/#comments Tue, 31 May 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49384 Maneuvering the Middle resources are used in an estimated 10,000 classrooms all around the world. (Wow!) What is it about our math curriculum that has teachers telling other teachers and their administration about it?  Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum Works The reason we can proudly promote our resources as the best thing for students (and teachers) […]

The post What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Maneuvering the Middle resources are used in an estimated 10,000 classrooms all around the world. (Wow!) What is it about our math curriculum that has teachers telling other teachers and their administration about it? 

Maneuvering the Middle is used in over 10K classrooms! Our resources are loved by teachers and students. Find out what makes us special here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum Works

The reason we can proudly promote our resources as the best thing for students (and teachers) is because we have first hand experience with how effective Maneuvering the Middle curriculum is.  When I used our 6th grade TEKS curriculum, the number of students reaching “Meets Grade Level” increased by 15% from the previous year (when I was using a different resource). 

We receive emails and comments from teachers daily who share that their students are growing. 

I just wanted to email you and thank you and your team for all you do! This year my 8th grade math team and I used your entire curriculum and we saw scores that we have never seen before (93% passing)! I work at a low income Title 1 school where the majority of my kids came to me hating math and over half did not pass the STAAR test the year before. I seriously believe that because of your materials my students started to actually enjoy math. I personally used almost everything in the curriculum and my students grew this year more than I could have imagined! Every student but 1 passed the STAAR test this year and this is coming from the same group of students who came to me with less than half passing during 7th grade! I just want to say THANK YOU! You have truly made a difference in not only my teaching but many others on my campus as well!! -Hayley

I love this testimonial because it shows some celebratory data (93% is amazing), but also because Hayley states that our materials help her students love math. 

Standards Aligned

If you are in a Common Core State or teach in Texas, then you can be confident that by using our curriculum, you will be covering each and every standard. If you are like me, you read a standard and wonder, “What does that even mean?” You can rest assured knowing that our curriculum team (shoutout Kim, Noelle, Ashleigh, and Sara) have done the work to make sure that the standard is taught with the proper scaffolding to reach the depth and complexity that is required.

All of our curriculum teachers were once teaching this material in their own classrooms, so they know that it isn’t simple or easy to get everything covered in a school year.

In addition, schools that use Maneuvering the Middle across all grade levels will see how the content builds upon itself. There are no holes in the content from one grade level to another. 

Saves Your Time and Energy

When you are a teacher who can focus on the teaching part of your job and not the curriculum creation part of your job, you can be more effective. Let’s be real – writing curriculum is its own job! To be a teacher and a curriculum writer means you are working 2 jobs and being a teacher is hard enough!

My favorite principal said she would always prefer a rested and happy teacher over a tired and stressed teacher with a great lesson plan. 

When the curriculum is taken care of, you can use your time and energy for all of the other aspects of the job – building relationships, providing feedback, remediation and intervention, instruction, implementing routines and procedures, running copies and preparing classroom materials, and (insert 1000 more tasks here). 

Consistent Routine + Lots of Variety

Maneuvering the Middle offers student handouts, video lessons, study guides, assessments, digital activities, and more. Not to mention, our hands-on activities include:

  • Solve & Colors and Mazes – for fluency practice
  • He Said, She Said and Find It, Fix Its – for error analysis
  • Card Matching and Cut and Pastes – for tactile learning

We offer a lot! These resources are consistent across the 4 different grade levels, so students know what to expect and can focus on learning the math – not a new routine or activity.

Because there is so much variety, you can truly pick and choose what works best for your students. Personally for me, cut and paste activities were not my jam, so I skipped those. Even without those activities in my rotation, I NEVER lacked for anything. I would turn to a digital activity instead!

When I say that I never lacked for anything, I mean it! Check out everything that is included in All Access.

 

Works for Different Classrooms and Teaching Styles

Maneuvering the Middle works in so many different types of classrooms! If you join our Facebook Group, you can ask how teachers use the curriculum in their classroom and you will find that no two teachers use it the same way.

Teachers use our curriculum in flipped classrooms, with direct instruction, and self-paced learning classrooms. Our materials are used in homeschool settings, hybrid classrooms, virtual classrooms, and in-person classrooms. Teachers who coteach or teach intervention use our materials too. You can find it in public schools, private schools and charter schools! 

Our video library makes all of those different teaching methods even more accessible for teachers and students.  

It may seem like we are tooting our own horn! We are really proud of what we have created. We know our curriculum doesn’t work without amazing teachers, so thank you teachers for all that you do!

Why do you love Maneuvering the Middle curriculum?

Maneuvering the Middle is used in over 10K classrooms! Our resources are loved by teachers and students. Find out what makes us special here! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post What Makes Maneuvering the Middle Different appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-makes-mtm-different/feed/ 1
Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-multiplying-and-dividing-integers/ Tue, 24 May 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49267 Multiplying and dividing integers is the perfect math concept – the computation is relatively simple, there are opportunities for hands-on learning with manipulatives, and there are an abundance of explanations that support the conceptual understanding.  However, it is a little tricky! Be sure to read “How to Teach Integer Operations” where we cover the specifics […]

The post Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying and dividing integers is the perfect math concept – the computation is relatively simple, there are opportunities for hands-on learning with manipulatives, and there are an abundance of explanations that support the conceptual understanding. 

However, it is a little tricky! Be sure to read “How to Teach Integer Operations” where we cover the specifics on adding and subtracting integers, as well as some common misconceptions to avoid. 

Multiplying and dividing integers is taught as early as 6th grade (in Texas) but primarily introduced in 7th grade. Multiplying and dividing integers extends into rational numbers which means there is a lot to cover!

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tip #1: Start By Using Models or Manipulatives

“Tricks” definitely have their time and place in math, but building conceptual understanding is key for students to build that mathematical fluency. Since math is always progressing and building on itself, tricks can often be mixed up with other tricks. Anyone who has taught integers or fraction operations probably has experienced this first hand. (Keep, change, flip or keep, change, change?)

Modeling why like signs result in a positive answer and why unlike signs result in a negative answer is more likely to stick than having students only copy down the “rules.” Though I do think it is helpful to do that too! In fact, I kept an anchor chart with all of the rules posted throughout most of the school year.

Here is a helpful Google Slide Deck that I recommend using to introduce WHY a positive times a negative results in a negative product and WHY a negative times a negative results in a positive product. I used a number line to introduce this concept, but counters can work too.

Here is the slide deck for you to copy and use in your classroom! The animations are included, so you just have to click your mouse to make the arrows move.

If you prefer counters, here is how I would teach positive times a negative.

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And a negative times a positive. One thing to note is since you can’t take away 4 groups of 2, you can introduce zero pairs. With the zero pairs, you now have 2s to “take away.”

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

And lastly, a negative times a negative.

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tip #2: Ask them to Come Up With the Rules Using Patterns

The great thing about math is that the rules are always supported by patterns.

When using the above table (a snippet from a student handout), it is important to start in the top left corner where students are familiar with those facts. Allowing students to see the patterns that create the rules really makes the content stick.

You could give students a list of numbers like the one below and ask them to make observations about what they see. If a student can’t remember a rule, they can recreate a list of multiplication facts, and then synthesize the rules on their own.

  • -5*(3)= -15
  • -5*(2)= ?
  • -5*(1)= -5
  • -5*(0)= 0
  • -5*(-1)= 5
  • -5*(-2)= ?
  • -5*(-3)= ?

Tip #3: Other Fun Ideas for Practice

  • Give students a value they are trying to reach.  Provide sticky notes or cards marked with a variety of integers. Students match integers to equal the given value. Similar to using counters, this allows for students to practice their fluency but also to be flexible problem solvers.
  • Our MTM Activities – Entire bundle, speed dating, scavenger hunt and multiplying rational numbers digital activity, dividing rational numbers digital activity
  • Playing War using this idea from Mrs. E Teaches Math.
  • Make sure to include opportunities for real-world situations. Money, football gains and losses, temperature, and sea level are things that give these numbers context. Context provides students with opportunities for application as well as verifying if an answer makes sense. 
  • Make sure to buy and laminate these number lines. I would give my students dry erase markers to write on them.

Tip #4: Putting It All Together

In my experience, students are doing well and seem to really grasp when they are completing operations in isolation. Asking students to complete work where they are switching between the 4 operations or using them together can cause students to confuse what they have learned.

When that happens, ask students to draw a picture of what is happening. Send them back to the models because that is what they are there for – to make sense of the math. Don’t put the counters or number lines away just because you have already taught the models. 

Since many students are resistant to draw models when they think they’ve “got it,” I would remind students that drawing the models accounted for half of the work/grade/completion. Once students mastered the four operations on a summative assignment, I would give them permission to use the algorithm only.

What tips do you have for teaching multiplying and dividing integers?

Multiplying and dividing integers can be confusing to students. Here are our tips for making this concept concrete. Plus, a freebie to help teach the rules! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Multiplying and Dividing Integers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying Fractions with Models https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/#comments Tue, 17 May 2022 18:16:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=49367 Multiplying fractions: the good news – the process for teaching modeling fraction multiplication is much more straightforward than teaching dividing fractions with models! But if you are teaching fraction multiplication, then you will most likely be teaching dividing fractions shortly, so be sure to check out our dividing fractions post where you can get a […]

The post Multiplying Fractions with Models appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Multiplying fractions: the good news – the process for teaching modeling fraction multiplication is much more straightforward than teaching dividing fractions with models! But if you are teaching fraction multiplication, then you will most likely be teaching dividing fractions shortly, so be sure to check out our dividing fractions post where you can get a free guide.

While the standards for middle school math do not include modeling specifically (those can be found in 4th and 5th grade), middle school students can benefit from growing their conceptual understanding.

Teaching multiplying fractions seems easy enough, but have you ever used models? Models build conceptual understanding! Plus, more tips for those tricky mixed numbers! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with Whole Numbers

The basis of modeling fraction multiplication uses arrays. Before you jump into using arrays with fractions, start with modeling multiplication using whole numbers and arrays. Have students create their own arrays too.

Anytime I am introducing a new concept, I connect it to something they already know how to do. This builds students’ confidence and creates more buy-in which means my job as teacher is a lot more enjoyable 🙂 

Build the Conceptual Understanding Using Reasonableness

Before introducing the models, I want students to continue to build their reasonableness. Start with something that students are very familiar with like pizza.  

Asking questions like –

  • “If I have 1 pizza, and I eat ½ of it, did I eat more or less than 1 pizza?”
  • “If I have 3 pizzas, and I burned ⅔ of them, how many pizzas did I burn?”
  • “If I have 1½ of a pizza left and you ate ½ of that half, did you eat more or less than 1 pizza?”

One of the 6th grade TEKS standards is developing the understanding that multiplying a whole number by a fraction less than 1 will result in a product less than the original whole number, and multiplying by a fraction greater than 1 will result in a product greater than the original whole number. Using reasonableness can help support this standard and a conceptual understanding of multiplying fractions.

Modeling a Whole Number by a Fraction

4 times ⅖ can be interpreted as 4 groups of ⅖ or ⅖ + ⅖+ ⅖+ ⅖. This is the easiest to model. Draw a picture or use pattern blocks to demonstrate this concept for students.

It gets a little trickier when you have ⅖ of 4. Sure you will get the same answer, but students do need to understanding that this means taking a ⅖ part of 4 wholes. If you haven’t checked out Mix and Math yet, Brittany is the queen of hand-on teaching in upper elementary math. Check out this video to see how she uses pattern blocks to teach these concepts.

Modeling a Fraction by a Fraction

If you need a refresher (or didn’t learn it this way yourself) this video explains how to multiply a fraction by a fraction using models. Again, this array will be more effective if you have introduced arrays with whole numbers first. 

  • Brownie pans or rice krispie pans are my go-to representations of this skill. 
  • Fraction Multipliers are manipulatives that support this skill. These manipulatives are very  effective in a small group or intervention classroom.

Modeling Multiplying Mixed Numbers

In the past, I have taught students to convert mixed numbers into improper fractions and then to use the algorithm. This totally works! However, there are so many steps and so many places to make mistakes. 

Here are a few tips to make this more manageable. Try using an area model to keep students’ work more organized. 

You can always have students make the problem simpler in order to estimate.

Let’s say the problem is 3 ⅜ times 5 ⅚. You could think of it as 3 ½ times 6. This becomes 3 times 6 plus 1/2 times 6. (Think: 34*5 is the same thing as 30 times 5 plus 4 times 5.) Therefore, 18 + 3 = 21. The answer to 3 ⅜ times 5 ⅚ is going to be verrrryyy close to 21. And since we rounded each factor up, I know my answer should be less than 21. 

At the very least, you could have your students multiply the whole numbers to check that their answers are reasonable. 

Additional Tips

  • Give students the models and ask them to come up with the the number sentence that best represents it
  • Remember that modeling isn’t just an introductory step. If you only use them to introduce the concept and never revisit, neither will your students.
  • There is nothing wrong with the algorithm! Teach it, use it, and model it!

How do you teach multiplying fractions?

Teaching multiplying fractions seems easy enough, but have you ever used models? Models build conceptual understanding! Plus, more tips for those tricky mixed numbers! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Multiplying Fractions with Models appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/multiplying-fractions-with-models/feed/ 1
Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strengthening-classroom-culture-through-projects/ Tue, 26 Apr 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47746 At Maneuvering the Middle, we are all reading Project Based Teaching by Suzie Boss and John Larmers. Throughout the next few months, we will be discussing what we are learning as we read the book. There are 7 best practices for Project Best Teaching, and today we are covering building a strong classroom culture. If […]

The post Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
At Maneuvering the Middle, we are all reading Project Based Teaching by Suzie Boss and John Larmers. Throughout the next few months, we will be discussing what we are learning as we read the book. There are 7 best practices for Project Best Teaching, and today we are covering building a strong classroom culture.

Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

If you are interested in incorporating more projects in your classroom, then grab the book and follow along.

Update October 2022 – If you want to include projects in your class, but aren’t sure where to start, then grab our Math Projects!

Math projects are now available for purchase! You do not have to be an All Access member to implement these standards-based projects in your classroom.

Click here to learn more about each project!

Why Projects?

The world is turning to collaborative projects. At Maneuvering the Middle, everyone works on teams to complete various projects. None of our work is done in isolation. 

Why Culture Matters

”Positive culture doesn’t get built with a one-day team builder. It’s an ongoing effort to create an inclusive community of learners.”

Classroom culture is necessary in order for students to feel safe making mistakes and asking questions that are required during Project Based Learning. We have a whole post about how to make your classroom feel positive and safe, so be sure to check it out. 

4 Strategies for Building Strong Culture

After reading through the strategies for building strong classroom culture for Project Based Learning, I was so relieved to read nothing brand new. If you are a teacher reading a blog post about teaching, you are probably already doing many of these things!

1. Beliefs and Values

In this section of the book, many teachers that the authors have interviewed share examples of how they show students their core values and beliefs. Examples include: asking students for feedback about what they like or would change about class so students feel like their voice matters, reminding students that they are all capable of solving big problems, and providing projects that are relevant to students’ lives.

2. Shared Norms

“Norms … are shared agreements about how classmates and teachers treat one another and what they value as a community of learners.”

I agree that the most valuable norms are the norms that students have a say in. Creating buy-in is crucial in any classroom! These should be posted and repeated often by both teachers and students. Here are examples of norms I used in my classroom:

  • Everyone contributes
  • Respect each other
  • Share the mic
  • Follow directions 
  • Good attitudes only

I love how Todd Finley establishes norms in his classroom. He has students brainstorm examples of actions that have impeded learning. Here is an example from his classroom:

  • Example: If students laugh when I make a mistake, I don’t want to participate. 
  • Norm to counteract: We learn from mistakes. 

3. Physical Environment

Your classroom environment also contributes to a strong classroom culture. Make sure students have access to technology and other tools that will help support their learning. Here are 4 ideas that Project Based Teaching recommends considering:

  1. Flexible seating and arrangements that support working in partners and groups
  2. A project wall: “By dedicating a bulletin board… to the project currently underway, you create a central location to manage information, highlight upcoming deadlines and milestones, remind students of the driving question, capture need-to-knows, and point to resources.” A digital space could serve this purpose too. 
  3. Sentence starters: Since student voice is so important in project based learning, it is important to provide support for ALL students. These sentence stems can help students engage with each other productively and appropriately. 
Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Evidence of the messy middle: Keep rough drafts and unfinished work visible. It provides opportunities for questions, discussion, and feedback.

Routines and Habits for a Student Centered Classroom

We are no stranger to routines and procedures! Routines and procedures increase learning time. Here are the routines and procedures that are necessary for PBL (or truly any classroom):

  • Active listening – all voices in a group are heard and valued
  • Providing feedback – how to give and receive feedback in a way that is helpful and kind
  • Morning meetings – check in time with class that helps strengthen relationships
  • Thinking routines – like “think-pair-share”
  • Closers – ending class with shout outs or to state a class norm

Starting Small

If you are interested in a PBL classroom, start small with a small team building challenge. 

  • Community Counts is a great place to start – it helps building relationships between students and teacher and student to student

“If you build that culture early, students will be ready to tackle longer, more content-heavy projects later in the school year.”

To learn more about incorporating project based learning into your classroom, check out Project Based Teaching

Do you use project based learning in your classroom? What are ways you build your classroom culture?

Classroom culture can be strengthened by using Project Based Learning! Find out how to build the perfect classroom culture for taking risks, asking questions, and growing in math skills using PBL. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Strengthening Classroom Culture Through Projects appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/volume-activities-and-7-teaching-tips/ Tue, 19 Apr 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47655 Volume is one of my favorite middle school math skills to teach. The skill is visual and concrete, requires sketching pictures (which is always fun to tease what a great artist I am), and the operations required for solving allow for spiraled practice. A real winner from this teacher’s point of view! Here are my […]

The post Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Volume is one of my favorite middle school math skills to teach. The skill is visual and concrete, requires sketching pictures (which is always fun to tease what a great artist I am), and the operations required for solving allow for spiraled practice. A real winner from this teacher’s point of view!

Here are my 7 tips/ideas for teaching volume in a way that students will get the most from it.

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with Area

While most scope and sequences require mastering area (or surface area) before moving onto volume, the connection between area and volume cannot be ignored.

In fact, in all of the formulas for volume, the area of the base is abbreviated as ‘B’. And while this formula chart does give the formula for the various shapes’ areas, it does that separate from the volume formulas. 

Encourage students to shade the base in every problem and then sketch the base separately with its dimensions. This helps students to actually calculate the area of the base instead of  using only one of it’s measurements, which was often the most common misconception I witnessed. 

This Desmos Activity really helps make the connection between the area of the base and the height.

Write down the Formula + Draw the Shape

You don’t have to provide formulas when you first introduce volume! Have students make observations and predictions. For example, using a rectangular prism and a triangular prism with the same height and base measurements, ask – “how many triangular prisms could fit inside the rectangular prism?” You can do this for a cone and a cylinder too! Unifix cubes are the perfect manipulatives to use for students to understand how volume is measured in a rectangular prism. 

After you have introduced the formula for a shape, require students to write down the formula for the shape as part of their work. This will prevent students from leaving off multiplying by ⅓ for the volume of a cone or 4/3 for a sphere. I would even make this mistake on purpose, so students would shoot up their hands and say, “Ms. Brack, you forgot to multiply by ⅓!”

In addition, if a given problem lacked a figure, I required students to draw the figure and label the sides with the given measurements. 

Use the Exact Formula Chart They Will See on Testing Day

Set your students up for success for testing day! Provide students with the EXACT formula chart they will see when they take their state test. I made a class set on bright neon cardstock that I would laminate. It stayed out throughout the entirety of my Geometry Unit. 

During a geometry lesson,  I would always instruct my students to silently point to the formula we would need on their formula chart.  I would do a quick sweep to make sure students were on the right track. Don’t assume your students will understand how to find what they need from a formula chart. 

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Start with an Exploratory Activity

This is pretty obvious, but volume is so hands-on! It is physically all around us. 

You can do this in a variety of ways: calculating the volume of various items like – tissue boxes, cereal boxes, oatmeal canisters, saltine boxes etc. A sleeve of crackers is the perfect cylinder and is a perfect way to show how the volume is the area of the base times height.

Our Exploration Activity helps students explore the relationships between cylinders and cones using play dough or dried beans. You can find it in our 8th grade volume activity bundle.

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This is a free activity that sounds like a perfect way to include a project for rectangular prisms. Students are given a single piece of paper and instructed to create the largest possible box. 

Maneuvering the Middle Activities

Our activity bundles are engaging and hands on! With all of the shapes that are covered in middle school math, it’s nice to know that every prism, cylinder, cone, and sphere will receive practice.

Other Tips

Use fabric measuring tapes over rulers. They are less expensive, take up less space, and students will not be tempted to sword fight. 

If you have access to unifix cubes, give students a specific volume and have them work backwards to create as many rectangular prisms with different measurements that satisfies that volume. 

What tips do you have for teaching volume?

Check out our tips for teaching volume to middle school students. Plus, our recommendations for best hands-on activities. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Volume Activities and 7 Teaching Tips appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Solving for Y https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-solving-for-y/ Tue, 12 Apr 2022 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=47643 Solving for y is necessary for 8th grade math and Algebra 1. It is often a pain point for students and teachers. Let’s talk about how solving for y is important and tips for teaching it. Why Students Need to Solve for Y While “solving for y” is not mentioned in any specific standard, it […]

The post How to Teach Solving for Y appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Solving for y is necessary for 8th grade math and Algebra 1. It is often a pain point for students and teachers. Let’s talk about how solving for y is important and tips for teaching it.

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Why Students Need to Solve for Y

While “solving for y” is not mentioned in any specific standard, it is necessary for so many other standards: 

  1. A.2(B) write linear equations in two variables in various forms, including y = mx + b, Ax + By = C, and y – y1 = m(x – x1), given one point and the slope and given two points
  2. A.5(C) solve systems of two linear equations with two variables for mathematical and real‐world problems.

First off, slope-intercept form (y=mx+b) makes graphing possible. Slope-intercept form makes identifying your slope and y-intercept instantaneous. This question was pulled from a previous STAAR test:

This problem requires a student to convert standard form 8x+3y=15 to slope-intercept form which means they must solve for y. (They could also use -A/B which supports the steps needed to isolate y anyway!) This problem also requires point-slope form and then converting back to standard form – jeez! 

Slope-intercept form also supports solving systems of equations by graphing. Solving for y will support students using substitution to find a solution too. 

Essentially, students must be flexible in converting between the various types of equations: standard form and slope-intercept form.

Furthermore, in Quadratics, converting standard form to vertex form requires solving for y too. Similar to slope-intercept form, vertex form gives information about the function (like the vertex and the direction it opens) that cannot be determined in standard form. 

Teach Literal Equations First

Literal equations are equations with only letters. Typically, students are solving for an assigned variable. It can be extremely tricky for students to wrap their heads around this which is why I love how our Algebra 1 Solving Equations Unit covers it.

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Maneuvering the Middle’s student handouts set students up to solve various step equations with numbers and then follow the same steps with variables only. (Need more ideas for solving equations?)

Start From Scratch

When students see something foreign, they assume that it is all brand new information, so start at the beginning:

  • Review order of operations backwards
  • Review what the inverse operations are
  • Review what makes something “like terms”
  • Review that if there is not a sign before a number, it is positive
  • Review integer operations rules
  • Review solving for a single variable when there are numbers present

Once this is ingrained in their head, then make the jump to solving for y when the variable x is present. Students get stuck usually because teachers assume that students know and understand more than they do. 

Try the X-citing Move + the Great Divide

If you are teaching converting from standard form to slope-intercept form, the steps will often be the exact same to isolate y. This mnemonic device is a way to help your students remember the steps required. Mrs. Newell’s math blog has other great ideas, so be sure to check it out. “X-citing move” reminds students to move x to the other side of the equal sign using inverse operations. “The great divide” reminds students to divide by y’s coefficient. Sometimes it is the simplest methods that make the biggest impact!

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Substitution, Graphing, and Elimination

With so many ways to solve systems of equations or inequalities, it is important to teach when you apply different methods. Or better yet, have students make observations for what method works best and why. Solving for y supports solving systems by graphing or substituting.

  • Substitution – an equation is already solved for a single variable
  • Elimination – both equations are already in standard form and don’t require lots of manipulation to eliminate both of the x’s or y’s
  • Graphing – one or both of the equations are already in slope-intercept form

What would you teach students regarding this problem?

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  • Students may want to graph – the answer choices have graphs, the numbers are friendly, but the equations are in standard form requiring the extra step of converting to slope-intercept form.
  • You could substitute the answer choices’ solutions into the standard form equations to see whether the solution provides true statements.
  • You could use elimination, but all of these require multiple steps. 

I think that is what makes this a good problem – students will have to weigh the pros and cons of each method with their confidence in solving. 

How do you teach solving for y?

Solving for y is needed for slope-intercept & systems of equations, but can be tricky for students. Check out our tips to teach this skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Solving for Y appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Multiplication Facts in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-multiplication-facts-in-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-multiplication-facts-in-middle-school/#comments Tue, 29 Mar 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=46539 Teaching multiplication facts is not often practiced in middle school. Do middle school students need to have their multiplication facts memorized? Regardless of your answer, I think most math teachers would agree that multiplication fluency helps students see patterns, relationships, and supports more complex mathematical processes. If you are covering middle school standards, you don’t […]

The post Teaching Multiplication Facts in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching multiplication facts is not often practiced in middle school. Do middle school students need to have their multiplication facts memorized?

Regardless of your answer, I think most math teachers would agree that multiplication fluency helps students see patterns, relationships, and supports more complex mathematical processes. If you are covering middle school standards, you don’t have a lot of time to devote to teaching or reteaching multiplication, but there are ways to support your students without adding too much work to your already heavy workload.

Teaching multiplication facts can be challenging in middle school. Check out some ways to support students who are still working on mastery. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Be Strategic

There are so many websites and apps devoted to practicing multiplication facts. Check out some of our recommendations down below.

However, if you just assign these to students with zero direction or instruction, chances are their fluency won’t improve.  If these students have made it to middle school without mastering multiplication facts, then just giving them more of the same probably won’t move the needle to mastery.

Drill and kill is not known to improve fluency. One of the practices I took part in was printing a multiplication chart off for every student to put inside their math folder. For students who needed it, they had it there to use. I wanted my students to access the grade-level content, and if they could do that with a multiplication chart, then wonderful!

Brittany, from Mix and Math, says this about multiplication charts, and I whole-heartedly agree: “Giving students no supports to access grade-level work while they are still working to build their fluency with multiplication would be like sending the patient home from the hospital to heal without crutches. We want students to have some way to work with more advanced math concepts, even though they aren’t where we’d like them to be with multiplication yet. Consider giving students partially filled multiplication charts so that they are only using them for facts that they personally struggle with.”

I grabbed a free, colorful multiplication chart from Hannah at Math, Kids, and Chaos.

Capitalize on Friendly Facts

Generally speaking, students who haven’t mastered all of their multiplication facts usually have mastered their 0s, 1s, 2s, 5s, and 10s. These facts are actually a hop-skip-and-a-jump from facts like their 6s and 9s.

Teaching 6 Times Tables

Let’s take 6×6. If a student can solve 5×6=30, then adding another group of 6 will help students get to 36. Students need a solid understanding that 5×6 means 5 groups of 6 and that 6×6 would mean to add another group of 6 to 30.

Teaching 9 Times Tables

While I learned my 9 times tables by using the finger trick, I think using your 10s times table is actually best! Take 9×7. 10×7=70 which means 10 groups of 7 is 70; 9 groups of 7 would be 1 group of 7 less than 70. 70-7=63.

When To Implement Multiplication Practice

This can be tough because there are so many other standards to devote time to. So when do you devote time teaching multiplication fact fluency?

  • Beginning of the school year warm ups – provide students with some multiplication facts practice via a simple Mad Minute style worksheet or a blank or partially blank multiplication chart. This strategy works because students are usually still easing back into math after a long summer, so every student will benefit. You can walk around and gauge which students will need extra support. 
  • Stations – One of the ways to have stations that make planning as brainless as possible is to have one station always devoted to some type of fact fluency. I love Math Dash Ninjas for this because it is super engaging for students and you can easily differentiate the type of fact fluency that students are practicing. 
  • Lastly, Fact Fridays is a great way to use 10 minutes of class practicing multiplication fact fluency. Kahoot or Quizziz have so many prebuilt games devoted to fact practice.
  • Intervention Class – If multiplication fact fluency is something the majority of your intervention students struggle with, then I highly recommend diving deep into multiplication concepts at the beginning of the school year. How does one do that? First I would read this post and watch this video on Subitizing Cards where you can also grab a free download.

Websites and Apps for Multiplication Practice

These websites were recommended in our Facebook Group – Maneuvering the Middle VIPs

  • Reflex Math – Requires student logins, but the program is adaptive and engaging. 
  • Xtra Math – Requires student logins, but you can sign up to receive weekly progress reports of student progress.
  • Transum Tablemaster – Free and requires no login. Practice is specific to one set of facts at a time. No mixed practice. 

Teaching multiplication facts an be tricky! How do you improve multiplication fluency with your middle school students?

Teaching multiplication facts can be challenging in middle school. Check out some ways to support students who are still working on mastery. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Multiplication Facts in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-multiplication-facts-in-middle-school/feed/ 1
Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-math-vocabulary-that-sticks/ Tue, 08 Mar 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=46410 For math to be accessible to students, math vocabulary must be taught! Let’s talk about teaching math vocabulary in a way that sticks! Let’s see how important math vocabulary is to understanding and solving this problem. Could you solve this problem? I covered up a vital piece of information needed to solve this problem to […]

The post Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
For math to be accessible to students, math vocabulary must be taught! Let’s talk about teaching math vocabulary in a way that sticks!

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Let’s see how important math vocabulary is to understanding and solving this problem. Could you solve this problem? I covered up a vital piece of information needed to solve this problem to emulate what a student might experience without knowing the vocabulary necessary to solve.

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Model Using the Math Language

If we want students to use the words we are teaching, we need to practice using it ourselves. Vocabulary requires exposure. Using the words as frequently as possible, students will hear  the words as frequently as possible, increasing their comfort with the words.

If a student uses a vocabulary word incorrectly, then make sure to correct it. “Bottom number” is a “denominator.”

As teachers, we can jump ahead to the solving of a problem, but using the STAAR test question above, we should start by asking students – “What does surface area mean?”

Annotating word problems or questions is also a way to practice math vocabulary. Anytime we read the word “percent,” we wrote “/100” to remember that percent meant “out of 100.”Let’s look at another math vocabulary rich problem: 


Here are some questions you can ask to practice that math vocabulary. 

  • What makes a number an integer?
  • Is -53 an integer?
  • What does absolute value mean?

Get Ahead By Previewing Vocabulary

If you are a Texas teacher, you can use this excellent document that will show you which vocabulary words are new to the grade level as well as words from previous grade levels. This is a great place to start for a word wall. 

Previewing the vocabulary for an upcoming unit is a great place to start when teaching math vocabulary. In my experience, students copying definitions killed the energy in class, but offering students a “kid-friendly” definition that you referenced daily and had them practice (using some of the ideas in this post) was much more successful. 

Display a Word Wall

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

Word walls are a vital part of any math classroom. You can learn more about word walls in this post.  If students are taking a brain break and staring off into space, they are likely staring at some math content. To have the most useful word wall, make sure words include a short definition, picture, and can be visible from the furthest spot in the classroom.

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

My word wall was constantly building. The wall started with 3 words in unit 1 and eventually built to just under 100 by the end of the school year. I purchased my sixth grade TEKS word wall here

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Pointing out the addition of new words to the word wall and where students can access help if needed lets students know that the word wall is for their use! It is meant to be used!

Provide Opportunities to Use the Words in Context

When asking students questions, prompt the response to include vocabulary in their answer. This is the lowest lift, but it is so effective! Use a turn and talk and a cold call to get every student responding.

  • Instead of: how do we divide fractions?
  • Try: Using the word reciprocal, explain how we divide fractions.
  • Instead of: What sides of the triangle are congruent?
  • Try: Using the word congruent, describe what you notice about the sides of this triangle.

I read that you need to use a new word about 10 times before you remember it! Teaching math vocabulary is something that you build into your instruction.

Fun Practice for Spiraling Definitions

To keep vocabulary and definitions fresh, use any of these activities in the last few minutes of class:

  • Flyswatter Games – If you want students to get familiar with your word wall, use the Flyswatter Game.  This is a very engaging review game. If you are like me and don’t bother to cover up anything in your room before a test, this will help remind students where to look when they are stuck.  Two students face off with fly swatters in hand.  You give them a prompt such as “2, 4, 6, 8” are examples of ______” And the first student to swat the word ‘multiples’ earns their team a point.
  • Flashlight Game -This game is great for those last few minutes of class as a sponge activity.  Turn off the lights and use a flashlight to point to a word on the wall.  Students can then shout out an example, the definition, or even a counter-example. 
  • Guess the Word – I played this in a PD, and immediately implemented it in my classroom. One student stands with the white board behind them facing the rest of the classroom. You write (or have a slide deck prepared) a vocabulary word behind the student. Students in the classroom take turns giving the students hints to what vocabulary word is written behind them. You see how many words the student can guess in a given amount of time. 
  • Quizziz or Kahoot – Both have a vast library of vocabulary rich games.

How do you teach math vocabulary to your students?

Teaching math vocabulary helps students engage with math concepts at a deeper level. These tips will help you teach vocabulary that sticks! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Math Vocabulary that Sticks appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Statistics Activities for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-statistics-activities-for-middle-school/ Tue, 01 Mar 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=46394 Data and statistics is such a fun topic to teach in middle school math! The relevance and hands-on nature of analyzing and displaying data made it engaging for my students and myself! Data and statistics usually fell to the very last unit in my scope and sequence which meant I was tired, and the amount […]

The post 5 Statistics Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Data and statistics is such a fun topic to teach in middle school math! The relevance and hands-on nature of analyzing and displaying data made it engaging for my students and myself! Data and statistics usually fell to the very last unit in my scope and sequence which meant I was tired, and the amount of creative energy I had to put into my lessons was waning. Just me? So I thought I would round up some data and statistics activities to end this school year with a bang.

Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make your own or use MTM

Have students collect data about something they are interested in and put the data in whatever display you are teaching over the course of the unit: dot plots, box plots, histograms, circle graphs, etc.  Here are some ideas: 

  • Sports data – Students pick a team and create a histogram or box plot to represent the data of the athletes’ heights, years playing, or whatever applicable data point students find interesting. Display everyone’s graphs and complete a gallery walk where students use Post-it Notes to write down questions and observations. 
  • Real-time data – Using a similar format, ask students to track their own usage data over different forms of technology over the course of the week. 
  • Data from their own lives – Students can use information from their classmates, friends, or themselves.  Maneuvering the Middle’s performance task is perfect for this. (Find it inside this 6th Grade Statistics bundle.) Students take a survey of the class and calculate the interquartile range, mean, median, and mean absolute deviation. They are then asked to graph this data in various ways. 
Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. PBS Learning

If you haven’t had an opportunity to explore PBS Learning Media, check it out! Everything is free and there are many real-world examples and videos complete with lesson plans. Filter by subject, topic, or lesson type. These lessons serve as great application opportunities to whatever you are learning in class.

Here are 3 activities that I found compelling:

3. He Said, She Said Freebie

I love He Said, She Said activities! Our Data & Statistics He Said, She Said activities are a hands-on way for students to analyze others’ work and apply their knowledge about box plots and two-way tables. Students are asked to justify their answers, so it pushes students to use those higher-level thinking skills. He Said, She Said activities are so versatile and can be implemented 100 different ways. 

  • Use them in pairs or in groups of 3-4. With many group activities, I liked to start students off working collaboratively, and then give them 5 or so minutes at the end to work independently. This allows them to test their ability, and for me to see who still needs support.
  • Use them as a review. Box plots were a skill that my students needed lots of practice on, so these activities provided extra opportunities for students to ask questions.
  • Use them as an extension. Students finished early? He Said, She Said cards can easily be hung around the classroom or put on a ring for students to grab when they have completed their assigned work for the day.

4. Desmos

I love how interactive Desmos activities are. There is something for every grade level on a range of statistics skills. 

5. Digital activities

Digital activities have so many pros. Easy to assign to remote learners, scaffolded questions, and complete with a short formative assessment. They also make for a no-brainer station or rotation. 

If you want access to all of the resources shared today, be sure to check our All Access membership!

There you have it! 5 ways for your students to engage with data and statistics. What data and statistics activities do you love?

Statistics activities for middle school can be hands-on and make math relevant! Here are 5 ideas to try in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Statistics Activities for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-for-teaching-math-concepts/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=44539 Let’s discuss strategies for teaching math concepts using the CRA framework. Remember that the CRA framework has proven to help students grasp difficult math concepts. If you are scratching your head asking yourself, “What is the CRA framework?” be sure to go back and read this post. What is the CRA? I like this definition […]

The post Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Let’s discuss strategies for teaching math concepts using the CRA framework. Remember that the CRA framework has proven to help students grasp difficult math concepts. If you are scratching your head asking yourself, “What is the CRA framework?” be sure to go back and read this post.

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the CRA?

I like this definition best. “The CRA is a three-stage learning process where students learn through physical manipulation of concrete objects, followed by learning through pictorial representations of the concrete manipulations, and ending with solving problems using abstract notation.”

ROUTINES AND PROCEDURES

How do we set students up for success when using manipulatives? 

  • Tell students the purpose of using manipulatives. Explain how it is foundational to their success in math and how it is something you want to be able to trust your students with. 
  • Tell students WHAT TO DO. Telling students what to do is better than telling them what not to do. Example: manipulatives stay on the dry erase mat versus don’t throw manipulatives.
  • Have students clear their desks of computers, binders, or anything else that can obscure your view of how the manipulatives are being used.
  • Assign a materials manager as a group role. This student is responsible for making sure their group is using the manipulatives correctly and that they all get returned.
  • Build in time for cleanup! If you are using manipulatives or any extra type of supply, give yourself lots of extra cushion at the end of class for clean up. Make sure to use a timer to encourage speed. 
  • If you want to minimize the number of manipulatives out at a time or you don’t have a whole class set of manipulatives, use a station or small group table for the manipulatives. This will narrow down the materials to manage to one area of the classroom and a smaller set of students.
  • Remember, the more practice students have using manipulatives, the better they will get at cleanup and using them responsibly.

BEST PRACTICE #1: LET STUDENTS EXPLORE

There are 2 things you will have to balance as you model for students – the conceptual understanding piece with the procedures of using the manipulatives, but also I would encourage adequate exploration time. Exploration time can be really meaningful if you have strong and planned questions to guide your students’ thinking. 

In this post, I wrote about not taking opportunities away from students to think. Sometimes demonstrating exactly what to do removes any of the thinking for students. It makes them follow a procedure to the T, which doesn’t allow for flexibility in their thinking. 

Here is an example of how you can give students time to grapple with the content without modeling exactly what to do for them.

Let’s consider adding integers. Conceptually, students will need to understand that one side of the counter and its color represents negative and the other side represents positive. Students will also need to understand negative and positive numbers value in relation to zero. Perhaps, students can discover zero pairs without your explanation?

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now this will not always work with more complex situations, but I think with proper scaffolding and questioning, you should give students the opportunity to try something before showing them the exact procedure for working with the concrete representations.

BEST PRACTICE #2: Pair Manipulatives and Representations with the Abstract

“Explicit instruction that involves the use of manipulatives should also include the presentation of the numerical problem (Miller, Stringfellow, Kaffar, Ferreira, & Mancl, 2011).”

This study makes a great point. Students need to connect the manipulatives to the abstract as they are working, which means as they are working with the manipulatives, they need to be writing down what they are doing as they solve.

For example, when a student is using algebra tiles, connecting that the physical removal of two tiles from each side of the equation is the same thing as writing down “-2” on both sides of the equal sign will build that deeper understanding. We want students to understand WHY they are doing something.

Be sure to grab our freebies for Getting Started with Algebra Tiles.

The best part of the CRA method is how students will internalize the process. Some students will arrive at the abstract and never look back. Other students will draw models to support their thinking, while some students will request using a set of manipulatives well after you have taught the algorithm. That is the beauty!

Continue to spiral these concepts throughout the year using the different parts of the framework. If you go over the concrete and the representational on one day and then spend the entire year using the abstract to solve equations, then chances are your students will do the same thing too. 

WHEN AM I GOING TO HAVE TIME TO DO THIS?

If you are already feeling very stretched with your scope and sequence, here are my thoughts: 

Many times our scope and sequences allow some time for reteaching when the students do not master the concepts. Consider that by spending time building the conceptual understanding using concrete and pictorial representations, that you may not need the extra time for reteaching.

You can teach the concept in tandem using the manipulatives. If you are already going to spend time teaching math, you may as well introduce tools that will support student understanding. 

“Students who use concrete materials develop more precise and more comprehensive mental representation, often show more motivation and on task behavior, understand mathematical ideas, and better apply these ideas to life situations.” 

“Students are more apt to gain and retain an understanding of math concepts when they are taught using CRA.” 

These two quotes from this study are the positives seem to outweigh the negative of being a little bit behind. Developing these foundational skills will only benefit students in the long run.

What are your strategies for teaching math concepts?

Using manipulatives & models is one of my my favorite strategies for teaching math concepts. Take these strategies to your classroom using these best practices. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Strategies for Teaching Math Concepts appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/#comments Tue, 18 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4257 The CRA framework is an instructional strategy that stands for concrete, representational, and abstract; it is critical to helping students move through their learning of math concepts.  To fully understand the idea behind CRA, or concrete representational abstract, think about a small child learning to count. They may learn counting to 10 by memorizing a […]

The post Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

The CRA framework is an instructional strategy that stands for concrete, representational, and abstract; it is critical to helping students move through their learning of math concepts. 

To fully understand the idea behind CRA, or concrete representational abstract, think about a small child learning to count. They may learn counting to 10 by memorizing a song. Then, these numbers are used to teach them to count. First, they may be counting blocks by pointing or moving the object. Then, they may be able to count dots on a page or something on paper that represents that same concept. Lastly, they may be able to then look at a picture with five dots and not need to count it, they have learned what five “looks like”. This process takes place with all different math concepts and new learning.

Looking for more math intervention ideas?

This is part 3 of our Instructional Design series. We’ve covered how to unpack math standards and how to use questions to push students to think more critically. Make sure to grab our lesson planning freebie down below!

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is the concrete representational abstract framework?

The CRA framework helps us to present this learning in a specific method to help tie all the connections together. There have been numerous studies measuring the effect of using the concrete representational abstract (CRA) sequence for students at risk of failure. You can read more here, here, and here

This teaching method breaks down the concept (examples: multiplication, subtraction with regrouping, subtracting integers) in a methodical process in which students move from one phase to the next.  

Sometimes CRA is referenced as a sequence, so moving from one phase of understanding to the next. But more so, it is called a framework, which shows that all three of the representations can be used simultaneously. If we were teaching solving equations, students would actually use the algebra tiles, draw a picture of the model, and then write it mathematically at the same time.

Concrete

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When students have a concrete understanding of a mathematical concept, they are utilizing manipulatives to demonstrate the math.  For example, when my son was learning to count, I wanted him to physically touch or move the items he was counting. In doing this, he was developing one-to-one correspondence.  He was internalizing that each item represents one.

When our middle school students are learning to solve equations, we want them using algebra tiles to physically remove manipulatives from both sides of the equation.  This allows students to internalize that an equation must remain balanced.

There are many reasons why teachers might skip this crucial step:

  • Practice with concrete manipulatives takes time and energy. It is not easy to facilitate with 30+ students.  
  • It can be expensive to purchase manipulatives.
  • It can be frustrating for students who seem to already grasp the concept.  

Why it is beneficial:

  • Students are using their kinesthetic learning style.
  • Students are engaging with the content in a deeper way, and abstract concepts like “isolating the variable” are given meaning.
  • This foundation is formidable so that they can move to conceptual understanding and aren’t just following a list of steps with no meaning.
  • Research shows that it is essential for students who have a shaky math foundation.

Representational

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The representational part of the framework refers to students drawing a representation of those concrete materials. 

In the case of my son above, that would be counting dots on a page or drawing eight tally marks to represent the number 8.  

In the case of our middle schoolers and solving equations, this would look like drawing the algebra tiles, creating a key, and demonstrating how the process works by crossing off the tiles or grouping as they solve.  

We see this quite a bit in middle school.  From integer counters being sketched to a graph that represents a linear relationship, our standards include many representational aspects. 

Why We Might Start Here:

  • This is a little easier to execute in a classroom full of students.
  • The standards include the representational language. 
  • It also leaves some gaps for students who need to understand why you are crossing out the positive integer circles.
Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Abstract

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Math can be a very abstract subject.  When you think about solving an equation and finding the value of x, why are we doing this?  Why do we need to know this? The value of x is abstract. It is always changing. It doesn’t actually mean anything without context.

I think this is where it is really difficult for students who struggle.  When we don’t provide a context for learning and for the application of the abstract, it just seems too confusing.  I think it also warrants the phrase, “I don’t get it.” Many times students don’t even know what to ask because the content means nothing to them.

This is when math becomes too procedural and you risk students understanding the process, going through the motions, and yet lacking number sense.  When I was a student, I was taught solely in the abstract. It wasn’t until I was a teacher trying to make sense of models before I had several AHA! moments. Why didn’t I learn this when I was in school??

Best Practices

Shelley Grey says, “When you teach a math lesson, make it your goal to incorporate concrete, representational and abstract into the same lesson. This way you can be certain that you are differentiating for all your students, regardless of where they are in their understanding.

And it does naturally lend to differentiation — you are scaffolding, using different parts of the brain, and then eventually allowing students to work with a method they feel comfortable with. 

You as the teacher can make sure to use different methods when you are tackling problems. Just because you taught the algorithm for multiplying fractions already doesn’t mean you can’t draw a model to solve at a later date. This ensures that students don’t forget how to use the models themselves.

How do you teach difficult math concepts?

The concrete representational abstract sequence (CRA) helps fill in gaps, teach difficult math concepts, & build a strong math foundation. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Concrete Representational Abstract Sequence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/difficult-math-concepts/feed/ 1
Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/higher-level-thinking-with-blooms-taxonomy/ Tue, 11 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=43682 Higher level thinking is a goal for many teachers. Students retain knowledge when they have thought deeply about it. And in order to get our students to think at a deeper level, we have to be asking questions that require them to access those parts of the brain.  Encouraging higher level thinking is so interconnected […]

The post Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Higher level thinking is a goal for many teachers. Students retain knowledge when they have thought deeply about it. And in order to get our students to think at a deeper level, we have to be asking questions that require them to access those parts of the brain. 

Encouraging higher level thinking is so interconnected to your classroom culture, the rigor of your content, and then of course the types of questions you are asking. Then we get into the challenges of collecting your students’ thinking – are they answering verbally or on paper? Can you give feedback quickly? 

It makes sense that would be the case. If the whole entire goal of education is to provoke thought, then of course there would be so many facets of instruction connected to it. 

This post is part 2 in our Instructional Design Series. Check out Unpacking Math Standards and the CRA framework. And if you haven’t grabbed our lesson planning template yet, make sure to grab it down below.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

THE PROBLEM

The purpose of questioning in our classrooms:

  1. Questions give us feedback on what and how our students are processing and internalizing their learning.
  2. Questions also can be used to guide student thinking. 

If you are asking questions throughout class and then students are struggling on the assessment, it’s possible that your questions in class are not aligned to that which a student is expected to do on the assessment.

Peter Lijedahl touches on this a bit in his book Building Thinking Classrooms, where he talks about “studenting”. Doing behaviors that look productive, “filling in notes or mimicking the teacher” but they aren’t actually reasoning their way through the problem.

We can make some small adjustments to the questions and interactions in our classroom to build those thinking muscles. 

Building a Strong Classroom Culture

For students to think and answer questions at a higher level, we want students to be comfortable with making mistakes. 

Phil Daro (co-author of the CCSS) says that teachers put too much emphasis on the answers; answers are part of the process, but they are not the only learning outcome. That wrong answers are part of the learning outcome. 

What if you framed wrong “answers” as “discoveries”? If students reached a wrong answer, you instead talked more about why that approach doesn’t work instead of how to get the right answer.

The Questions You Are Asking

If we are focusing on higher level thinking using higher level questions, we have to focus on the types of questions we are asking. 

To do this, I am going to refer to Bloom’s Taxonomy which is a hierarchy of learning objectives that rank lower order thinking skills to higher order thinking skills. 

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Now remember this is a pyramid, so those lower levels have a purpose and provide a foundation. These are the easy questions to ask, the ones that just roll off the tongue and don’t really require much forethought.

In math it sounds like – “What do we do next?” “What is the solution?” “What operation will we use?”

The higher level thinking questions are those that take a little more forethought and planning. These are the questions that require students to analyze the relationships in a process or make an evaluation on how to approach the problem based on given information.


One of the easiest ways to elicit higher level thinking is to teach students multiple approaches to a specific concept and then have students evaluate and justify why one process may be better than another based on given information.

Let’s try a non-example in a typically procedural type of skill – solving equations. 

Teacher: 4x-2=18 What do we need to do first?

Student: Add two to both sides.  [Teacher adds 2 to both sides]

Teacher: 4x=20 And what do we do next?

And here is a way to teach the same problem using a mix of higher and lower order thinking skills.

This is where I would make a plug to use algebra tiles for this concept because students can visualize and explore how solving equations actually works with concrete models. When students move to the algorithm, their responses will be richer because the abstract is now concrete. 

Not every skill or concept warrants a question in the highest order of Bloom’s Taxonomy. As you scaffold instruction, the types of questions you ask in Bloom’s hierarchy will move up. 

You can find many question stems for math with a simple google search, so I took a problem from a He Said, She Said Activity from our Proportional Relationships bundle.

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Wait Time & Eliciting Answers

In my fifth year of teaching, our campus read the book Quality Questions which helped me to learn about the technical term of “wait time” and that there were different wait times. 

Wait time is the amount of time we sit in silence after a question has been posed. Then, there is actually a second wait timere which is the amount of time that you wait after a student responds. 

The idea behind wait time is that we are giving time for students to think and that as soon as we accept an answer or acknowledge that the answer is correct, then everyone else stops thinking.

Here are a few ideas to incorporate this into your classroom:

  1. This can be that they have to write something down, show a finger for a multiple choice response, or they share their answer with a partner while you circulate.
  2. I like to give students a little bit of heads up if I want them to share, known as “warm calling”.  You ask a question, give a minute of silent think time, ask students to share with their partner, and then circulate. I listen to things I want the whole class to hear. If I hear a great response from a student, I let them know that I would like for them to share, so they aren’t caught off guard. Then when we come back together as a class, I have that student respond. 
  3. You can do a fist to five. Typically, fist to 5s are used at the end of the lesson for students to gauge how well they feel about the lesson on a scale from 0 (did not understand) to 5 (completely understand). In the case of answering a question, you can require all students to show their fist to five to assess how well they think they can answer the question. It actually gives you some information – which students are completely lost, which students are ok, and which students think they have exemplary responses. I would call on a mixture of 4 and 5s while making sure my fist and 1 students are listening in. Then I will go back to a fist or 1 student and ask for them to put the response in their own words. 

Note: I didn’t do this for every single question I asked. Who has the time? I reserved these techniques 2-3 times a lesson for questions that warranted more time and thought.

Two Quick Hits

This first idea comes straight from Building Thinking Classrooms. Before you model a skill, first give students the problem and ask for them to try it on their own. Give them just enough background knowledge to get them started. 

You can do this for many math skills. Estimating square roots, operations with rational numbers, geometry skills, solving equations. It doesn’t have to be done daily, and use your discretion for when this approach may not benefit students. 

My second quick hit is something that I picked up in a training that made a huge difference in how I ended my lessons.  I adjusted my language from, “Are there any questions?” to “What questions might someone have about what we learned today?” 

  • The former resulted in silence. And made me think as a teacher that I was good to go. 
  • The latter resulted in students trying to think of something that wasn’t covered. In addition, students who may not want to admit that they have a question or don’t understand something, would be more willing to inquire. 

How do you incorporate higher level thinking in your teaching?

Pushing students to think critically is a challenge that requires teachers to ask the right questions to elicit that higher level thinking. Find out how to do this in your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Higher Level Thinking with Bloom’s Taxonomy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/#comments Tue, 04 Jan 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=43631 Unpacking math standards helps teachers build the foundation for what content they are teaching to students. Subsequently, unpacking math standards provides a framework to create actionable lessons. Essentially, unpacking math standards helps us answer these two questions: What are students learning? How will they learn it? This is part 1 of our Instructional Design series. […]

The post Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Unpacking math standards helps teachers build the foundation for what content they are teaching to students. Subsequently, unpacking math standards provides a framework to create actionable lessons. Essentially, unpacking math standards helps us answer these two questions:

  1. What are students learning?
  2. How will they learn it?

This is part 1 of our Instructional Design series. Come back to read more about higher level thinking and the CRA framework. And make sure to grab our free lesson planning template down below!

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

WHY DO WE LESSON PLAN?

Much like creating a to-do list to alleviate the mental load of upcoming deadlines, lesson planning keeps all of our thinking about a topic or skill in one place where it can be shared, referenced, and revised. 

When we are prepared intellectually to deliver a lesson, we allow for real-time adjustments and instruction to the depth the standards require. In addition, the physical plan allows a space for collaboration and feedback.

Not ready to lesson plan quite yet? Need the bigger picture?

Grab our FREE Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Pacing Guides.

MISCONCEPTIONS ABOUT MATH STANDARDS

  • Standards do not need to be taught sequentially or in isolation. They do need to be organized with purpose though!
  • Standards are not so rigid that there is only one way for them to be taught. 
  • Standards are not to be interpreted in a vacuum. The more math teachers you can have in the process, the more likely you will have a full picture of the scope of the standard.

HOW TO UNPACK MATH STANDARDS

Let’s talk about how we go about unpacking math standards using a 6th grade TEKS standard

  • 6.7D: generate equivalent expressions using the properties of operations: inverse, identity, commutative, associative, and distributive properties
  • This comes from the strand 6.7 “The student applies mathematical process standards to develop concepts of expressions and equations”
  • There is a related standard that asks students to determine if two expressions are equivalent using concrete models, pictorial models, and algebraic representations. (6.7C) 
  • This is helpful because I can support my instruction of that initial standard with concrete and pictorial models. It gives me more information about how I can teach it.
Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Step 2 – Create a T chart listing the knows and the dos 

  • The Dos are the verbs. What the student is expected to do.
  • Examples include: apply, solve problems, represent, determine, calculate, predict, write, model, compare, convert, and describe. 
  • Make sure that whatever the student is doing in class is the same as the verb in the standard or that the lesson will eventually support it.
  • It is crucial to understand what the verb means. Oxford dictionary defines generate (in the math context) as producing (a set or sequence of items) by performing specified mathematical or logical operations on an initial set. The lesson should be focused on the student creating equivalent forms of the expression using the properties.
  • The Knows are the content. The knowledge that the student must have to execute the verb.  Typically, this is going to come from the nouns. So in our case, students will need to know how all of the properties function in order to generate equivalent expressions. 
  • One other best practice to unpacking math standards is to determine if the standard is more conceptual, procedural, or application. If the standard is very procedure heavy, I am going to want to make sure that there is some conceptual understanding introduced and application type of problems too. We want our lessons to be well rounded.
  • If you have done this and are still unsure what the standard means, then I recommend looking at a state test question to see how the standard is assessed. 

Step 3 – Look at the vertical alignment

Texas teachers, grab yours here. I like to read the math standards that are connected from the previous year to see what my students should know already or more likely, what I will need to refresh them on before they can be successful with the new standard. 

Step 4 – Write a learning target or lesson objective

Lesson objectives should be measurable and they should be student friendly. Different schools follow different guidelines – your school might use “I CAN statements” or “student will be able to” language. My preference is below:

Remember that whatever question, problem, or activity your students are completing, it should support your learning target or objective.

Step 5 – Write Big Ideas and Essential Questions

Big ideas are the concepts that transcend your unit and connect the content to their real lives and make it relevant. Perhaps students won’t walk away from your data and statistics unit remembering exactly how to find the median, but they will take the big idea that data can be represented graphically in order to solve problems and draw conclusions. 

Essential questions support your unit’s big ideas. These are recurring questions that can be asked all unit long that are designed for students to have that lightbulb moment. They allow open ended discussion from your students and to stretch the thinking of your students. Use them at the beginning of your unit to pique student interest and/or at the end of the unit to summarize or synthesize their learning over the last few weeks. 

How do you unpack math standards? What is your lesson planning process?

Unpacking math standards is necessary to understand what students need to learn,  how they will learn it, and to writing your daily lessons. Find out how we do it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Unpacking Math Standards When Lesson Planning appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-unpack-math-standards/feed/ 1
Essential Math Manipulatives https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-manipulatives/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-manipulatives/#comments Tue, 02 Nov 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=5551 Math manipulatives are some of the best ways to introduce a new mathematical concept and are the foundation of the C-R-A. They help to form a solid mathematical foundation as students move from concrete understanding to representational to abstract.  By providing the opportunity to concretely work with the manipulatives, students are able to develop a […]

The post Essential Math Manipulatives appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Math manipulatives are some of the best ways to introduce a new mathematical concept and are the foundation of the C-R-A. They help to form a solid mathematical foundation as students move from concrete understanding to representational to abstract.  By providing the opportunity to concretely work with the manipulatives, students are able to develop a conceptual understanding rather than just memorizing procedures. Today, I want to share what I consider essential math manipulatives.

Our list of essential math manipulatives to teach concrete understanding with a hands-on approach! Plus, ideas for how to incorporate them into your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

MUST-HAVE FOR MATH

Two-Color Counters:

Math you will use them for: integer operations, dots as a real-life dot plot, probability experiments, and stacking to model the volume of cylinder

Budget solution: Buy two colors of sticky foam (you can get at Hobby Lobby, glue them together and cut into tiny squares. They do not have to be circles for most applications.

Individual number lines:

Math you will use them for: modeling integer operations, ordering numbers, inequalities

Budget solution: Grab our vertical number line freebie, print and laminate. The set I bought from Amazon lasted about 5 years. I hole-punched each one and stored them on a small hook at my small group table. 

Algebra tiles:

Math you will use them for: Algebra tiles are a lot like two-color counters; in that they can be used time and time again.  Solving equations is the first thing that comes to mind, but also consider using them when teaching properties of operations, specifically the distributive property, and even when incorporating the area model. 

Budget solution: Again, I think purchasing some foam, putting on some Netflix and cutting for a few hours can save you money.

3D shapes:

I firmly believe that 3D shapes are a necessity!  If I could manufacture my own, I would make them about 18 inches tall.  Sure, there are online models, but it is really nice when students can physically touch all the faces, vertices, edges, etc.  If you are on a budget, just bring some from home! 

Budget solution: Bring items from home. An oatmeal container is your cylinder, a rubix cube is your cube, a tissue box is your rectangular prism, an ice cream cone is your cone.

NICE TO HAVE MATH MANIPULATIVES

XY coordinate pegboard:

This might be my new favorite!  I am not sure how long they have been around, but they are new to me.  These are excellent for making slope more concrete and for comparing graphs.  Beware that the pegs are included, but rubber bands are not…maybe that was intentional.  🙂 

AngLegs:  

Another really cool and new(er) math manipulative to help students understand triangles and all the different angles involved.  This sure beats the string and three points. 

Geo Reflectors and Patty Paper:  

An oldie-but-goodie manipulative!  The Geo Reflectors are awesome for reflections, and the patty paper makes translations a bit more tangible.  

If you are working in small groups the great news is that you don’t need a class set of each of these.  Of course that is nice, but with school budgets what they are, you can totally get away with a small quantity that you add to over time.  

Fraction bars or circles:

I personally prefer the bars, but the circles are fine, too.  These make so much sense when learning about equivalent fractions, how to rename fractions, and how to simplify fractions.  Once students are really good with the models, it makes the connection to the algorithm so much easier! 

Pattern blocks:

I would love to know how you incorporate pattern blocks!  My friend, Brittany from Mix and Math, demonstrated how she uses them with multiplying fractions, and my mind was blown!  Amazing! 

Dice:

Dice obviously are super helpful with probability, but I also love how they can generate various numbers and you can then do things with the numbers.  One day, students were in partners, each one rolling die to create fractions. From there they would simplify the fraction or rename it. Easy, quick, hands-on practice! 

Spinners:

Perfect for probability, data, and statistics.  If you don’t own physical spinners, consider using this site to utilize digital ones on a device. 

NOT MATH SPECIFIC BUT HIGHLY RECOMMEND

While I believe that manipulatives are amazing and make math come alive, I would be remiss to not include things I used in my classroom daily to either aid using the manipulatives or just to make math more hands-on.

Dry-erase pockets, Small Whiteboards, Dry erase markers  

These dry erase pockets (or whiteboards) are perfect to spice up the typical paper and pencil practice.  Plus, you save on paper! Win-win!

For students, I recommend using the skinny expo markers. Students write big, so the skinny point helps them use their writing space efficiently. They are smaller, which makes them easier to store and basically impossible to flip. 

Colored card stock:  

Make your task cards or anything else you don’t want to print off year after year by laminating. Also, an MTM user recently shared that her and a few members on her team worked together to print and laminate every single activity. They put it all in a large tub and they work together to share it throughout the math department. Talk about teamwork!

STICKY NOTES:

Another handy and easily accessible office supply that can be used in the math classroom!  We have a list of 15 ways to use sticky notes for math practice here.

BUTCHER PAPER:

This is probably available for free in the workroom.  It is nice to have for students to work together on large pieces of paper! An easy way to make any boring worksheet interactive is to cover tables with butcher paper, provide markers, and give students problems to work with.

WAYS TO PAY

Manipulatives are not cheap. Take into consideration that you may need 30+ sets of something and it can really add up. Here are some suggestions:

  1. Buy a set for just you or your small group before you commit to a class set
  2. Create an Amazon wishlist and share on FB or with parents. One thing I have realized is if parents don’t realize there is a need, they can’t help! If your school has a PTA, ask if they can cover the cost. 
  3. Donor’s Choose
  4. Ask around! My fellow 5th grade teacher had collected many manipulatives since she had been teaching about 10 years longer than me. She was always happy to share when I asked. Maybe you will discover an old closet filled with items you can use.

What other math manipulatives do you consider essential? 

Our list of essential math manipulatives to teach concrete understanding with a hands-on approach! Plus, ideas for how to incorporate them into your classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Essential Math Manipulatives appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-manipulatives/feed/ 5
Getting Started with Math Stations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/getting-started-with-math-stations/ Tue, 19 Oct 2021 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=40292 Math Stations, when done correctly, can solve many classroom challenges. Math stations can meet the needs of various learners, provide practice on spiraled concepts, and it puts the responsibility of learning on the students. Seems like a win-win! In addition, technology has made personalized learning easier than ever! You may be eager to try math […]

The post Getting Started with Math Stations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Math Stations, when done correctly, can solve many classroom challenges. Math stations can meet the needs of various learners, provide practice on spiraled concepts, and it puts the responsibility of learning on the students. Seems like a win-win! In addition, technology has made personalized learning easier than ever!

You may be eager to try math stations (or math centers), but are unsure of where to start. Hopefully this post will give you a little confidence to try them out.

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

Stations Wouldn’t Work in My Classroom

If you just thought those words to yourself, then let’s get all of the roadblocks to stations out and in the open:

  • You may not think you have the bandwidth to create or find multiple activities for a single lessons
  • Your class periods are too short
  • Your students will be off task
  • You don’t have the space or your class sizes are too big
  • You might not know where to even begin – how do I start this? 

Starting Small with Math Stations

In that case, I will remind you to start small. No teacher should commit to an entirely new approach to teaching without dipping their toes in the water first.

Small Groups: Start with just pulling a small group while the rest of the class works on something else. Get used to the practice of using data to lead small group instruction or intervention to students who need additional support. Not sure where to start with small groups? This post and this post are great places to start.

Weekly Stations: Introduce stations as a once a week activity for the entire class period. For example, every Friday is Station Friday. On that day, students get to practice what they learned that week with stations. Whether you have 40 or 90 minute class periods, students can work on what they learned from Monday to Thursday. Station 1 is Monday’s skill, Station 2 is Tuesday’s skill and so on. You can make your small group one of your stations that every student visits, or pull specific students for small groups while they are participating in stations.

Keep Transitions Easy: Students don’t have to actually move. If students out of their seats or managing a transition sounds overwhelming, then perhaps, the tub or folder rotates instead. 

Keep the Station Group Small: Maybe you have 30 students but only 3 activities for stations. Ten kids in a station will not work, right? Well, you can always have 6 stations with repeated activities. You get to keep the groups small but not double the amount of work to plan. 

Once you and your students are more comfortable with the processes put in place, you can consider these ideas.

Framework for Stations

The framework of M.A.T.H. is a great jumping point for a math teacher. It’s memorable for both students and teachers.  

  • M – Meet the Teacher
  • A – At your Desk or Assignment
  • T – Technology
  • H – Hands On

You may be familiar with student choice boards or playlists that would work in a station setting. In fact, one of our MTM teachers reached out this morning and shared her playlist using our All Access videos and MTM materials. It was phenomenal to see her utilize the All Access resources and allow her to provide small group instruction and support.

Best Practices for Math Stations

  • Visuals and timers are your friend! Set a big, loud timer that all students can see and hear to keep everyone on track. 
  • If you are having students move, practice! Set a timer for one minute and set high expectations for how you want this done. 
  • Simplify your groupings at first. Groups can be homogeneous or heterogeneous learners. The groups can stay the same for an entire unit or few months. Since I had tables, my groups were their table groups. On the other hand, I am reading Building Thinking Classrooms, and the author, Peter Liljedahl, encourages teachers to group students randomly.
  • Change it up, but also keep the routine. For example, there is always a tech station, but what program they use changes each week.
  • Have a plan for students needing help or checking their answers. If necessary, provide students with something self-checking or an answer key that they can look at. Maybe they input their solutions into a Form or scan a QR code to check their work. 
  • Think about the amount of time it will take to complete the activities and try to make them equal or longer than the length of the station. What you don’t want is one station that takes 5 minutes and another station that takes 20 minutes to complete. 
  • The Maneuvering the Middle activities that best lend themselves to stations are: card sorts or card matches, She Said He Said, Find It Fix It, a Maze or a Puzzle Train. You can find our activity bundles here.

All of our hands-on activities, digital activities, student video library, and standards-based curriculum are included in All Access. Implementing Math Stations is attainable when you aren’t creating all of the materials from scratch!

Have you started implementing math stations in your classroom?

Math Stations can solve many classroom challenges! Start small by implementing math stations using our best tips. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

The post Getting Started with Math Stations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Should Teachers Assign Homework? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/should-teachers-assign-homework/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 11:30:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=39166 Should teachers assign homework? Should you assign homework to your students? The answer to that question is dependent on a variety of factors, so let’s dive in.  LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY What is the purpose of homework? What is your purpose behind assigning homework? Here is a quick brainstorm of how you might […]

The post Should Teachers Assign Homework? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Should teachers assign homework? Should you assign homework to your students? The answer to that question is dependent on a variety of factors, so let’s dive in. 

Should you assign homework? We share academic and emotional pros and cons for students and the best practices for assigning homework. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

What is the purpose of homework?

What is your purpose behind assigning homework? Here is a quick brainstorm of how you might answer this question:

  • Homework is required.
  • I need a specific number of grades.
  • Students need to practice.
  • You believe homework builds a habit of responsibility.

The next question to ask yourself is: “Is my current situation working well?” For example, if you assign homework daily and only 50% of students complete it, then you may need to reevaluate. 

Academic Pros of Homework

Homework has many benefits. Even as a student, I remember working on my math homework, and having some aha! moments. Many teachers depend on homework because their class periods are so short. Homework allows for students to practice what they learned in class when class time doesn’t allow for it.

Flipped classrooms depend on students watching videos at home. While they aren’t working problems independently, they are still learning at home. This allows them to do the majority of their work in class, removing the barrier of trying to practice something you don’t understand with no assistance.

Lastly, our brain is a muscle that does grow as we continue to use it. If learning an instrument or playing a sport requires practice, then so does math. 

Social-Emotional Pros of Homework

Homework isn’t just about knowledge. Homework can build a variety of other valuable habits – responsibility, ownership of their learning, and time management. 

If my students weren’t taking class work seriously, all I had to say was, “Whatever isn’t completed in class will be homework,” and students QUICKLY got back on track. Incentivizing students to use their time wisely in class can help students stay on task. 

Lastly, in some cases, homework allows parents to see what their kids are learning and their child’s academic strengths/weaknesses. In years that I didn’t assign homework (when I had 90 minute classes), parents reached out often to ask what students were working on since they never saw homework. 

Academic Cons of Homework

You probably don’t need me to list them because you already know! All those amazing homework pros that were listed above become moot if students don’t actually do it. Homework isn’t actually practice or an indicator of what students know because it can be copied from a friend or apps like Photomath make it super easy to cheat. 

Not to mention, some students would rather just take a zero than complete the work, so now you have missing grades to deal with. And for the students who do complete their homework with fidelity, well, they can be practicing it incorrectly without immediate feedback. Which is why I highly recommend something that is self-checking like a riddle or mixed answer key.

Social Emotional Cons of Homework

While research shows that there is a correlation between completing homework and academic success, it does not show that students do better because they do their homework. Cathy Vatterott, an education professor at the University of Missouri-St. Louis, stated “Correlation is not causation. Does homework cause achievement, or do high achievers do more homework?”

Some parents and teachers argue that students have already spent 8+ hours at school. Students benefit from resting, playing, and spending time with their families. The whole child should be considered. 

Assign Homework, but Do It Purposefully

According to this recommendation, homework should follow the 10 minute rule.  Multiply the grade level you teach by 10 and that is how many total minutes a student should have of homework of all subjects for one night. If you teach 6th grade, students should have 60 total minutes of homework a night. 

With this recommendation in mind, you have to consider the varying abilities of your students. A 10 question assignment may take one student 10 minutes to complete while it may take another student 1 hour to complete.

Which leads to my next point, it has to meet students’ needs.  Online math homework, which can be designed to adapt to students’ levels of understanding, can significantly boost test scores according to this study

These 5 questions from Edutopia give a great framework to help guide what type of homework you assign to your students. 

  1. How long will it take to complete?
  2. Have all learners been considered?
  3. Will an assignment encourage future success?
  4. Will an assignment place material in a context the classroom cannot?
  5. Does an assignment offer support when a teacher is not there?

If you decide that homework is beneficial to your students, here are 5 best practices for implementation:

  1. Give less homework more frequently
  2. Ensure that students are practicing what they just learned
  3. Provide feedback as quickly as possible
  4. Explain to students the purpose of homework and how it will be evaluated

If you need Independent Practice (whether that is homework or in class practice), All Access has you covered! Each lesson comes with an aligned Independent Practice.


Many middle schools specifically are moving towards a model (or already have) that allows for a tutorial or advisory period. Utilize that time period and teach students to do the same. 

Hopefully, some of these thoughts will help you to weigh your options and come to a conclusion that meets both your students’ needs and your philosophy and approach to teaching. Let us know in the comments – do you assign homework?

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

Should you assign homework? We share academic and emotional pros and cons for students and the best practices for assigning homework. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Should Teachers Assign Homework? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What is All Access Math Curriculum? https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/#comments Tue, 13 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=28973 We are so excited to announce the launch of our All Access membership community for middle school math and algebra 1 teachers! Our math curriculum is receiving some fun changes! LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY Some Context Our MTM team worked hard to create resources that would be helpful for teachers and students when […]

The post What is All Access Math Curriculum? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

We are so excited to announce the launch of our All Access membership community for middle school math and algebra 1 teachers! Our math curriculum is receiving some fun changes!

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST | SPOTIFY

We are excited to launch our all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers: All Access Math Curriculum. Find out what it is here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some Context

Our MTM team worked hard to create resources that would be helpful for teachers and students when the education world changed in an instant.

  • In the immediate shutdown, we put together 13 free videos for any math teacher to use in their classroom. Thousands of teachers used these videos. 🙂
  • We then created additional videos and practice pages that we thought would be useful in a pinch. 
  • Then, last fall we worked to transition many of our paper-based activities into activities that could be used digitally. 

However, we knew that we wanted to be able to offer something all-inclusive.

Teachers Don’t Need to do it all

Let’s disregard the myth that teachers have to do (and be excellent at) everything in order to be considered a great teacher. There are so many different facets of teaching (organizing, planning, execution, relationship building, and at least 100 more); it is unrealistic to think that a teacher should be excellent in all of them. 

What if you could be the best teacher you can be and make an impact on students because your energy is focused on execution, intervention, and student relationships?  Not constantly lesson planning and spinning your wheels trying to pull parts of a lesson from various websites and textbooks.

What is All Access?

That is where we want to help! What exactly is All Access

All Access is an all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers. We have resources for grades 6-Algebra 1 and one of the facets is our standards-based math curriculum. All Access is replacing the math curricula in our shop.

It is ready-to-go math resources with our new growing student video library! 

Let me break that down for you:

  • Ready-to-go math resources: that includes our units (guided notes, independent practice, and assessments), our hands-on collaborative activities — like scavenger hunts, task cards, our find it and fix it activities, all of those fun things, and our digital resources that are designed for use with Google Slides and PPT. 
  • New growing student video library: We are working on a comprehensive video library that will begin rolling out in September of 2021. I wish I could say they will roll out immediately but we really want feedback from you and want to take our time to get them right. We know that video lessons allow classrooms to be more flexible, create opportunities for teachers to flip their classrooms, and generally allow teachers to be in more than one place at a time – but who has time to create these on their own? Let us do it for you!
  • We will continue to expand our offerings based on your feedback.

i want to find out more

We would love to invite you to become a founding member of All Access! You can become a member by clicking here. We will drop in a video demo soon!

If you have questions, feel free to reach out to our MTM team by clicking here. Rachel will take care of you!

What if I already own the math curriculum? If you would like to give All Access a try, we are excited to offer all existing curriculum customers the opportunity to transition to MTM All Access for 50% off for the life of your membership. This discount will automatically apply in your cart. All you need to do is log in to your account and add the membership to your cart! If you choose to upgrade to All Grades, then the discount will vary based on the number of curricula you own.

We hope to see you in All Access and look forward to supporting you this year!

We are excited to launch our all-inclusive membership for middle school math teachers: All Access Math Curriculum. Find out what it is here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post What is All Access Math Curriculum? appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/what-is-all-access-math-curriculum/feed/ 2
Teaching the Real Number System https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-the-real-number-system/ Fri, 11 Jun 2021 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=27016 The real number system can really confuse students. I will admit, at times, I felt confused too! Let’s check out 4 strategies that will help you teach classifying real numbers, and will help your students master the concept. Vertical Alignment Before we jump to that, let’s take a look at the standard and how it […]

The post Teaching the Real Number System appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The real number system can really confuse students. I will admit, at times, I felt confused too! Let’s check out 4 strategies that will help you teach classifying real numbers, and will help your students master the concept.

Vertical Alignment

Before we jump to that, let’s take a look at the standard and how it progresses through middle school, and then take a look at some STAAR test question examples. I have highlighted some helpful pieces.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Real Number System Test Questions

Strategy #1 – Vocabulary

Vocabulary is crucial when teaching the real number system. Luckily, the content scaffolds by grade level.

  • 6th Grade: whole, integer, rational
  • 7th Grade: natural, whole, integer, rational
  • 8th Grade: natural, whole, integer, rational, irrational

Since the progression of standards is pretty clear, each subsequent year a student must learn one brand new word. Although the vocabulary is important, I think students need to see examples more than they need to memorize the exact definition. 

Bright idea! One way to push students’ learning is to ask them to come up with definitions based on observing numbers that have already been classified. Check out the example below.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Some thought provoking questions might be:

  • What differences do you see between the numbers inside integers and whole numbers? 
  • What is different about the fractions classified as whole numbers versus the fractions classified as rational numbers?

Strategy #2 – Visuals

Notice that in each grade level standard, the term “visual representation” is used. In addition, in each test question example, there is a venn diagram of sorts. This means that students will not be expected to classify a number in the real number system without a venn diagram present to guide them, so make sure you are modeling with one, and students are practicing with one.

Check out the one I made! Hint: Washi tape helps with straight lines.  If you use Post-it Notes, the anchor chart can be interactive and reused each class period.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students need to be taught how to use the venn diagram. Don’t assume (like me) that it is intuitive. I would start by using a similar venn diagram that is not related to math. You can steal this example if you would like. (Warning: You may be concerned about students’ geography if you use this example.) 

You can ask these types of questions:

  • If someone is from Texas, can you assume they are also from the United States?
  • If someone lives in Oklahoma, where would you place them on the diagram? 

If students are struggling to use the venn diagram to understand the relationships between sets of numbers, then try exposing them to the funnel example. Using the number 17: 17 would be dropped into the natural number funnel thus falling through the whole, integer, rational, and real number funnels. The number -17 would be dropped into the integer funnel and thus continue into rational and real numbers. Then you would explain that -17 is an integer, a rational number, and a real number, but you typically call numbers by the funnel that it is dropped in.

The classifying numbers in the real number system can be an engaging skill! Check out these 4 strategies for teaching the real number system this fall. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Strategy #3 – Simplify Before You Classify

I saw this idea on a Middle School Math Facebook group, and it is so clever and catchy! Teach students to simplify before they classify in the real number system. Fractions like 16/4 are a great example of this. If students are familiar with the definition of rational numbers, they may think, “16/4 must only be a rational number because rational numbers are numbers that can be written as fractions.” That student is technically right, 16/4 is rational, but that is not all. If you teach students to simplify before you classify, a student would simplify this to 4, thus changing its classification.

You see this with square roots too. Many irrational number definitions include the phrase “square roots,” so a student might incorrectly classify the square root of 100 as irrational. Simplify before you classify!

Strategy #4 – Make It Interactive

Since this skill requires very little computation, this is an opportunity to engage students in something hands-on. Here is what I have done:

  • Flyswatter Game (ideally after students have shown mastery, so they aren’t just swatting uncontrollably)
  • Card sort
  • Post-it Notes – have students write down a bunch of different types of numbers on individual Post-it Notes and then swap with a partner. Then they have to categorize the numbers from their partner.
  • Grab a 6th grade or 8th grade activity bundle that includes classifying the real number activities.

Classifying numbers in the real number system can be really engaging. It also would provide a math-win for some of my struggling students. How do you make classifying numbers engaging?

The post Teaching the Real Number System appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Dividing Fractions https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-dividing-fractions/ Tue, 27 Apr 2021 11:25:02 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=24474 Dividing fractions doesn’t have to be scary!  I was shocked to learn that this study determined that students’ knowledge of fractions and division uniquely predicts their achievement in high school years later. Make sure to grab your free how to teaching fraction division guide below Check out the player to hear the interview, or you […]

The post How to Teach Dividing Fractions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>


Dividing fractions doesn’t have to be scary!  I was shocked to learn that this study determined that students’ knowledge of fractions and division uniquely predicts their achievement in high school years later.

Make sure to grab your free how to teaching fraction division guide belowDividing fractions is more than just an algorithm. Learn about the different types of division & how to use models to visualize the process. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Check out the player to hear the interview, or you can read the transcript that has been edited for succinctness below.

Listen On: APPLE PODCAST  | Spotify

Who is our expert on fractions?

To connect with Brittany and learn more, you can follow her on Instagram @mixandmath or check out her website Mix and Math

Brittany Hege is a math educator who has worked with students and teachers in both upper elementary and middle grades. She holds a master’s degree in Elementary Mathematics Education and is passionate about helping teachers grow their understanding of the math they teach. Brittany believes in the power of experiencing math through hands-on work and uses her platform, Mix and Math, to equip upper elementary teachers with the knowledge, resources, and confidence to inspire a generation of empowered math learners.

Why are students and teachers fearful of fractions?

Similar to multiplication facts, fractions are where students decide if they love math or hate math. Typically, fractions are taught very procedurally. There are many rules and procedures to memorize, and when students struggle, they lose their confidence. 

Teachers carry their own learning experience with fractions into their teaching. Just like students, teachers can also fear fractions.  And if we have taught fractions, and the lesson bombed, it reinforces the idea that fractions are something to just get through. 

How do students overcome this fear of fractions?

It starts with teachers. Confidence in teaching a concept comes from understanding the concept. When teachers take the time to really understand fractions, it grows their confidence and then builds students’ understanding. 

Teachers have to make fractions concrete by making fractions hands-on.

  • What does this fraction actually mean?
  • What does it look like in real life?
  • How do we operate in a concrete way?

What is the progression of fractions in elementary school?

Fraction understanding begins in 3rd grade. In 4th grade, students start operating with fractions, but the standards focus on conceptual understanding, not the algorithm. In 5th grade, students should be able to understand fraction division and what it looks like in the real world. By 6th grade, students are expected to divide fractions by using the standard algorithm.Dividing fractions is more than just an algorithm. Learn about the different types of division & how to use models to visualize the process. | maneuveringthemiddle.comWhen students come into middle school with gaps in their knowledge of fractions, teachers typically drill and kill the procedures because they feel the urgency to fill the gaps so that they can move onto their grade-level content.

Why should we integrate models into our teaching?

Models help students visualize; models show what a fraction looks like and what the operation actually means. 

What does 2.5 times ¼ actually mean? If students don’t have context or hands-on experience, they don’t realize that this number sentence means two groups of ¼ and ½ of ¼. 

For a teacher who did not learn it that way, it can be intimidating. The best thing a teacher can do for their students is to grow their own content knowledge and to grow their own understanding.

We cannot change everything about the way we teach in one year.  Fractions would be a good place to start.  Get into a community like a Facebook Group and ask other teachers how they would teach it. 

What are the two different types of division?

The two types of division are fair share and measurement.

Fair share (or partitive) division means to divide an amount into a given number of groups, and we want to know how much is in each group.

Whole Number Example: I have $12, and I want to give 3 kids the same amount. How much money does each kid get?

Fraction division example: I have ¼ of a cookie and I want to share it with 2 friends. What fraction of the cookie does each friend get?

Measurement (or repeated subtraction) division means to divide evenly into groups of a given size.

Whole number example: I have $12, and I want to give each kid $4, how many kids can I give money to? 

Fraction division example: I have 2 cups of flour. Each cupcake requires ¼ cup of flour. How many cupcakes can I make? So we are measuring it out – ¼ cup and another ¼ cup and another until we reach 2 cups of flour. 

Measurement division is typically how we see fractions divided in middle school, but students may not understand that that is a division problem. Students also cannot determine if their answer is reasonable because they do not know the action behind it. In elementary, students learn that division makes numbers smaller, so it can be confusing to students when 2 divided by ¼ equals 8. 

DIVE DEEPER BY GRABBING YOUR HOW TO TEACH DIVIDING FRACTIONS FREEBIE

For a better viewing experience, please download the guide and open in Adobe Reader or Preview.

To connect with Brittany and learn more, you can follow her on Instagram @mixandmath or check out her website Mix and Math

Dividing fractions is more than just an algorithm. Learn about the different types of division & how to use models to visualize the process. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

How do you teach dividing fractions?

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

The post How to Teach Dividing Fractions appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Strategies to Build Middle School Number Sense https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-to-build-middle-school-number-sense/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-to-build-middle-school-number-sense/#comments Tue, 20 Apr 2021 11:30:58 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=24470 Number sense, specifically middle school number sense, is an intriguing topic in the world of education. As a math teacher, I was amazed at how some students would compute numbers in their head while others liked to work out problems by hand. Let’s break down what number sense is, how you can teach it, and […]

The post Strategies to Build Middle School Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Number sense, specifically middle school number sense, is an intriguing topic in the world of education. As a math teacher, I was amazed at how some students would compute numbers in their head while others liked to work out problems by hand. Let’s break down what number sense is, how you can teach it, and discuss 4 strategies to use with your students to develop this life-long skill. 

Number sense isn't just for elementary classes. Middle school number sense is crucial for students to develop into flexible problem solvers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST  | SPOTIFY

Books Mentioned on Good Morning Teacher: About Teaching Mathematics | Quality Questioning | Developing Numerical Fluency Understanding | Making Number Talks Matter

What is number sense?

Is number sense a skill that is taught or a skill that is innate to strong math students? Let’s think abstractly – are you a born leader? Or can you learn to be a leader? 

Number sense is the ability to be flexible and fluid with numbers.

  • As a young elementary math student, understanding that since 5 is half of 10, 50 must be half of 100. 
  • Being able to add 58 + 14 by breaking the 14 into 12 and 2, so that you are adding 60 + 12 quickly in your head.
  • It is understanding that if you have half of an object, and you take half of that, you naturally have a fourth of the original object.

Number sense is not rote memorization or the ability to navigate an algorithm quickly. 

Should I teach number sense?

Simply put – YES!

Number sense is another tool to add to our students’ problem-solving toolkit. At the end of the day, we are teaching students to think. We can build this number sense slowly over time by being intentional in our questioning and the way we model our thinking and strategies. 

4 strategies for building MIDDLE SCHOOL number sense

Model different methods

It is easy to model the method that you are most familiar with. I was hesitant to teach decimal multiplication using partial products or an area model; I was more familiar with the standard algorithm. Instead, I took the opportunity to teach multiple methods, and allowed students to work with the method that felt the most comfortable for them. It was interesting to see how the same student would use different methods depending on different factors. By teaching different methods, you are allowing middle school students to determine which method works best for the problem at hand thus strengthening their math reasoning. 

When I taught Algebra 1, one of my favorite units was on polynomials. As a student, I learned the acronym FOIL stood for…first, outside, inside, last…but I had no clue as a student what I was doing.  Then as a teacher, I learned to double distribute and how to use the box method (which is just an area model). 

Marilyn Burns says in her book, “When children think that there is one right way to compute, they focus on learning and applying it, rather than thinking about what makes sense for the numbers at hand.”

Discuss computing strategies

This method can fit inside any lesson. If you are covering division of fractions, you can ask students how many halves are in six wholes and to explain their thinking.  After a student responds with their process for solving, an additional questioning strategy would be to not acknowledge whether the student is correct or not, and ask for ANOTHER student who solved it differently to explain their thinking. Middle school number sense can be strengthened by not acknowledging what is correct right away, but by giving students ample time to share many different ways to solve. When students know that you are more interested in HOW you arrived at the answer than whether the answer is right, they will think more creatively about ways to solve.

Utilize friendly numbers and estimation

Teaching students to utilize friendly numbers to estimate solutions is another number sense strategy. In the real world, people often estimate when they are working with numbers. (Maybe not engineers or accountants). Sixth and 7th grade students are asked to apply percents to problem situations and frequently those examples include calculations involving money. Teaching and showing students how to utilize friendly numbers (½, 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100) to get you close to the actual solution is one way to incorporate number sense. 

Parts and Wholes

There are so many part and whole relationships in middle school math. Think: fractions and decimals, ratio and proportional reasoning, and percentages. When we build that understanding of a part to whole relationship between numbers or representations, they are able to apply it to other mathematical concepts. Consider questions like “if half a cake feeds 4 people, how many people will a whole cake feed?”

When can I incorporate number sense?

Low lift opportunities in your normal instruction, incorporate:

  • wait time (for your feedback response)
  • asking for multiple strategies
  • shifting your line of questioning to incorporate estimation

For higher lift opportunities, try:

  • Daily warm up – pose questions that would solicit different strategies for solving
  • A formal number talk – this structure focuses on using mental math to develop an understanding of numbers and operations. Present a problem to students, give them time to solve mentally, and collect responses focusing on HOW they arrived at their answer.  In middle school, you might ask for the sum of 15.6 and 8.6. See how many different methods students used mentally to arrive at their answer.Number sense isn't just for elementary classes. Middle school number sense is crucial for students to develop into flexible problem solvers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Follow Us: Instagram | Pinterest | Facebook

The post Strategies to Build Middle School Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-to-build-middle-school-number-sense/feed/ 1
USING POST-IT® NOTES IN MATH https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-post-it-notes-in-math/ Fri, 16 Apr 2021 13:30:35 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=25065 It is no secret that teachers love Post-it® Notes, and now I can say with confidence that students love them too!  According to researchers from UCLA and Carnegie Mellon, students enjoy learning more with Post-it® Notes. The brightly colored Post-it® Super Sticky Notes have 2x the sticking power and pack so much potential when it […]

The post USING POST-IT® NOTES IN MATH appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
It is no secret that teachers love Post-it® Notes, and now I can say with confidence that students love them too!  According to researchers from UCLA and Carnegie Mellon, students enjoy learning more with Post-it® Notes. The brightly colored Post-it® Super Sticky Notes have 2x the sticking power and pack so much potential when it comes to engaging students in your daily lessons, so I thought it would be fitting to brainstorm some ways to incorporate them into your middle school math classroom.It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

This post is sponsored by Post-it® Brand. All opinions and ideas are my own.

Math Specific 

1. Real number system diagram

Whenever I taught the real number system, I struggled with a way to make it hands-on. Using Post-it® Notes would have been a perfect solution! After defining a whole number, integer, rational number, and irrational number, students practice placing the types of numbers in the appropriate spot on the diagram. This would make a perfect ‘living’ anchor chart that could continue being added to as students encounter more types of numbers.

2. Combining like terms

Students really struggle with this concept, and I think Post-it® Notes can help make this process more organized. When introducing students to combining like terms, teach students to write down each term and its preceding sign onto a different Post-it® Note. Students can rearrange and group like terms together. Instant activity with hardly any prep!It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. Substitution

Post-it® Notes can provide a clear visual for what is happening when a value is being substituted (or an equation is being checked) in an expression. Using a Post-it® Note, cover the variable in the original expression with the substituted value and have students calculate.It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

4. Order of operations

This idea could serve as a brain teaser or extension idea for your early finishers. Post a few complex “order of operation” problems and use Post-it® Notes to serve as an answer bank where the answer choices will only be used one time. I like that students can interact with the problem. In my example, I used a red Post-it® Note to signal that those are numbers that shouldn’t move.

It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

5. Ordering numbers

This idea is as simple as it sounds. You or your students write down a variety of rational numbers on Post-it® Notes (you could even color coordinate the types of numbers – green for whole numbers, pink for integers, yellow for rational numbers) and students place them on a number line. 

6. Dot Plots

Dot plots are perfect for Post-it® Notes. Provide each student with a Post-it® Note that will act as a dot, and ask a statistical question like, “What size shoes are worn in Mrs. Brack’s 5th period class?” My Data and Statistic units were always more successful if I incorporated students’ specific data into my examples. Students come up and place their Post-it® Note dot in the appropriate spot. They help keep the size of the ‘dots’ consistent, so that students can have an accurate picture of data that skews right or left or is symmetrical. And they are sticky enough to be reused by the next class period which is a total win.

It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com7. Graphing points

Write down different parts of the graph (y-axis, origin, quadrant IV, etc) and a variety of coordinate points on individual Post-it® Notes and distribute them to students. Project a coordinate plane and have students take turns placing the parts of the graph and points in their respective location.

General Classroom

8. Thankfulness Campaign

This was a schoolwide initiative that brought so much joy to our school but could also be done in an individual classroom. During homeroom, students wrote down one thing they felt thankful for on an individual Post-it® Note. They were collected over the course of several weeks, and eventually went on to create a Post-it® Notes mural in one of the main hallways. 

It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

9. Summarizing a daily lesson

Post-it® Notes provide the perfect amount of space to force students to synthesize their learning from that day into a bite-sized chunk. As teachers, we might equate copious notes as higher-level learning when, in actuality, the opposite can be true.

10. Bookmark for interactive notebook

A Post-it® Note is a perfect bookmark for interactive notebooks. They can be repositioned daily, and the variety of colors can indicate important sections of the notebook – vocabulary, previous units, etc.It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

11. Visual indicator a student needs help

If you have a student who will not ask questions during a lesson (but frequently has questions), a Post-it® Note could provide a perfect solution. Provide a few and come up with a system that makes sense for you and your classroom. For me, the student would write her question down, hand it to an assigned buddy, and that buddy would ask the question for her. We came up with that system one-on-one when we brainstormed ways for her to take more ownership in her learning and for me to better clarify misunderstandings in the moment. 

12. Daily must-do list

I would be remiss to not include the power of a Post-it® Note when it comes to writing down my must-dos each day. This list helps me quell that overwhelmed feeling when I look at a VERY long list of to-dos. I take the 3-5 most important and urgent action items and put them on my must-do list. The day instantly feels more manageable!

This list just scratches the surface of all the ways Post-it® Notes can be used in a math classroom setting. How do you use Post-it® Notes in your classroom?It is no secret that students and teachers love Post-it® Notes. Here are 12 ways to use them in your math or general classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post USING POST-IT® NOTES IN MATH appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Free Digital Math Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ideas-for-free-digital-math-activities/ Sat, 13 Feb 2021 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=22074   Let’s talk about digital activities – specifically, free digital math activities! Maneuvering the Middle has digital math activities for 6th grade, 7th grade, 8th grade, and Algebra 1. Let’s talk about what digital activities are, why we love them, and some ideas on how you can use them. Most importantly, you can try them […]

The post Free Digital Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
 

Let’s talk about digital activities – specifically, free digital math activities! Maneuvering the Middle has digital math activities for 6th grade, 7th grade, 8th grade, and Algebra 1. Let’s talk about what digital activities are, why we love them, and some ideas on how you can use them. Most importantly, you can try them out in your classroom with a freebie down below!

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!

Get your students excited about math by using these free digital activities. Read how teachers are using them and download the freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

LISTEN ON: APPLE PODCAST  |  SPOTIFY

What is a digital math activity?

Digital math activities are designed for use in Google Slides and Google Forms, but you do not have to be a Google school or use Google classroom to make these work.  In fact, you can use them with any LMS; your students just have to have access to either Google Slides or PowerPoint. 

The digital activities are made up of two parts. First, the interactive activity portion; students either drag and match, insert shapes and lines, or type their responses. Then, the formative assessment portion is a quick, two question Google Form quiz that assesses if a student understands the concept. 

We released these resources back in 2019 (pre-COVID) to provide a way for teachers to use technology and still have high-quality problems and scaffolding of a specific concept.  We wanted to include higher-level thinking skills and applications that require students to make those connections between what they are learning and the real world.

Why should you try them out?

You might be wondering – are these digital activities for me? Which is why we want to give you a free set to try! Free digital activities to make your life easier!

This way you can try them out with students and see if they are a good fit! If you love the freebie, you can find more digital math activities here

Here’s why you should try them:

  • They work in all classroom settings as long as your students have access to a device like a Chromebook or iPad.
  • If you are in-person, use them as paperless practice. You could even have students collaborate by working on the exact same file.
  • If you are in a hybrid classroom, they are a great fit for that at-home day.
  • If you are fully virtual, they can easily be broken up and shared as individual slides or they can be shared as a weekly assignment. They are ready to go and easy to share, making the virtual component just a little lighter. 
  • They provide variety. Not only are they visually appealing, but they won’t overwhelm students. There is nothing like opening an assignment and realizing you have 30 problems to solve or questions to answer.
  • They are more interesting than a worksheet. And we all know that we are trying our best to keep our students engaged. Cue this meme:
Get your students excited about math by using these free digital activities. Read how teachers are using them and download the freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Anytime you can bring some creativity and an interactive element without losing the rigor (or even building up to the rigor) and it’s ready to go — shoot, sign me up!

How other teachers are using them and why they love them?

I love hearing how other teachers are using them in their unique circumstances and wanted to share with you — especially if you aren’t a math teacher, then you may be able to apply these ideas to an activity in your content area.

Shawna from our MTM FB group says, “We are all remote. I use them for a collaboration day every week. Students get their own copy in GC (Google Classroom) but are in breakout rooms to work together on them.”

Angelique shared, “1) I use digital activities for group work and each group is assigned 1 problem they will present to the class. 2) I use them as a competition to see which breakout room will return to the main room first. I have found this has kept all of my classes on task and focused.”

Marissa says, “Since we are on a hybrid schedule, I use them for all my students at home days. I either check one slide of the digital activity for accuracy or they get a completion grade for doing all slides… I pair them with the Google Form exit tickets and use those as a little formative check.”

And Brina shared, “I’ve been using digital math activities in my skills practice choice boards. I try to give students 3-5 choice practice activities over whatever skill we are doing in class. This way they can practice the skill by picking the activity that they are most interested in… It has been helpful since we have gone back and forth between remote and face to face a few times this year.”

If you want to learn more about digital activities (or really any math topic for that matter), join our Facebook group of brilliant math teachers!

Don’t forget to grab our free digital activities! If you are already using our digital math activities, I would love to know how you are using them, so comment below or let us know on our FB page or Instagram.

Get your students excited about math by using these free digital activities. Read how teachers are using them and download the freebie! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Free Digital Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
How to Teach Slope https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-slope/ Sat, 05 Sep 2020 11:30:12 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=16745 Slope is a heavily emphasized standard in high school math, but its origins (like all math really) predate high school by years. In fact, students are already seeing the precursor to slope in 6th grade — rates, unit rates, and graphing an independent and dependent variable on a graph.  Today, we are going to explore […]

The post How to Teach Slope appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Slope is a heavily emphasized standard in high school math, but its origins (like all math really) predate high school by years. In fact, students are already seeing the precursor to slope in 6th grade — rates, unit rates, and graphing an independent and dependent variable on a graph.  Today, we are going to explore slope in all of its math glory.

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

HOW TO TEACH SLOPE

Here are a few TEKS to show you some of the vertical alignment of this skill(s). 

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.comIt is always more helpful for me to see a test question than a standard, so I pulled a few questions from the 2019 STAAR to show the progression of slope from middle school to algebra. This is a great method to exercise when thinking about vertical alignment. For today’s purposes, I focused on proportional relationships.

6th GRADE

7th GRADE

8th GRADE

Algebra 1

Strategy #1: Vocabulary and Types of Slope are Key

Each grade level will focus on a different vocabulary word according to the standards, but it is important to connect these concepts to what students have already been taught in previous years. Whether it is unit rate, constant of proportionality, slope, or rate of change, it is important to articulate that all of these terms essentially mean the same thing and to remind students that they can and will see these words used interchangeably. 

As 7th graders are expected to begin graphing slope using slope intercept form, I found this idea particularly brilliant (from one of the amazing teachers in our Facebook group):

y = mx + b —> b is where you begin (y-intercept) and m is what moves (the slope)

I would also like to add that while I was never shown Slope Dude or Mr. Slope Man, it would have been incredibly helpful to help me remember the difference between an undefined slope and a zero slope. Ms. Gertson, the Algebra teacher at my school, had a huge anchor chart of Mr. Slope Guy in her classroom.  Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Strategy #2: Scaffold

As teachers, we can look at math concepts through the lens of full understanding and underestimate how challenging it can be for a student who is seeing the concept for the first time.  

Identifying the type of slope, calculating slope from two points or a line on the graph, and graphing an equation all require multiple days on your scope and sequence.  My recommendation is to:

  • Day 1: Start with graphing unit rates as y=mx and introduce the different types of slopes – positive, negative, undefined and zero.
  • Day 2: Have students practice finding slope from the graph of the line using rise over run.
  • Day 2 or 3: Introduce the slope formula. Have students determine the slope from two points and/or from the graph. 
  • Day 4: Use real-life applications (like salary + commission or a cell phone plan with a data usage rate + processing fee) to connect to slope-intercept form. A teacher in our Facebook group said she makes the connection to transformations of functions since slope intercept form is a translation of y=mx. 

Another teacher said, “I do the same, making sure they understand the relationship between tables, graphs, and equations with unit rates and then extending it with an initial/starting value. (We practice) a lot of word problems and applications before we introduce slope and formulas…. to (improve) conceptual understanding.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

The best part is that we have done this for you – check out our Linear Functions Unit  for Algebra 1.

Are you an 8th grade teacher? Grab Linear Relationships Unit for 8th Grade.

Strategy #3 Use Technology for Real-World Application

There is something that helps math click when students can see how manipulating the equation of the graph will impact the actual line of the graph itself in real-time.  We love and recommend Desmos all of the time. Here are two activities that are sure to help students make those connections. 

Marble Slides: “In this delightful and challenging activity, students will transform lines so that the marbles go through the stars. Students will test their ideas by launching the marbles and will have a chance to revise before trying the next challenge.”

Land the Plane: “In this activity, students practice finding equations of lines in order to land a plane on a runway. Most of the challenges are well-suited to slope-intercept form, but they are easily adapted to other forms of linear equations depending on the goals of an individual class or a student.”

Grab these Winter Solve and Color freebies that include rate of change and slope!

What are some ways you teach slope? Tell us what grade you teach and how you discuss slope with your students. 

Looking for more great content? Maneuvering the Middle resources are now for Algebra 1 TEKS. Check it out here.

Teaching slope starts as early as 6th grade. Make sure your students are ready to tackle slope in Algebra by introducing slope in a meaningful way. Check out our best tips here. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Slope appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/#comments Sat, 29 Aug 2020 11:00:28 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=17120 Not only are functions fun, they are the basis of all of Algebra 1 – linear, quadratic, and exponential. Out of 49 Texas standards in Algebra 1, 20 involve functions — that is over 40%!  It is important that students have a firm grasp on understanding how to identify, evaluate, and graph a function to […]

The post Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Not only are functions fun, they are the basis of all of Algebra 1 – linear, quadratic, and exponential. Out of 49 Texas standards in Algebra 1, 20 involve functions — that is over 40%!  It is important that students have a firm grasp on understanding how to identify, evaluate, and graph a function to prepare them for more complex problems.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Teaching Functions in Algebra 1

Standards

Here are the standards that best describe what we are going to focus our time on today. 

  • A.12(B) evaluate functions, expressed in function notation, given one or more elements in their domains
  • A.12(A) decide whether relations represented verbally, tabularly, graphically, and symbolically define a function

Here’s what those standards look like as 2019 and 2018 STAAR test questions.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Vertical Alignment

In 8th grade, students will begin to identify functions in ordered pairs and with graphs; it is a readiness standard, so it is tested more heavily in 8th grade than in Algebra 1. You can see an example of am 8th grade STAAR test question below.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

I think vertical alignment is one of the things teachers can overlook the most when lesson planning. If you are unsure, look up what students have already been exposed to before introducing a topic. I like using this document here.

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Identifying Functions

If you have taught how to identify a function before, you are probably familiar with the definition of a function —

“A function is a rule that assigns each input exactly one output. They occur when every x-value is associated with exactly one y-value.”

You are also probably very familiar with the vertical line test.

When I was a student, I learned to just use the vertical line test. If given a set of ordered pairs, I would quickly sketch it to see if it passed the vertical line test. I had NO understanding of why this worked and what made a function an actual function. 

Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

It wasn’t until I taught functions that I came across a concept that helped me understand the WHY behind the vertical line test. If you have a graph with time on the x axis and distance on the y axis, a vertical line would represent someone or something at a particular moment in time being in more than one place at once, which is not possible. A horizontal line would represent someone or something not moving over a period of time which is possible.

Here are other strategies to help students conceptually understand:

  • Vending machine example: Buttons are the input. Drink is the output. A1 will give you a coke. A2 could give you a coke. But A3, can’t give you a Sprite or a Coke. 
  • Speed dialing on a phone example: X is the number you push, and y is the person that is called. Your phone is functioning when you hit a 3 and it calls your mom only, or if you pressed 4 and it called your brother. The phone is NOT functioning if you would hit a 3 and it sometimes goes to your mom and sometimes goes to your brother. However, you can program two numbers to go to the same person. 
  • Multiple students can be the same height but one student cannot be multiple heights.

Evaluating and Graphing Functions

Once students have a firm grasp on functions and relations, evaluating and graphing functions come a little more naturally. Students have been substituting and graphing in all four quadrants since 6th grade.  Spend time reviewing the order of operations and how to graph on a coordinate plane. Never assume students already know how to do that – you will be surprised by the misconceptions! However, function notation will be new to students. From my experience, students pick up that f(x) is the new y fairly well!

Use Technology for Real-World Application

And because nothing makes math come to life more than our favorite web-based program, here are a few Desmos links.

  • Guess My Rule: Students are introduced to the concept of a function by using input-output pairs in a table. They explore different rules, some of which are functions and some of which are not.
  • Card Sort – Functions: In this activity, students sort graphs, equations, and contexts according to whether each one represents a function.

Pacing

Properties of functions – identifying, evaluating, and graphing are big skills that need their own day. Each of these skills requires a myriad of formats for students to comprehend — set of ordered pairs, mapping diagrams, a graph, a table, or a real life example.  Students need exposure, so do not plan on flying through these standards in a few days. Since functions are foundational in Algebra, extra time spent setting the stage will not go to waste. 

What I also love about this particular skill is that it softly introduces all of the types of functions students will be exposed to over the course of the year — linear, quadratic, and exponential. If students feel comfortable evaluating or describing these types of functions early on, they will be more inclined to find the axis of symmetry (for example) later in the year. 

Further reading for Algebra 1: How to Teach Domain and Range | How to Teach Solving Equations

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!

Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover
Teaching properties of functions is foundational in Algebra 1. Read some of our tips and tricks for having students master this concept. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Functions in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-functions-in-algebra-1/feed/ 4
Free Math Performance Tasks for Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/free-math-performance-tasks-for-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/free-math-performance-tasks-for-middle-school/#comments Sat, 27 Jun 2020 11:30:48 +0000 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/?p=10846 Middle School Math Teachers, we would love to give you THREE math tasks that you can use for the next school year! You can get them paper-based or digital! Click the link below, enter your email address and we send these right over to your email.  Then, read below for different ways to incorporate them […]

The post Free Math Performance Tasks for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Middle School Math Teachers, we would love to give you THREE math tasks that you can use for the next school year! You can get them paper-based or digital! Click the link below, enter your email address and we send these right over to your email.  Then, read below for different ways to incorporate them into your classroom!

This is a thank you for all the hard work you have done during this pandemic. We thought a freebie that was…

  • TEKS and CCSS aligned
  • Vertically aligned from 6th grade through 8th grade
  • Perfect for in person or digital use

…would satisfy the needs of most teachers. How about a math task that can also be used in a variety of ways? 

Start your year off right - download these free printable or digital math performance tasks for 6th, 7th, and 8th grade. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3 Ways to Use MATH PERFORMANCE Tasks for Middle School 

1. As a Group Project

Do your students beg for projects? Mine sure did. Any opportunity to collaborate or change up the routine was always met with such enthusiasm from my sixth graders.  These tasks can be the basis of an exciting project! Students can complete the math task and present the project via FlipGrid or by creating a Google Slides presentation. Since the digital world does not seem to be going away, this could be an opportunity to teach students how they can work together remotely. 

Start your year off right - download these free printable or digital math performance tasks for 6th, 7th, and 8th grade. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. As an Assessment

These math performance tasks cover the following standards in their depth and breadth which makes them the perfect assessment tool.

Common Core State Standards

(Standards have been edited for brevity)

CCSS.MATH.CONTENT.6.RP.A.3 Use ratio and rate reasoning to solve real-world and mathematical problems

CCSS.MATH.CONTENT.7.RP.A.1Compute unit rates associated with ratios of fractions measured in like or different units.

CCSS.MATH.CONTENT.7.RP.A.2.CRepresent proportional relationships by equations. 

CCSS.MATH.CONTENT.8.F.B.4Construct a function to model a linear relationship between two quantities. Interpret the rate of change and initial value of a linear function in terms of the situation it models.

Texas Essential Knowledge and Skills

6.4(B) apply qualitative and quantitative reasoning to solve prediction and comparison of real‐ world problems involving ratios and rates

7.4(A) represent constant rates of change in mathematical and real‐world problems

8.4(B) graph proportional relationships

8.4(C) use data from a table or graph to determine the rate of change or slope and y‐intercept in mathematical and real‐world problems 

8.5(I) write an equation in the form y = mx + b to model a linear relationship between two quantities

Ideally, you could have this math task self-grade by using Go Formative or a variety of other tech tools

Start your year off right - download these free printable or digital math performance tasks for 6th, 7th, and 8th grade. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

3. As an Extension or Extra Credit

If you are looking for something for the students who are always asking for more, here you go! (Those students do exist, I promise!) Give one of these math performance tasks to your early finishers at the beginning of your Proportional Reasoning Unit. Explain that this is something they will be expected to complete as they acquire the skills to do so. Perhaps, it is extra credit, or it could even replace a student’s lowest grade in the grade book. Use it knowing that it will push your students to think critically! (It isn’t just busy work.)

The possibilities with this printable + digital freebie are endless. How do you use math performance tasks in your classroom?

Start your year off right - download these free printable or digital math performance tasks for 6th, 7th, and 8th grade. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post Free Math Performance Tasks for Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/free-math-performance-tasks-for-middle-school/feed/ 2
Why You Should Use Exit Tickets https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/#comments Tue, 23 Jun 2020 19:36:43 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2707 “You can’t correct what you can’t detect.” Have you ever been shocked by the results after a quiz or test? Was this also the first time you had gathered data from students on the given topic? Usually, that was the case for me. Teachers need to monitor how students are progressing daily to have a […]

The post Why You Should Use Exit Tickets appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

“You can’t correct what you can’t detect.” Have you ever been shocked by the results after a quiz or test? Was this also the first time you had gathered data from students on the given topic? Usually, that was the case for me.

Teachers need to monitor how students are progressing daily to have a real understanding of whether or not they are ready to move on. I would fall into the trap of calling on raised hands, those students answering correctly, and me feeling like I was crushing it as a teacher. Too often I would forget about my shy or struggling students and move through a class period thinking every student was “getting it.”Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

why you should use exit tickets

What is an Exit Ticket?

An exit ticket is a 2-5 question formative assessment that allows students to demonstrate the skill they learned that day.  It is usually given at the end of the class period as a ticket out of the door. (Many teachers have students complete an entrance ticket as they have had more time to synthesize what they had learned.) It allows teachers to evaluate their students’ understanding of the day’s lesson and make decisions based on that evaluation.

For Reteaching

Exit tickets serve as a check-in for how students grasped the content I taught that day. After teaching a lesson, I look through the exit tickets and decide if I need to reteach the skill in a different way the following day or the day after. I usually decide based on a couple of questions:

  1. Did the students master the concept but maybe not the computation?  If the answer is yes, I do not reteach.  Example: Were they able to set up a percent proportion correctly, but made an error dividing? Then no reteaching is necessary. (Even if everyone made a division mistake – it means we need to practice division not relearn percent proportions.)
  2. Did the majority of students get the easiest problems correct? Usually, my exit tickets would go from easiest question to hardest question. I would not look at the hardest problems to gauge understanding. Remember this is the first day a student has seen this material. It will take time and exposure before students are rocking the more rigorous problems. The more challenging problems would serve the purpose of keeping fast workers from finishing early and to see any additional misconceptions. (The percent of students mastering a concept before moving on is going to depend on your students. My goal was usually around 75%.)
  3. How have students done on this skill historically?  The longer you have been teaching, the more you understand how long it takes students to master certain skills. Multiplying fractions – one day. Dividing decimals – forever.

For a Quick Hit

Sometimes exit tickets that do not demonstrate mastery don’t actually necessitate reteaching the entire lesson. It might mean that I have one quick key point to clarify before moving on. The best part is that I don’t have to wait until the end of the day to fix my delivery. 

Exit tickets show me where students have misconceptions or where I was unclear before I teach my next class period. 

It gives me an action step: I need to model one more example before students move to group or independent work time. Furthermore, if my first period students all made the same type of error that I am able to address in my other classes, I can use one of their exit tickets as an error analysis the next day to address the misconception with them.

Challenge Students to Synthesize What They Learned

Exit tickets hold students accountable to produce work by the end of the class period that they know you will collect and look at.  It sends the message that what students learned that day is important; they need to pay attention for the entirety of the class, so they can synthesize what they have learned. When students are dismissing, I will be flipping through their exit tickets and stopping students at the door if I need to clarify something with them.

In addition, it allows students to communicate their needs with you.  This idea comes from Erica Stewart who has students evaluate their understanding at the bottom of their exit ticket.  

Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Students simply circle their understanding. Sometimes students leave me notes like, “This was so easy!” and sometimes, “I don’t understand anything.”

Should I Grade Exit Tickets?

I do not grade exit tickets if it is the first day that I have taught a skill.  Occasionally, I do take a grade (if I need it) on subsequent days where students are not learning new material, but practicing material that has already been taught. Exit tickets are not a primary source of grades, but I do use the data they give me to drive instruction.

Exit tickets serve no purpose if you are not looking at them to determine where your students need additional instruction. The easiest way to get timely feedback (for students and teachers) is to use technology to gather that information. Google Forms allows for self-grading. Students can receive immediate feedback without you having to check and pass back. There are many tech tools that allow for self-grading. You can find our comprehensive list of them here

We offer digital (via Google Forms) and printable exit tickets (pictured) in our Digital Activities. You can read more about them here or check them out to purchase here.

Do you use exit tickets in your classroom?

Exit tickets are a great way to gauge students' understanding, drive instruction, and invest students in mastering the content that same day. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Editor’s Note: We have been publishing content for the Maneuvering the Middle blog for over 6 years! This post was originally published in September of 2017 and has been revamped for accuracy and relevancy.

The post Why You Should Use Exit Tickets appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-exit-tickets/feed/ 8
Teaching Domain and Range in Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-domain-and-range-in-algebra-1/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-domain-and-range-in-algebra-1/#comments Sat, 29 Feb 2020 20:21:05 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=7915 Domain and range is heavily emphasized in the Algebra 1 TEKS. The concept is found in two readiness standards and a supporting standard. Having taught it, I thought I would share some tips from my failures and successes.  A.2(A) determine the domain and range of a linear function in mathematical problems; determine reasonable domain and […]

The post Teaching Domain and Range in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Domain and range is heavily emphasized in the Algebra 1 TEKS. The concept is found in two readiness standards and a supporting standard. Having taught it, I thought I would share some tips from my failures and successes. 

Domain and range is a skill that can be challenging for students & thus challenging for teachers. Here are 4 tips to help your class with domain and range. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

A.2(A) determine the domain and range of a linear function in mathematical problems; determine reasonable domain and range values for real‐world situations, both continuous and discrete; and represent using inequalities 

Looking at former test questions helps me envision how standards can be tested. Here is an example from the 2017 Released STAAR test:

A.6(A) determine the domain and range of quadratic functions and represent it using inequalities

This test question example from the 2018 Release STAAR test

 Let’s jump into some ways that will help your students master domain and range!

1. Vocabulary is Key

This concept introduces new vocabulary that is necessary for using the skill. Make sure students have a solid understanding before moving forward. Don’t have them just copy it down. When was the last time you remembered something after writing it down one time? Encourage them to say it to a partner. Have students write a left to right arrow whenever they see the word domain and a vertical arrow whenever they see range. Make this sticky!  

I relied heavily on reading Math Equals Love when I taught Algebra 1 and 2. Sarah taught me to use the mnemonic tool DIXIROYD (which she credits to a unknown blog reader) originally to help students remember that Domain is the set of all Input values, X values, and the Independent variable, while the Range is the set of all Output values, Y-values, and the Dependent variable. You know a mnemonic device is good when you rely on it just as much as your students.

Update 7/28/2026: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

2. Scaffold over a Few Lessons

As teachers, we are all guilty of jumping to an example that students are not ready for, which can cause them to become overwhelmed and shut down. Or worse, they develop false confidence and do an entire set of problems incorrectly.  I thought domain and range was really intuitive, so I tried to cover everything  in one class period and my students were lost. 

This skill requires scaffolding. I recommend starting with finding domain and range from tables and mappings first. Move to determining the domain and range from word problems or equations by creating an input and output table. Finally, move to graphs in this order — discrete graphs, graphs with endpoints, and then graphs with arrows. Interval notation can be tricky for students, so make sure to review  inequality symbols too.

3. Tools are Your Friend

I combed through the 2017 and 2018 STAAR tests and out of all the domain and range problems, 80% used a graph. Students have to be able to determine the domain and range by looking at a function on a graph. I recommend having students annotate the graph by use of colored pencils or highlighters. I have seen this done two ways. 

  1. Highlight the interval of the domain and range on the x and y axis. Domain and range is a skill that can be challenging for students & thus challenging for teachers. Here are 4 tips to help your class with domain and range. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
  2. Draw a box. Though I think this makes infinity less clear. 
Domain and range is a skill that can be challenging for students & thus challenging for teachers. Here are 4 tips to help your class with domain and range. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Lastly, I used this foldable from Math Equals Love after my initial domain and range lesson bombed, and it was much more successful. 

Ready to teach it!? You can find our Properties of Functions Unit here

If you need hands-on Properties of Functions Activities, you can find them here (+Domain and Range)!

4. Use Technology for Real Time Application

We, like many teachers, are big fans of Desmos. A great lesson for introducing domain and range can be found here. For additional practice, I recommend this lesson.  Even if your students do not have access to technology, there is nothing stopping you from projecting these activities and leading a demonstration or discussion with your students. I firmly believe that the more students can manipulate a graph and see its effects, the more memorable or “sticky” that concept becomes!

Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!

I love reading your comments about how you teach math. How do you teach domain and range in your classroom?

Domain and range is a skill that can be challenging for students & thus challenging for teachers. Here are 4 tips to help your class with domain and range. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Teaching Domain and Range in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/teaching-domain-and-range-in-algebra-1/feed/ 2
Getting Started with Algebra Tiles https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/getting-started-with-algebra-tiles/ Mon, 17 Feb 2020 19:51:25 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=7662 The more concrete we can make algebra, the better students will understand abstract concepts. Algebra tiles provide students a hands-on approach to learning algebraic thinking and concepts of algebra. If you are brand new to algebra tiles, these pointers will help get you started. 1. Make a Plan for Managing Algebra Tiles Routines and procedures […]

The post Getting Started with Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The more concrete we can make algebra, the better students will understand abstract concepts. Algebra tiles provide students a hands-on approach to learning algebraic thinking and concepts of algebra. If you are brand new to algebra tiles, these pointers will help get you started.

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make a Plan for Managing Algebra Tiles

Routines and procedures are king! Algebra tiles are tiny pieces of plastic that are bound to end up on the floor or mixed with other sets, even with the most well-intentioned students. These series of questions will help you prepare answers and procedures for your students as you set the stage for managing algebra tiles.

  • What is the procedure for grabbing a new set of algebra tiles? Can I use them without permission or do I need to ask first?
  • Where do I get them from? Do I get them for my whole table? Can my set be mixed up with others? 
  • When can I use them? Can I use them for homework? Can I take a set home?
  • What are the consequences for using the tiles inappropriately, leaving them on the floor, and/or throwing them in the air?
  • When do I clean up? Where do I return them? 

By thinking through these questions and explicitly instructing your students, you will be much more likely to experience success!  Your future self will thank you. 

2. Get Familiar with How to Use THEM

If you are like me, you didn’t learn math concepts with algebra tiles when you were in school, and might have taught for several years before giving them a try. Before implementing them with students, familiarize yourself with them. Play with them on your own.  Without a pencil or paper, solve problems from your curriculum using only the manipulative. 

Whenever I needed to practice teaching a lesson I wasn’t confident in, I would pop into my coworker’s classroom and ask if I could explain the concept to her. My coworker was a self proclaimed “not a math person,” and would ask excellent questions that helped me clarify my lesson and prepare for student misconceptions. 

Download our Algebra Tiles Starter Guide to see how you can use them to teach simplifying expressions, distributive property, solving linear equations, adding and subtracting polynomials, multiplying and dividing polynomials, and factoring polynomials. 

3. Don’t Just Use THEM for One Day

I love manipulatives, but they can be hard to manage on a daily basis.  Sometimes, I found that I would introduce a topic with a manipulative, check the “used manipulatives” box, and then wonder why it wasn’t as beneficial as I had hoped. While I had good intentions, I wasn’t serving the students who could benefit from more concrete learning and practice on a more regular basis.

The purpose of using tiles (or any manipulative) is that it allows for conceptual math to become concrete. If you are not familiar with the concrete representational abstract sequence, we wrote a blog post about it here.

Essentially, in the case of solving equations, the concrete representational abstract sequence would look like this:

  • Use the tiles (concrete) to build their conceptual understanding
  • Draw the tiles (representational) to show the process of solving an equation
  • Solve an equation (abstract)

While some students might love using algebra tiles and want to continue using them indefinitely, there will be problems where they are not the best choice (example: rational numbers). However, if algebra tiles support the students’ processing of the problem, then I think students should be able to use them whenever they would like. Allow tiles to be a method for solving at any point in the unit or school year.

Are algebra tiles new to you? Do you have them in your math closet but don’t see the value in using them? Do you need a few examples of how to use them?  We have you covered!

Our Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide is going to walk you through the process step-by-step with the different ways you can use algebra tiles along with some of the language you can use with your students. 

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Interested in more about algebra tiles? Check out our post on how to solve equations using algebra tiles. 

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

Learn how to implement algebra tiles in your algebra, high school, or middle school classroom. Download your free Getting Started with Algebra Tiles Guide! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Getting Started with Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Why You Should Use Algebra Tiles https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-use-algebra-tiles/ Sat, 25 Jan 2020 12:02:47 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=7110 Confession: Manipulatives made me nervous. In my first years as a teacher, I basically ruled out anything that would require additional classroom management, so no algebra tiles would be found in any of my lessons. I think more than anything, though, I didn’t completely understand them. In fact, when I was a student, my teachers […]

The post Why You Should Use Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Confession: Manipulatives made me nervous. In my first years as a teacher, I basically ruled out anything that would require additional classroom management, so no algebra tiles would be found in any of my lessons. I think more than anything, though, I didn’t completely understand them. In fact, when I was a student, my teachers didn’t use them, so I didn’t think they were necessary. Needless to say, I was wrong!

Find a small set here or a large set here.

You can read about how we use algebra tiles to teach solving equations here.

Algebra tiles can help make sense of solving equations and many other skills. Read 3 reasons why you should be using algebra tiles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. ALGEBRA TILES Make Abstract Concepts Concrete 

In researching why algebra tiles are so vital for students, I came across this article. The author states,  “If children are introduced to abstract concepts before they have a solid basis for understanding those concepts, they tend to resort to memorization…which is not a solid foundation for further learning.” I couldn’t agree more! Memorization does not further students’ mathematical understanding, which restricts their flexibility in problem solving application. 

Solving for x is abstract for a student new to solving equations. Similar to students using counters to make sense of addition in elementary school, or students using number lines to make sense of integers, algebra tiles make solving equations, combining like terms, or factoring polynomials a visual process. 

2. THEY Reach All Learners

I hear and I forget  –  I see and I remember  –  I do and I understand.  –Confucius 

Most people learn new information three different ways: auditory, visual, or kinesthetic. Through my years as a teacher, I would ask myself if I was relying too much on one method and try to change it up if need be. Algebra tiles engage two out of three of these learning styles – primarily auditory and kinesthetic learners – but you could argue, with the correct discourse routines in your classroom, that they also engage an auditory learner. 

These manipulatives emphasize a mathematical process over memorizing steps. Solving equations involves many steps:

    1. Distribute
    2. Combine like terms
    3. Move variables to one side of the equal sign
    4. Move constants to the other side of the equal sign
    5. Use inverse operations to solve for x

Algebra tiles make sense of all of those steps. Do you want students to understand why an equation must remain balanced? Use algebra tiles. Do you want students to understand what isolating a variable actually means? Use algebra tiles.  

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

3. THEY Support Many Skills

If you think algebra tiles are just for solving equations, here are all the other skills they support:

  • Simplifying expressions
  • Factoring
  • Substitution
  • Distributive property
  • Integer rules
  • Operations with polynomials
  • Completing the square

What skills am I missing?

Don’t have any? Try this link for an online version.

Algebra tiles can help make sense of solving equations and many other skills. Read 3 reasons why you should be using algebra tiles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

If teachers can introduce tiles as early as sixth grade, just imagine how well they will be able to use them to tackle more complicated high school math concepts! Do you use them?

Algebra tiles can help make sense of solving equations and many other skills. Read 3 reasons why you should be using algebra tiles. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Why You Should Use Algebra Tiles appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Making Algebra Relevant https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/#comments Sat, 18 Jan 2020 12:30:38 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6992 In my years of teaching, I had the opportunity to teach Algebra 1 as an on-level course for 9th grade freshman and as a pre-AP course to 8th grade students.  While the two ages and settings (middle school vs. high school) differed, the content remained much the same. As a math teacher, Algebra 1 is […]

The post Making Algebra Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
In my years of teaching, I had the opportunity to teach Algebra 1 as an on-level course for 9th grade freshman and as a pre-AP course to 8th grade students.  While the two ages and settings (middle school vs. high school) differed, the content remained much the same. As a math teacher, Algebra 1 is the definition of fun!  For me, all of the pieces come together, and you have the opportunity to see it “click” for your students. For some students, they can begin to see a disconnect between algebra and the “real world” — enter the question, “When are we going to use this?” 

They have a point.  Not everything that you learn in Algebra 1 is going to directly translate to your career — you may not graph systems to determine the solution, but you may be comparing two different services and want to know which one is a better value.  Algebra 1 does teach you how to reason, how to think abstractly, and how to apply problem solving skills. So, how can we as teachers go about making algebra relevant?

I also want to note that often Algebra 1 is not the gateway subject; it’s the gatekeeper.  Future success in math (and arguably the rest of a student’s education) is reliant on success in the foundation of algebra.  Statistics are not friendly to those who fail Algebra 1.  By making it more relevant and by showing the connections to the real world, students are more likely to be engaged and participatory and, thus, are more likely to be successful!

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

1. Make Connections to the Real World

We’ve all seen this meme before.  Real-world math problems can be a little silly.  I personally believe that the sillier it is, the better.  (Click to see how I liked to handle funny word problems in my classroom.)

However, when we can connect using algebra to solve interesting, REAL real-world problems that are happening right now, we engage students who wouldn’t otherwise be engaged.  This is a great website with different and interesting problems for students to consider. They are sorted by grade level, and I found myself clicking each one just out of sheer interest for the topic (not the math!).

Here are just a few of the examples — 

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. Tailor curriculum to students’ interests

This article is fascinating. Essentially, studies show that students are more successful in math when the curriculum factors in their personal interest. 

“In the study, half of the students chose one of several categories that interested them — things like music, movies, sports, social media — and were given an algebra curriculum based on those topics.  The other half received no interest-based personalization… Walkington found that students who had received interest-based personalization mastered concepts faster.” 

Later in the study, she removed the interest-based personalization to see if the concepts were retained over time.

“‘Students that had previously received personalization, even though it was gone, were doing better on these more difficult problems as well,’ said Walkington.”

And for the students who were already struggling with algebra? Making algebra relevant will serve your struggling students the most.

“‘We picked out the students who seemed to be struggling the most in Algebra I, and we found that for this sub-group of students that were way behind, the personalization was more effective,’ Walkington said.”

UPDATE: ALGEBRA I DIGITAL ACTIVITIES ARE NOW AVAILABLE!Algebra 1 Digital Activity Cover

3. Incorporate Project-Based Learning

When students engage in a process to solve a real-world problem or to answer a complex question, they are taking ownership of their learning.  Project-based learning supports my last two points, but more than that, it makes the topic’s relevance more tangible than the typical worksheet.  Organizing information, solving a problem, and presenting a solution to peers are things that many students will need to be able to do in the real world, even if they don’t involve math.

4. Focus on the thinking, not just the process

Conceptual learning vs. procedural learning: For too long I focused on communicating what steps to take solving problems rather than having students explore what steps to take and WHY those steps are taken.  Let’s take solving systems of equations. There can be MANY steps to solve a systems problem by graphing, elimination, or substitution, and MANY students will solve these problems without really understanding what these types of problems represent.  If students do not understand that the purpose of a systems problem is to find the break-even point in two situations, then there was a missed opportunity to connect algebra’s relevance to their lives.

Struggling with students asking "when are we ever going to use this?" Here are 4 Ideas for Making Algebra Relevant to Students | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What are some of the ways you make algebra or math relevant in your classroom? 

The post Making Algebra Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/making-algebra-relevant/feed/ 3
Desmos Activities to Try in Algebra 1 https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/desmos-activities-to-try-in-algebra-1/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/desmos-activities-to-try-in-algebra-1/#comments Sat, 11 Jan 2020 12:00:09 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6950 I am in awe of what a treasure Desmos is!  If you are an upper middle school or high school teacher, and you haven’t explored all that Desmos has to offer, run to the website right now.  Desmos is a FREE interactive tool used to graph, model, collect data, and question students over collection of […]

The post Desmos Activities to Try in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I am in awe of what a treasure Desmos is!  If you are an upper middle school or high school teacher, and you haven’t explored all that Desmos has to offer, run to the website right now.  Desmos is a FREE interactive tool used to graph, model, collect data, and question students over collection of higher math concepts including but not limited to the  nine topics found below. These activities are awesome and FREE!

If you haven't tried using the Desmos tool in your classroom yet, check out their activities to use in Algebra. Learn about more of its great features too. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Note: All activity descriptions in quotes below were taken directly from the Desmos website.

1. Distance v. Time 

Turtle Crossing – Students explore distance versus time graphs by safely getting a turtle across the beach. 

If you haven't tried using the Desmos tool in your classroom yet, check out their activities to use in Algebra. Learn about more of its great features too. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

2. Expressions, Equations, and Inequalities

Pool Border Problem – “In this exploration activity, students will first construct expressions with numbers to determine the number of tiles that border a pool. Then they’ll use those numerical expressions to help them write an expression with variables.” 

3. Properties of Functions

Function Card Sort Practice – In this activity, students would differentiate between graphs, stories, and equations that are functions or not functions. Furthermore, students are asked to defend their answers and create their own examples of  functions.

Domain and Range Introduction Activity – “In this introduction to domain and range, students practice finding the domain and range of piecewise functions. They begin with an informal exploration of domain and range using a graph, and build up to representing the domain and range of piecewise functions using inequalities.” 

4. Linear Functions

Marble Slide Activity – This game allows students to explore the changes to a line when the slope and the y-intercept are altered. 

5. Applying Linear Functions

Lego Prices – I love this activity! In this activity, students use sliders to explore the relationship between price and number of pieces for various Star Wars LEGO sets and to make several predictions based on that model. Students will also interpret the parameters of their equation in context.

6. Systems of Equations

Solutions to Systems of Equations – This activity hits on everything students need to know about solving systems of equations graphically, with substitution, or with elimination. Use this to review the unit or for the  rest of the class when you are pulling a small group

Side note: One of my favorite features is the “Share With Class” feature that allows students to see 2-3 responses from other students on their screen. This is  a quick self-check or error analysis built into several of these activities. 

7. Quadratic Functions

Match My Parabola – “In this activity, students work through a series of scaffolded quadratic graphing challenges to develop their proficiency with standard, vertex, factored, and other quadratic function forms.”

8. Exponential Functions

Avi and Benita’s Repair Shop – This is an engaging way to introduce exponential growth to students. “In this twist on a classic activity, students compare linear and exponential growth in the context of daily payments. One plan increases by $100 each day, while another grows by doubling the previous day’s payment.”

9. Transformations

Transformation Shapes – Specifically for middle school or geometry students, use this activity to have students internalize transformation vocabulary: slide, rotate, reflect, etc. 

This was just a small snippet of all of the activities that Desmos has to offer. Furthermore, Desmos categorizes all of their activities into  four buckets: Introduction, Practice, Development, and Application to help determine which activities would fit best in your unit.  

If you haven't tried using the Desmos tool in your classroom yet, check out their activities to use in Algebra. Learn about more of its great features too. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Other Features

Graphing Calculator – Short on calculators? Use their free graphing calculator tool. 

Geometry Tool – This tool allows you to construct arcs, polygons, rays, angles and more. Additionally, you can transform constructions.

If you haven't tried using the Desmos tool in your classroom yet, check out their activities to use in Algebra. Learn about more of its great features too. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Accessibility – Perhaps its best feature, Desmos is making sure that every student, regardless of physical or mental ability, is able to learn and love math. Click on the link to read about what Desmos is doing to support ALL learners. 

If your students love learning with technology, be sure to check out our digital activities.

These digital activities are included in our All Access membership. Click here to learn more.

Have you tried Desmos in your classroom? What Desmos activity do you love? 

The post Desmos Activities to Try in Algebra 1 appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/desmos-activities-to-try-in-algebra-1/feed/ 3
How to Teach Integer Operations https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-integer-operations/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-integer-operations/#comments Sun, 08 Sep 2019 20:27:04 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=6304 Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations? Keep reading and get individual sized and classroom sized vertical number line. STUDENT Background WITH INTEGERS If you are in a state that teaches Common Core, 6th grade is when the conceptual understanding of integers […]

The post How to Teach Integer Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?

Keep reading and get individual sized and classroom sized vertical number line.

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

STUDENT Background WITH INTEGERS

If you are in a state that teaches Common Core, 6th grade is when the conceptual understanding of integers begins. Students are expected to be able to place and order integers on a number line, as well as determine opposites (6.NS.C.6.C).  In Texas, students will be expected to do that and solve addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division problems with integers (6.3D). Mastering rational number addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division is required by the end of 7th grade in most states (7.NS.A.1).

Students’ previous knowledge includes operations for positive whole numbers and positive rational numbers.  If you are a little unfamiliar with this vocabulary, then I included a diagram to help. And you can real more about how to teach the real number system here.

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

Students will not be asked to just solve these integers problems in isolation.  They will be required to solve integer problems that include multiple steps, in order of operations problems, in solving for variables, and graphing.

Why are integers such a struggle?

Integers can be so deceiving. Students often think they are rocking it (it’s simple math, after all) only to be making the same mistakes over and over again.  Unfortunately, as teachers, we can often say or do things that are actually detrimental to our students’ understanding of integers. For example, math students have heard from a young age that, “You cannot take a larger number from a smaller number” when, in fact, you can! 

My weakness was my scope and sequence. I had one day to teach models, so I would cram the models for all of the operations into one or two days, and then make students practice using the algorithm over and over again.  Each year, I spent more time investing students into the models, and each year, I saw my students’ confidence in working with integers improve.

No shame if you have taught tricks over conceptual understanding; I have!  They are well intended. The tic-tac-toe to help with multiplication and division rules was taught to me!  The problem with these tricks and shortcuts is that 100% of students will forget the trick or mix up the tricks with something else.  If you have ever heard a student say, “Keep, change, flip” in response to how to solve an integer subtraction problem, then you know what I mean!

Ideas for Supporting Conceptual Understanding

Provide Context

While the term “integers” and the concept of using operations to solve integer problems are new to students, the idea of an integer is not new.  Before jumping into integer operations, provide real-world examples of integers. Students are likely familiar with the following real-life scenarios:

  • Owing and depositing money
  • Losing and gaining yards in football
  • A temperature below zero
  • Above and below sea level

VERTICAL NUMBER LINES

If you don’t use vertical number lines, I would highly recommend you start using them! They give more context to above and below zero.  Most real-world examples are more vertically inclined: a thermometer and above and below sea level. (I use a border to clean up my not so beautiful edges.)

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

Side note: Before jumping into showing students integer addition and subtraction using number lines, show students examples of addition and subtraction problems with positive whole numbers using number lines.  I learned that some students had not been exposed to number lines for any operations. By modeling a few familiar problems, you avoid trying to teach two new skills at the same time.

Geogebra is a great tool to show addition and subtraction with vertical number lines.  It’s interactive, so you could have students play with the website before introducing models or the algorithm.  You could ask students what patterns they see and to derive some of the integer rules. 

Subtracting integers has always been my Achilles’ heel.  I had used “keep, change, change” to little success, but it wasn’t until I used the hot air balloon example that I saw students completely grasp why subtracting a negative would cause the answer to increase.  Dropping sandbags off a hot air balloon would result in the hot air balloon moving up! (I made a very short video to demonstrate it)

Download, print, and cut out vertical number lines for your students here.

Counters to Show Multiple Representations

Another way for students to gain more of a conceptual understanding of integers is using counters to show multiple representations of a number. 

For example, using counters, ask students to show -4.  They might grab four red counters. Ask them to show -4 another way, and they might not know what to do, or they might say there isn’t another way.  

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

However, they could grab five red counters and one yellow counter, which is still a -4.  Once students get the hang of it, you could ask them to work in pairs to produce as many representations as possible within a short time frame.  By doing this, you are essentially introducing zero pairs without introducing zero pairs.   

Possible prompts: 

  • How can we make positive 4 with eight counters?
  • How many different ways can you show -6?  

This helps build integer fluency.  It also allows students to be more flexible in their thinking.  

Moving Toward the Algorithm

Once students are feeling more confident with models, here is another hands-on way for students to dive deeper into integers. Give students a value they are trying to reach.  Provide sticky notes or cards marked with a variety of integers. Students match integers to equal the given value. Similar to using counters, this allows for students to practice their fluency but also to be flexible problem solvers. 

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

What best practices do you have for teaching integers?  Don’t forget to grab your printable vertical number lines here.

Are you eager for students in your classroom to conceptually understand integers and master the skills required for integer operations?  | maneueveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Integer Operations appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-integer-operations/feed/ 3
Developing a Number Sense Routine https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-a-number-sense-routine/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-a-number-sense-routine/#comments Sat, 02 Mar 2019 12:00:07 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=5640 When we surveyed math intervention teachers about the struggles that students have, there were several themes that we heard, and “a lack of number sense” sums up the most prominent one.  From my personal experience, I can attest that number sense does come easier for some students than others. It might be why adults say […]

The post Developing a Number Sense Routine appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When we surveyed math intervention teachers about the struggles that students have, there were several themes that we heard, and “a lack of number sense” sums up the most prominent one.  From my personal experience, I can attest that number sense does come easier for some students than others. It might be why adults say things like, “I am not a math person.” Is it possible that we are all math people, but we don’t all learn the same way?  Is it possible that students who have a conceptual understanding of part-to-whole relationships might find fractions an easy concept? I think so. This is why the first component of our Maneuvering Math™ Intervention Program is a daily number sense routine.  

In a typical 50-minute on-level class, setting aside precious minutes for number sense doesn’t always make it in the lesson plan.  However, in a math intervention class, building number sense is critical and can have a lasting impact on students.

A DAILY NUMBER SENSE ROUTINE

COMPONENT 1 OF MANeuvuering math

Ideas and tips for developing a number sense routine and implementing number talks in the math classroom.

How do you build a number sense routine?

Lately, there has been growing popularity around the phrase “number talks.”  Number talks are short problems in which students are encouraged to use mental math and then share their responses with the class.  The teacher encourages students to share many different justifications and strategies as to how they solved. The focus of the number talk is the dialogue and discussion, rather than the correct answer.

We developed a number sense routine that we felt would be best suited for middle school students, a number sense notebook.  We included different types of number sense-building questions and spiraled a review throughout the notebook.

Our hope and intention is that the number sense notebook becomes a jumping off point for these math conversations, like number talks.  The main difference between our daily number sense routine is that not all of the questions can be solved with mental math. Some may disagree, but I think students who have a shaky math foundation need to have the freedom to write and sketch.     

Ideas and tips for developing a number sense routine and implementing number talks in the math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

What does a number sense routine look like?

We all have to take a structure and make it work for our students and classroom, but I would love to share a few things to keep in mind when it comes to a number sense routine.

  • Make it a routine:  Five to ten minutes each and every day really does add up!  If you are able to incorporate number sense for just 10 minutes a day, you have added over 30 hours over the course of the year!  Plus, it is a great way to start a class similar to a warm-up or a bell ringer.
  • Model your thinking:  One of the main benefits to a number sense routine (and a number talk) is the value that you are able to share through modeling.  When you first start, you might consider talking through a problem on your own to show students what you expect and to provide them with alternative strategies that they may not have considered.
  • Model the dialogue you expect:  Middle schoolers aren’t naturally going to dialogue appropriately.  Be sure to model the way you expect students to respond to one another and share with the class, especially if they disagree.
  • Debrief and discuss:  Again, the focus of this number sense routine is the conversations and justifications that students share.  When they contribute a possible approach to solve a problem, then they will slowly but surely gain the confidence to work with numbers.    

Ideas and tips for developing a number sense routine and implementing number talks in the math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

We really considered all of these aspects when developing our number sense routine and even included sample discussion questions to help you facilitate conversations. They are a great jumping off point if you are new to building number sense.

How do you build number sense in your classroom?  Have you tried a number talk?

Ideas and tips for developing a number sense routine and implementing number talks in the math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Developing a Number Sense Routine appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-a-number-sense-routine/feed/ 4
Why Intervention Should be Skill Based https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/skill-based-math-intervention/ Sat, 05 Jan 2019 12:00:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4581 Over the past several months, I have been sharing quite a bit about best practices that surround the concept of math intervention.  We have discussed strategies for improving number sense, getting started, and what to do when your students are all on different pages.  Today, I want to discuss why I believe that a skill-based […]

The post Why Intervention Should be Skill Based appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Over the past several months, I have been sharing quite a bit about best practices that surround the concept of math intervention.  We have discussed strategies for improving number sense, getting started, and what to do when your students are all on different pages.  Today, I want to discuss why I believe that a skill-based math intervention approach is the best one to take.

SKILL-BASED MATH INTERVENTION

Why you should use a skill-based math intervention program to fill in gaps and meet the needs of your students.  

When we set out to write our Maneuvering the Middle math curriculum, the first non-negotiable for us was that everything we wrote would be standards-based.  That means that we would use the standards (CCSS and TEKS) as the backbone for our resources. We would develop resources that met the depth and complexity of the standards.  

We did this because, as a teacher, it is important.  At the end of the year, there is a set of standards that the state says your students must master.  

When we began working on Maneuvering Math™, we knew that we couldn’t take the same approach.    

What is RTI?

If you are new to teaching or just need a little refresher, RTI (response to intervention) is a formal process in which a team (parents, teachers, campus staff, and the student) works toward finding the level of support needed for a student to succeed.  

There are three levels to the RTI process in which all students fall.  
  • Tier 1:  This is high-quality instruction in an on-level classroom; generally 85% of your student population will be in Tier 1.
  • Tier 2:  When a student is unsuccessful with Tier 1 instruction, there are additional supports that are put in place.  Generally about 10% of your student population will be in Tier 2
  • Tier 3:  When a student is unsuccessful with the supports from Tier 2, students are moved to tier 3.  Generally about 5% of your student population will be in Tier 3.

The level of support in each Tier is determined by the team – the goal is to provide the least amount of support necessary while allowing a student to be successful.  

Math intervention is targeted for students who are unsuccessful in a Tier 1 classroom.  These students need additional support in the form of extended time, explicit instruction, and small group instruction.  

Why a skill-based approach?

One of the reasons I so passionately believe in the skill-based approach is because of how math builds upon itself.  Students in 8th grade are using skills that they learned in 4th grade.

Take the standards:

  • CCSS 7.NS.3   Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving the four operations with rational numbers.
  • TEKS 7.3B  Apply and extend previous understandings of operations to solve problems using addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of rational numbers

When you look at these standards, you see a huge list of things students should be able to do.  

  • Add rational numbers to solve problems
  • Subtract rational numbers to solve problems
  • Multiply rational numbers to solve problems
  • Divide rational numbers to solve problems

But what if a student is struggling?  

Where do you start?

If you are remediating the standard, then you are going to continue to work on those four concepts above, over and over.  But what if they really only struggle with applying integer operations to rational numbers? Or what if they only struggle with fractions?

A skill-based approach is the only way to systematically target the needed gaps in an efficient manner.  Not so sure? Check out this NCTM article.

What I like about a skill-based approach

I like to equate a skill-based approach to math intervention like visiting the doctor for a sick visit.  The doctor is going to ask you questions about how you are feeling (assessing the problem), they are going to use their knowledge and understanding of your symptoms to best diagnose the problem, and then they are going to create a personalized road to recovery.  

Math intervention can look a lot like this.  We get a group of students who have some gaps in their math content.  As the teacher, you know them well; you know their mistakes, their tendencies, and their motivations.  You use the data you are given to help personalize a plan.

A skill-based approach lends itself to filling in gaps and meeting the needs of your students.  

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Why you should use a skill-based math intervention program to fill in gaps and meet the needs of your students.  | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Why Intervention Should be Skill Based appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/#comments Sat, 15 Dec 2018 12:00:58 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4510 Anyone who has taught a day or two can tell you that it is a rare event that you might teach a new concept and 100% of your students master said concept.  I would say that 99.99% of the time, there is a student or a group of students who are not ready for mastery. […]

The post 5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Anyone who has taught a day or two can tell you that it is a rare event that you might teach a new concept and 100% of your students master said concept.  I would say that 99.99% of the time, there is a student or a group of students who are not ready for mastery. Potentially they have gaps in the skills needed to master the concept, or maybe they just need more time.  Today, I am sharing 5 steps to effective small group instruction. 

The best principal I ever worked for used to say that, “Everyone can learn: some just need more time.”  

While we do have on-level classes, and pre-AP classes, and intervention classes, we still have individual students in our classrooms with individual needs, and so we will all face the same question at one time or another.

What do we do when our students are not on the same level?

Small group instruction can seem complicated and like a lot of work. Read these 5 steps to simple and effective small group instruction.

5 steps to effective small group instruction

Oftentimes, there are large discrepancies.  Perhaps a 7th grader is lacking a foundational understanding of fractional concepts, so when it comes to multiplying and dividing fractions, they are lost.  More often than not, I hear that students are lacking number sense and basic number operations.

I would love to outline a simple yet powerful plan.

1. Quickly assess who is struggling

This can be as simple as an exit ticket or as formal as a pre-assessment.  You can use the data that you already have to determine who needs your support.

2. Pull a small group of students

Now that you know who needs your support (and also who could benefit from enrichment), you can create a small group of students who generally need the same level of support.  Obviously, this isn’t going to be perfect, but do the best you can.

3. Keep it quick

Remember that you want them to be doing the work.  Don’t try to reteach a lesson verbatim. Do a quick 1-2 minute review, and then begin scaffolding the skills, looking for misconceptions and stumbling blocks.  

4. Scaffold the skills

For example, with percent proportions it might look like this:

“Let’s quickly review the parts of a percent proportion” (while sketching on a dry erase board)

“Awesome!  So, if I say to find 25% of 50, what would your proportion look like?  Don’t solve it.”

I suggest using friendly numbers to minimize confusion and focus on the skills.

Practice a few more like that.

Practice the different variations of setting up the proportion.  Still no solving.

Give students an opportunity to set up the proportions on their own.  At this point, you have targeted the skill of setting up a percent proportion.  Jot down this skill and their mastery of it in any recording documentation you may keep.

[Depending on time and the number of groups you want to meet with, you might stop here and pick up the next time.]

“Now, let’s practice setting up percent proportions from a real-life situation.”

Give an example, and be sure that everyone can see and read the example.  I would recommend a task card-size example for each student to be able to read and mark (if laminated).  

“Read the question to yourself quietly.”

“Isabelle, will you please read it for our group?”

“What is happening in the problem?”

“What information do we know?”

“How can we take the information we know and apply it to a percent proportion?”

“Show me how you would set this up as a percent proportion, but don’t solve it.”

Check and individually correct any misconceptions.  Look for patterns. If a student is doing well, then give them another problem to try.  Let them move ahead.

At this point, you have targeted the skill of setting up a percent proportion in a real-life situation.  Jot down this skill and their mastery of it in any recording documentation you may keep.

[I would personally stop here for the sake of time and moving to another group.  I also believe that you have targeted the biggest misconception when solving percent problems: the set-up.]

Your students have felt successful.  They have worked on two specific skills.  They have not spent the entire time trying to do the multiplication and division required to solve.  Everyone is winning! You have built confidence in them. Your group was quick enough that “hopefully” only a few students got off task.  

5. Record and repeat

I mentioned making any required notes above, but in reality I do think it’s important to keep notes on your students and/or groups.  This is beneficial for many people:

  • You:  the more things you are not trying to remember in your head, the better
  • Your students:  you can better direct them, better advocate for them, and better communicate with parents and any team members about their progress

I have an entire post with ideas for documenting intervention (including a video), as well as a math intervention binder that you might find useful. I also have a Progress Monitoring freebie for you to grab if you need a way to record your students’ small group progress.

I would love to know your thoughts on effective small group instruction and how you facilitate it.  Please share your thoughts in the comments.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Small group instruction can seem complicated and like a lot of work. Read these 5 steps to simple and effective small group instruction. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Steps to Effective Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/5-steps-to-effective-small-group-instruction/feed/ 6
How to Get Started with Math Intervention https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-get-started-with-math-intervention/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-get-started-with-math-intervention/#comments Sat, 01 Dec 2018 12:00:21 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4480 For the past several weeks, we have been sharing ideas about number sense in middle school and discussing how students who struggle with math concepts generally also struggle with number sense.  If your campus implements the RTI (response to intervention) process, then you know these students who struggle need a Tier 2 intervention. Today, I […]

The post How to Get Started with Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
For the past several weeks, we have been sharing ideas about number sense in middle school and discussing how students who struggle with math concepts generally also struggle with number sense.  If your campus implements the RTI (response to intervention) process, then you know these students who struggle need a Tier 2 intervention. Today, I want to share some ideas on how to get started with math intervention.


Looking for more ideas for math intervention?  Check out this page.

Need a Math Intervention Program? Try Maneuvering Math!


From our survey of teachers who are responsible for math intervention, I learned that math intervention takes on quite a few different forms.  From utilizing class time, to dedicated classes, to an interventionist pulling students across campus, there are many iterations of the same attempt at a solution.

However, some of the biggest struggles that teachers identified were, “I just don’t know the best place to start,” or “Where should I start?” or “What is the most important thing to start with?”

I also really resonated with the fact that principals know there are students who are not on grade level, and they know that something needs to be done, but the general consensus was that there is little direction or support given to these intervention classes.  I can relate.

Let me tell you my story…


For three years, I taught a targeted math intervention class to students who did not master the previous grade-level content.  These students were assigned to a second math class of the day, and I was tasked with the responsibility of planning for this class in addition to my on-level and pre-AP classes.  The first year was a terrible flop. I was overwhelmed with the needs of my six other classes and felt that this last class seemed to get the very last bit of me. I struggled to plan for it, and no one offered any better solutions.  

By the second year, I knew I had to be better prepared and spent the summer planning and organizing.  A co-teacher was added to that class, and we eventually began dabbling with small groups. There was traction, I had fewer behavior challenges, my students were more motivated, and I was less overwhelmed.  I still didn’t have great resources, but I was making myself (and my co-teacher) more of a resource. By year three, I added technology stations and some number sense activities and continued to work with small groups.  I also added pre-teaching to my mix.

It was still far from perfect, but there was so much progress from that first year…  I started to believe in small groups and saw students gain confidence and a deeper understanding.  My students were performing sooo much better, and I could see their behavior change in our on-level class.  

I tell you all of this to say that I have been there feeling like I didn’t know where to start.  You aren’t alone, and if I could connect the hundreds of teachers who contact me, we would be like one giant support group.  🙂


Here are my best suggestions for getting started.  

How to Get Started with math Intervention

You are given an internvetion class. Now what? Suggestions, ideas, and four steps for getting started with math intervention.

1.  Use the data you have

One of the questions that I get also surrounds universal screeners and what data to use.  I think that because of the RTI model and the general culture of schools, we can be obsessed with data (anyone have a data wall, a data binder, and data meetings?).  The reality is we likely have more data than we need, so use what you have. If it’s a local district benchmark, then look at the data to identify the skills needed to solve the question and target those skills.  

Intervention is skill-based.

A curriculum is standards-based.

You cannot intervene on a standard; they are too large and not targeted enough for a student to be able to show mastery.  

2. Build the relationship

If I had to nail the most pivotal aspect of math intervention, it would be the relationship.  Middle school is a tough age as it is: now imagine having struggled in a class that you have to go to each and every day.  You have likely struggled for years, and yet you don’t get to opt out. If you think of it from your students’ perspective, then you likely will have just a bit more compassion when they are off-task or giving up.  

My most favorite ways to build a relationship:

  • Smile
  • Greet students at the door
  • Compliment a student: “I like your new haircut” or “I saw you perform in the pep rally– way to go!”
  • Ask questions
  • Assume the best
  • Teach them how to use their voice

  3.  Don’t wait for perfect behavior

I mentioned earlier that I started using small groups.  What I didn’t mention was that my students’ behavior was not perfect.  If I waited for perfect behavior, then I would still be waiting.  

You know your students best, so I would say group them the best you can and set high expectations of what you would like to see.  It will not go perfectly. Then, change up the groups and see if that helps. Offer an incentive for staying on-task or showing their work.

4.  Do the best you can with what you are given

Another highly mentioned item on the survey was the general lack of resources.  I totally agree, and that is why we are trying to solve that problem for you (and your students).  However, do the best you can with what you are given. In a dream world, we would all be provided with excellent resources by schools and districts.  In the real world, I would encourage you to use the resources you have to begin working with your students in a small group and a targeted manner. I personally think a personal whiteboard, a dry erase marker, and math manipulatives are an excellent starting place for a small group.  

Do you have any suggestions for how to get started with math intervention?  Please share your thoughts in the comments.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

You are given an internvetion class. Now what? Suggestions, ideas, and four steps for getting started with math intervention. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Get Started with Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-get-started-with-math-intervention/feed/ 1
Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/guided-math-framework-in-math-intervention/ Sat, 24 Nov 2018 12:00:11 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4449 When we first started working on a resource for math intervention, I picked up #allthebooks.  I was quickly becoming Amazon’s favorite customer! Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, was the first one that I dug into.  I liked its very step-by-step approach to small groups and the various sample schedules and routines. Looking for more […]

The post Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When we first started working on a resource for math intervention, I picked up #allthebooks.  I was quickly becoming Amazon’s favorite customer! Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, was the first one that I dug into.  I liked its very step-by-step approach to small groups and the various sample schedules and routines.


Looking for more ideas for math intervention?  Check out this page. 


UTILIZING THE GUIDED MATH FRAMEWORK IN MATH INTERVENTION

The guided math framework can work in both on-level math classes and math intervention classes. See a few thoughts on how to make it work for you! maneuveringthemiddle.com

What is guided math?

“Guided math instruction is a method of teaching in which teachers assess their students formally or informally, and then group them according to their proficiencies at a given skill.” (Guided Math Instruction, p. 21)

Guided math is not a curriculum or a strategy.  It is a framework in which the responsibility of the learning is shifted from the teacher to the student.  For more on that, read our post on the gradual release model. Guided math is one way to formally utilize the gradual release model.

It is made up of specific components that are intertwined to teach a concept.

What are the components of guided math?

Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction, clearly states the various components.  

  • A classroom environment of numeracy
  • Morning math warm-ups
  • Whole-class instruction
  • Guided math instruction with small groups of students
  • Math workshop
  • Individual conferences
  • An ongoing system of assessment

This model is flexible so that teachers can best meet the needs of their individual students.  Students in small groups are able to focus on their specific understanding ask questions, and teachers are able to target their instruction while correcting misconceptions.

Does guided math work in middle school?

I would say yes, with some modifications.  These modifications will depend on the size and length of your class.  Will you be able to implement it with 100% fidelity as the book recommends?  I think that would be a greater challenge.

However, the basic understanding that we as teachers better meet the needs of our students by meeting with them in small groups is 100% applicable to the middle school classroom.  

Advantages of a small group

  • More focused instruction
  • Able to meet the needs of specific students
  • You can actually hear them verbalize their thought process.
  • You can encourage mathematical conversations and using appropriate math vocabulary.
  • You build the relationship quicker.
  • Introverted students are more likely to ask questions.
  • Students will not continue to make the same error over and over again.
  • You can correct a misconception quickly.

What are the challenges of meeting with a small group

  • The lack of time in the classroom
  • The work required to plan more differentiated lessons
  • The challenge of finding engaging activities for students to complete when they are not at the small group table
  • Setting up routines and procedures to allow for smooth transitions and few interruptions

What if I have a math intervention class?

A math intervention class might be the ideal place to incorporate small groups and parts of the guided math model. Students in the class already need differentiation and have gaps to fill, so this is a great solution!

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

The guided math framework can work in both on-level math classes and math intervention classes. See a few thoughts on how to make it work for you! maneuveringthemiddle.com

References

Sammons, L. (2010). Guided math: A framework for mathematics instruction. Huntington Beach, CA: Shell Education.

The post Using the Guided Math Framework in Math Intervention appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
5 Strategies for Building Number Sense https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/strategies-for-building-number-sense/ Sat, 03 Nov 2018 11:00:53 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4197 Last week, I shared my love for the book Developing Numerical Fluency and broke down the idea of number sense.  This week, I wanted to share five strategies for building number sense in the middle school classroom.  Upon preparing for this blog post, I did quite a bit of research and was disappointed to see […]

The post 5 Strategies for Building Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Last week, I shared my love for the book Developing Numerical Fluency and broke down the idea of number sense.  This week, I wanted to share five strategies for building number sense in the middle school classroom.  Upon preparing for this blog post, I did quite a bit of research and was disappointed to see that the vast majority of books on numerical fluency are geared towards K-5 educators.  While I see the importance of a strong foundation, I do see the need for teachers to fill gaps and bring students up to the grade-level standards.


Looking for more math intervention ideas?  Check out this page.


5 Strategies for building Number sense in Middle School Math

Maneuvering Math - a skill based intervention program for grades 6-8

1.  Utilizing Fraction Bars

Fractional parts can be such a tough concept for kids.  They really need to “see” the pieces and understand how they work together.  I love this set of fraction bars because they are large and can be seen across the room.  Your math department needs to have a set of fraction bars, fraction circles, etc. so that each math class has one.  This will be impactful as students learn to visualize each problem and use the most efficient method of solving.

2.  Doubling and Halving

When students are able to quickly double and half a number, they are more successful with various operations and less likely to get bogged down in the details of the algorithm.  

For example, when a student knows that 1.75 can be doubled to 3.5 and then doubled again to become 7, they are more likely to see the relationship in the table and the constant of proportionality.  

When a table begins with an x-value of 2, they are more likely to find y when x=1 efficiently if they are able to halve the y-value.

3.  Visualizing ½

One-half is a huge benchmark value for middle school students.  Is the value greater than or less than ½? Is the value closer to ½ or 1?  By simply being able to answer those questions, often students are able to eliminate wrong answers and problem-solve using estimation and reasonableness.  

When given a number line are they able to identify ½ of the number line?  One-half of the two numbers given? Or even just see the number line in various parts?  If you can find ½, then you can also find ¼ and ¾.

4.  Incorporating Area Models

It wasn’t until I watched Jo Boaler’s video on number sense that I truly understood the value of the area model.  Sure, it makes sense in elementary school as an array, but it has so many applications in middle school!

  • multiplication of whole numbers
  • multiplication of fractions and decimals
  • area of a two-dimensional object
  • the distributive property

I love how the area model is fluid and open-ended with various correct answers.

5.  Utilizing Friendly Numbers

When students struggle, I really try to incorporate the use of friendly numbers.  I cannot tell you how many times I have seen a struggling student try to find 35% of $24.99.  Let’s go with 35% of $25…it is sooo close! I am sure I am not the only one who has seen students struggle with 3.14 as pi.  There is a time and a place for accuracy and precision, but when students are struggling, it is difficult to determine if they are struggling with finding the percent of a number or if they are getting lost in their math.  

Let me know what other strategies for building number sense that you have found useful in the comments below

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

Are your students lacking number sense? 5 strategies for building number sense in middle school math | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Strategies for Building Number Sense appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Number Sense in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/number-sense-in-middle-school/ Sat, 27 Oct 2018 13:00:09 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4165   “I struggle with finding activities to do with all levels of intervention in the classroom. For example, this year in 7th grade math, I had students who couldn’t do multi-digit addition and subtraction, while a few others were flying through it. I try to always review some 6th grade skills in the beginning and […]

The post Number Sense in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
 

“I struggle with finding activities to do with all levels of intervention in the classroom. For example, this year in 7th grade math, I had students who couldn’t do multi-digit addition and subtraction, while a few others were flying through it. I try to always review some 6th grade skills in the beginning and then review and reteach 7th grade skills I’ve covered, but they haven’t mastered. It’s hard finding a good medium, and daily centers are hard to find without spending a TON of time and/or money.”


Developing number sense in middle school can be a struggle! What is numerical fluency? How can you incorporate number sense into grades 6-8?NUmber sense in middle school

Does this sound like you?  It surely sounded like me.

We have been doing quite a bit of research on number sense and numerical fluency, and I couldn’t help but share some of my learning with you.  I especially struggle with finding resources and research to support it in the middle school classroom.

I reference a book called Developing Numerical Fluency by Patsy Kanter and Steven Leinwand below.  This book is written with an emphasis on K-5 math content.   I want to share some excellent points that they make and then provide an application for middle school math content.

What is number sense?

Number sense, also more recently known as numerical fluency is the ability to use numbers in a fluid and flexible manner.  According to Kanter and Leinwand, “Fluency is not a simple idea.  Being fluent means that students are able to choose flexibly among methods and strategies to solve contextual and mathematical problems, they understand and are able to explain their approaches, and they are able to produce accurate answers efficiently.  Fluency builds from initial exploration and discussion of number concepts to using informal reasoning strategies based on meaning and properties of the operations.”  (Developing Numerical Fluency, p. ix)

I can really resonate with this concept of flexibility and use of strategies.  Have you ever had a student ask you a question and you see that they have gone through the motion of the problem, made a mistake, and their answer is out of this world unreasonable?  They are lacking number sense.

Likely you have a student who, when subtracting, tries to borrow when there isn’t a need to borrow.  

These students are moving through the procedures but don’t conceptually understand what they are doing.  This is called having a procedural understanding rather than a conceptual understanding.

Numerical fluency promotes conceptual understanding of numbers and how they relate to one another.  

What are the key understandings of numerical fluency?

In the book, Developing Numerical Fluency, Kanter and Leinwand share nine pivotal understandings.  I strongly encourage you to read the book, so I won’t share them here.  However, I will share my opinions on the key understandings for a middle school student.  

1.  All Quantities are Composed of Parts and Wholes

Can I get an Amen?  Fractional parts may be the most difficult concept for students who struggle with number sense.  The idea that something can be broken into parts, the parts can be added and subtracted, the parts can represent something greater than the whole, the parts can be compared, etc. — all of this is requires extremely abstract thinking.  

For example, “Why does ⅕ times 5 result in a number less than 5 but 5 divided by ⅕ result in a number greater than 5?”

2.  Acquiring the Language of Operations Before Learning Facts

By middle school, students have been exposed to math facts.  However, I was really intrigued by how the authors point out how students often jump to the math and lose the context of the problem.  This is why we see students who struggle with word problems. By emphasizing the process in which a student obtained the solution and why they chose the process, we are building a foundation of numerical fluency.

3.  The Concept of one-half

The book references multiplication by 2, 3, 5, and 10 as a pivotal understanding for K-5 students.  In middle school, I see this as the key understanding of multiplication by ½. Can a student quickly take ½ of a number?  Can they visualize where ½ is on the number line? Do they see that multiplying by ½ and dividing by 2 results in the same value?  Do they know that one-half of an even number is going to result in a whole number, but one-half of an odd number is not?

So they age-old question continues…

How do you build number sense?

First, let’s note that multiplication tables, straight rote memorization, and timed procedures do not build numerical fluency.  They may be one way to assess numerical fluency, but they do not build number sense.

“Numerical fluency develops over time as students engage in active thinking and doing.  They must strategize, reason, justify, and record and report on their thinking.” (Developing Numerical Fluency, p. 19)

Again, Developing Numerical Fluency shares six different processes that can be used to help build numerical fluency.  These strategies are likely ones you incorporate in your classroom. I think the key is ensuring that students are aware of all of the strategies and can utilize them in context.  We can model these strategies using think-alouds, during any direct instruction, during small group instruction, by asking questions that point to these strategies, and provide prompts to encourage students to utilize them in mathematical discourse.

  1. Contextualizing – integrating mathematics in a real-world context
  2. Constructing – utilizing manipulatives and hands-on materials to make connections
  3. Representing graphically or symbolically – sketching or drawing
  4. Visualizing – seeing the math in their brain
  5. Verbalizing – describe thought processes with mathematical vocabulary
  6. Justifying – answering the question of why

Why is number sense important?

As math teachers, we can go on and on and on about the importance of numerical fluency and a strong foundation.  However, I think it’s also important to articulate the real-life application of problem solving and critical thinking.  In an article last year, Dr. Keith Devlin shared the importance of number sense in the 21st century.

I would love to know your thoughts on number sense and how you build number fluency in your classroom.   I am working on a post for next week with various ideas and tips to integrate in your classroom.

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com

 

Developing number sense in middle school can be a struggle! What is numerical fluency? How can you incorporate number sense into grades 6-8? | maneuveringthemiddle.com

References

Kanter, P. F., & Leinwand, S. (2018). Developing numerical fluency: Making numbers, facts, and computation meaningful.

The post Number Sense in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/the-gradual-release-of-responsibility-model/ Sat, 15 Sep 2018 17:56:37 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=4102 You may already be familiar with the gradual release of responsibility model for teaching and learning: “I do, we do, you do it together, you do it alone.”  You may be incorporating it on your campus, in your classroom, or with your small group. Today, I want to share a little bit about what the […]

The post The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
You may already be familiar with the gradual release of responsibility model for teaching and learning: “I do, we do, you do it together, you do it alone.”  You may be incorporating it on your campus, in your classroom, or with your small group. Today, I want to share a little bit about what the gradual release of responsibility model is, different activities that support it, how to implement it in a whole group structure, and how to implement it in a small group structure.


My son got a new puzzle for his birthday.  It was super complex for a four-year-old. There were 16 cubes, all with different pictures on each side, to make 6 different puzzles.  When he sat down to work on it, at first he was frustrated. He didn’t fully understand how to put the puzzle together and couldn’t seem to understand what parts of the puzzle to use.  Together, we sat down, and I modeled my thinking: “Maybe we should find the corners first.” Then, we went on to find the edges and talk through where they could go. We created a process that he slowly was able to think through on his own.  Aren’t our students like that? 


There are several differing theories on how much information to give up front and how much to let students explore and struggle with on their own.  I tend to be in the camp that says, “There is a great time and great content in which both can be applied.”

What is the gradual release of responsibility model?

The gradual release of responsibility model allows for students to take more and more ownership of the content. Here are some tips and ideas for how and when to implement it.

In brief, the gradual release of responsibility model is that in which over the progression of the lesson, the teacher becomes less and less involved and the student takes more and more ownership over the content.  I think this can be incredibly powerful in a math classroom and even more specifically when working with struggling students.

One of the biggest things to note is that this is not a formula with step 1, step 2, etc.  The overall concept is that the student takes more and more ownership over the content, and the teacher is less and less involved.  When designing the lesson, you might plan for students to explore the content together first and then share as a class, where you could summarize and demonstrate your thinking.  

I wanted to share a few different ideas that can be incorporated within each part of the teaching model.

“I Do”

This is also known as the focused instruction portion of the lesson.  In this section, you might see a model being presented or the teacher modeling their thinking with a think-aloud or a direct explanation.  

“We Do”

This is also known as guided practice or guided instruction.  In this section, you might hear the teacher facilitating questions and discussion, and you might see students answering questions and asking questions of each other.  This is a collaboration of everyone in the classroom.

“You Do It Together”

This is also known as “y’all do it” here in Texas, or collaborative learning.  In this section, you would see students working together, dialoguing, communicating their thinking, and problem solving.  As a teacher, we should try not to intervene too quickly. We are questioning students through their struggles and then allowing them to come to the solution.

Based on the conversations and dialogues that I have with teachers, I would venture to guess that this is the first step to “go” when we are rushed for time, running behind in the calendar planning, or have shorter class periods.  

I would propose that this is one of the most critical components of the gradual release model.

“You Do It”

This is also known as independent practice.  In this section, you might see students working independently in some form of practice (homework, worksheets, computer-based practice, etc).  This is an opportunity for students to see that they are capable and self sufficient, or that they are struggling and ask for help.  This is also a great time for teachers to be meeting with students and correcting any small misconceptions.  

Is the gradual release model always in whole group?

It doesn’t have to apply to only whole group settings.  You could do a bit of modeling and then move into small groups while students work collaboratively.  

You could allow students to work together on a new concept and work backwards with a more “You Do It Together, We Do It, I Do It” pacing.  

The students in your class and the content should help you to determine what components of the gradual release model can be utilized.  

Do you have a GT, Pre-AP, or Enrichment class? Then, it is likely you can allow your students to struggle together before you debrief the process as a class.  Is your content more of a review? Start with the “You do” as a pre-assessment and then plan your activities based on those results.

How can the gradual release model be incorporated into small groups?

If you have been reading for long, then you know that I am a huge fan of small group instruction.  You can accomplish so much, correct many misconceptions, provide specific feedback and encouragement, and build relationships with your students all within the context of a small group.  You can also incorporate the gradual release model.

1.  Model your thinking: Struggling students benefit tremendously from hearing how you are problem solving and thinking through the problem.

  • “When I see a problem like this, I ___.”
  • “I noticed that the fractions both have a denominator that _____.”
  • “I know that 4 is divisible by 2, so ____.”
  • “I see that the line goes through the origin, so that make me think ______.”

2.  Question students through the process: There is much power is questioning students rather than telling students.

  • “What do you notice about ______?”
  • “I notice that something isn’t working out right here; what do you see?”
  • “Is there another way to get to the same conclusion?”

3.  Work in groups at the small group table: Even at the small group table, you can incorporate collaboration.

  • Provide questioning prompts.
  • Teach students how to coach each other.
  • Have students check each other’s work before you look at it.
  • Have students work together on the same problem, taking turns on each step.

The gradual release of responsibility model can be flexible to meet the needs of your students and classrooms.  I would love to hear your thoughts in the comments below!

The gradual release of responsibility model allows for students to take more and more ownership of the content. Here are some tips and ideas for how and when to implement it. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

The post The Gradual Release of Responsibility Model appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-teks-resources-for-middle-school-teachers/ Fri, 13 Jul 2018 11:00:31 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3947 Over the past two years, we have developed a math curriculum that is engaging, student-centered, easy to implement for teachers, and aligned to the TEKS! Hooray! As a Texas teacher, it can be difficult to find resources that truly meet the rigor and depth of our Texas Math Standards. One of the things that I […]

The post Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Over the past two years, we have developed a math curriculum that is engaging, student-centered, easy to implement for teachers, and aligned to the TEKS! Hooray! As a Texas teacher, it can be difficult to find resources that truly meet the rigor and depth of our Texas Math Standards.

One of the things that I am passionate about is the alignment to the standards and alignment between the grade levels, which is why we created the unit overviews.  After many requests for the vertical alignment documents that are included in our units, I am happy to be able to deliver them to you. 

Be sure to grab our math TEKS resources by clicking the yellow box below.  

Math TEKS resources can be hard to find! Use our key concept vertical alignment and at-a-glance standards pages to ease your planning! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

MATH TEKS RESOURCES

AT-A-GLANCE

The At-a-Glance pages are a simple way to read and reference the standards.  This is not specific to the STAAR because we teach standards, not the test. I would totally suggest printing them on card stock or laminating them and adding them to your planning binder.  If you own our curriculum, then I am going to include these, as well.

KEY CONCEPT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

Have you ever looked at a vertical alignment document and wanted to poke your eyes out?  The answer is likely yes! There are just soooo many standards between the different middle school grade levels; it gets tooo muddied.  However, I do think there is great value in knowing what your students are coming to you with and where they need to go.

Thus, we created our Key Concept Vertical Alignment.  We focused on the bigger, overarching themes and concepts and left the small details out.  The standards have been summarized, so if you want a more thorough review, then reference those At-a-Glance pages. 🙂

MANEUVERING THE MIDDLE STANDARDS-BASED CURRICULUM

If you like what you see and you or your school is looking for excellent TEKS-aligned resources, then I would love to invite you to learn more about All Access

Math TEKS resources can be hard to find! Use our key concept vertical alignment and at-a-glance standards pages to ease your planning! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Math TEKS Resources for Middle School Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Why You Should Attend a Math Conference https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/why-you-should-attend-a-math-conference/ Wed, 06 Jun 2018 11:58:21 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3355 If you are reading this blog, then chances are that you love teaching; more specifically, you love teaching math! Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn: new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and the list goes on and on. Math conferences are a […]

The post Why You Should Attend a Math Conference appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

If you are reading this blog, then chances are that you love teaching; more specifically, you love teaching math! Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn: new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and the list goes on and on. Math conferences are a place for teachers to sharpen their skills and learn from others in the profession. Maneuvering the Middle will be at one this summer, and we want to see you!

Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn. Math conferences allow teachers to learn new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and more. Read on to learn what math conference Maneuvering the Middle is attending this summer. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Reasons to attend a math conference

WHAT CONFERENCE?

If you are a reader outside of Texas, The National Conference of Teachers of Mathematics has locations across the country.  NCTM has a annual national conference in the spring and several regional conferences in the fall.  Conferences are a great way to learn from others in the profession, hear new ideas, and get a taste for what is going on outside your campus.  Recently, Noelle attended TCEA, ASCD, and CAMT in recent years.

The conference Maneuvering the Middle will be attending in 2018 is The Conference for the Advancement of Mathematics Teaching or CAMT.  “CAMT’s mission is to assist in upgrading the quality of mathematics education in the state of Texas by presenting an annual conference for teachers and supervisors of mathematics designed to improve the knowledge and skills of mathematics teachers and supervisors.” This summer CAMT will be held in the George R. Brown Convention Center from July 16th through July 18th in Houston, Texas.  Last year, Noelle and I taught professional development on Small Group Intervention, and we had a blast.

Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn. Math conferences allow teachers to learn new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and more. Read on to learn what math conference Maneuvering the Middle is attending this summer. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

learn from other great teachers and authors

Session leaders and speakers are teachers with years of experience! I love learning from rockstars within the profession.  You can choose which sessions would benefit you and your students the most.  CAMT is a conference for all grade level teachers, but since we specialize in middle school, these are the three sessions we are the most excited about that are tailored for 6th through 8th grade.

1. Fast Facts and Fractions

“Four out of three students struggle with fractions! And the other 50% struggle with their times tables. Overcoming these two hurdles is essential to success in middle and high school algebra. See how I helped my intervention students master all fraction operations and learn their multiplication facts.”

2. #CloneMe

“Have you ever stressed wondering if the material you left for the sub is being taught correctly? Come see multiple ways to implement videos into your instruction…that can be used for a plethora of activity types within your classroom (i.e. flipped classrooms, intervention, substitute days, and centers/stations).”

3. Grit in Mathematics: Designing Lessons to Cultivate Passion and Perseverance

“…Participants will learn practical ways to infuse their mathematics courses with passion and perseverance in an effort to generate a culture of gritty and inspired students.”

I couldn’t stop at three. Here is one more.

4. Students, Take the Wheel— Driving Personalized Learning with Data

“Teachers have been using formative and summative data to drive their instruction for a long time… What would happen if the students were given that power? What would happen if we allowed them to identify, analyze, and use data from their learning? This session is all about empowering students to accurately assess their current level of proficiency in the classroom and be active agents in their data driven personalized learning.”

There are hundreds of unique sessions that address everything from conceptual learning to management to using technology to using foldables to making math even more fun. You can read about more of the sessions here.  If you don’t see me at the booth, it will be because I am going to be soaking up some knowledge at these sessions.

visit the exhibit halls

Math conferences have exhibit halls that showcase many teacher products and resources that you can see in person.   You can find us at booth 325 in the exhibit hall at CAMT. Here is a peek at last year’s booth and a few pictures of some of our readers who came out to visit us.

Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn. Math conferences allow teachers to learn new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and more. Read on to learn what math conference Maneuvering the Middle is attending this summer. | maneuveringthemiddle.com Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn. Math conferences allow teachers to learn new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and more. Read on to learn what math conference Maneuvering the Middle is attending this summer. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

At our booth, you will be able to see Maneuvering the Middle resources and activities printed and see ideas on how we organize and store materials. We will have raffle prizes, you can take pictures at our photobooth, and we will have some really fun math t-shirts! Mostly, we want to meet you, so please come say hi!!

What math conferences have you attended? Will we get to see you at CAMT?

Teaching and teaching math are a multi-faceted skills that require us to constantly learn. Math conferences allow teachers to learn new strategies, new techniques, new ways to use intervention, new models, and more. Read on to learn what math conference Maneuvering the Middle is attending this summer. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Why You Should Attend a Math Conference appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Extension Ideas for Early Finishers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/extension-ideas-for-early-finishers/ Sat, 24 Mar 2018 11:00:16 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=3217 Even when working with a 50-minute class period, there will be times when students complete their work quickly and need something “to do” for the last few minutes of class.  If you have a longer class period, then likely this happens more frequently, and it’s something to be prepared for. If not, then you will […]

The post Extension Ideas for Early Finishers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Even when working with a 50-minute class period, there will be times when students complete their work quickly and need something “to do” for the last few minutes of class.  If you have a longer class period, then likely this happens more frequently, and it’s something to be prepared for. If not, then you will end up saying something like, “Work on something quietly at your desk.”  Today, I would like to share nine extension ideas for early finishers.

9+ Extension Ideas for Early Finishers

This post is sponsored by Scholastic Magazines. When they reached out to partner for the school year, I was thrilled! All thoughts and opinions are my own.
1. Scholastic Magazines

Having a subscription to Scholastic Magazines can be super helpful when it comes to engaging your students with new information that they are interested in.  The articles are high-interest and written with a middle school student in mind.  I like how they can open a student’s worldview and perspective by piquing their interest with different concepts that aren’t frequently discussed in school.  Honey bees, current movies like A Wrinkle in Time, the Girl Scouts, and icebergs are just a few intriguing topics to learn about!  Students loved the following:

Want to learn more about Scholastic Magazines and their specific features? Read this post.

2. Brain Teasers

Students love brain teasers — from puzzles, to sudoku, to Brain Quest!  Keep a deck of the Brain Quest cards in your classroom, or a sudoku book from the dollar store, in an early finisher section of your classroom.  Students will use their problem-solving skills without even realizing!

3. Interactive Bulletin Boards

Interactive bulletin boards can be as complicated and intricate as you wish!  The simple version could be a set of challenge type problems that are placed in a tic-tac-toe board.  Students use a recording sheet to solve the problems and get three in a row. A more complicated version can include students using Boggle Math, where students use the numbers to create expressions and equations.  Lastly, you could extend beyond math and include character qualities with reading and reflection.

4. Math PROJECTS

If you have the same students who repeatedly finish their work early, then assigning them a project for them to work on over the course of the semester might be worthwhile. Check out our Math Projects to learn more!

5. FDP Flash Cards

Fractions, decimals, and percent conversions are such helpful concepts to have memorized.  Much like multiplication tables, they are highly useful in middle school and can make so many problems and concepts easier.  If you know that ⅛ is 12.5% and 0.125, then you have just saved yourself several minutes dividing and you have more energy to answer the question.  Use these handy cards to practice matching the equivalent forms of the numbers!

6. STEM Online

STEM and coding are very popular in education right now.  They are an excellent way to incorporate math, and they tie directly into a future profession.  Students also can see the fruit of the coding through various apps and websites.  Code.org is a great resource for those of you getting started and is designed for classrooms.  Jump on the coding bandwagon and host an Hour of Code with these great online activities that are free of charge!

7. Webquest – Aligned Extension Activity

If you have access to an iPad or a computer, then utilize the internet for students to take the skills they are learning in class and apply them to the real world.  Learning about percents? Consider asking students to research the different sales tax rates and then determine the different amounts people pay across the country based on a few specific purchases.  Learning about geometry? Consider asking students to use a floor plan tool to create a space that meets specific criteria.

8. Reflections

We know that when students reflect on their learning they are more likely to move their new learning from short-term memory to long-term memory.  By using reflections as an extension activity, we can promote that deep understanding of the concepts learned in class. Students can use simple prompts to reflect on what they have learned.  To get kids more interested, consider having them draw a picture or make a poster to display their thinking.

9. Graphic Novels

Recently, graphic novels have become increasingly popular!  I know that Brave, Spill Zone, and The Time Museum were super popular last year.  If you are new to the idea of graphic novels, then check out this post because it gives a great correlation about how graphic novels can be used to hook kids and to increase their love for reading.  

10. Listen to a Podcast

I absolutely love podcasts!  There are such a wide variety of topics available with different people’s perspectives shared.  From the environment, to storytelling, to learning a new skill, a podcast is a great way for students to continue learning about something they are interested in without interrupting others.  Check out these to get you started:

  • Wow in the World from NPR
  • Science Rocks
  • But Why

I would love to hear other ideas that you utilize in your classroom as extensions for early finishers!  

The post Extension Ideas for Early Finishers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Activities for Engagement: The Scavenger Hunt https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/activities-for-engagement-the-scavenger-hunt/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/activities-for-engagement-the-scavenger-hunt/#comments Sun, 04 Feb 2018 12:00:35 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2856 It should come to no one’s surprise that students like activities. I’m an adult, and I like activities! In fact, I outlined how you could turn any worksheet into an activity here. My particular favorite is the scavenger hunt. Let’s dive into why it is a favorite for both my students and me. ACTIVITIES FOR ENGAGEMENT: […]

The post Activities for Engagement: The Scavenger Hunt appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

It should come to no one’s surprise that students like activities. I’m an adult, and I like activities! In fact, I outlined how you could turn any worksheet into an activity here. My particular favorite is the scavenger hunt. Let’s dive into why it is a favorite for both my students and me.

It should come to no one’s surprise that students like activities. The post will explain why the scavenger hunt activity is a favorite amongst students and teachers, and how you can use it in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

ACTIVITIES FOR ENGAGEMENT:

THE SCAVENGER HUNT

How It Works

Scavenger hunts work like this. You have anywhere from 10 to 20 stations posted around the room. We will define a station as one piece of paper with one problem on it. Each station has a problem on the bottom half and a solution from another station on the top half.

Students go to one station, solve the problem, and use the answer they just found to determine which station go to next. If they do not see their answer on the top of another station, then they will need to rework the problem. A student is finished when they get back to the station where they originally started, thus completing the loop.

Why Students Like It

Students enjoy this activity because it gets them out of their seats and moving around. Students are more engaged in their work, they get to discuss problems with different students than the ones they usually sit by, and it allows them to work at their own speed.

Why Teachers Like It

Besides the reasons listed above, teachers like it because it allows students to self-check. Students don’t need to ask if they are correct or not because they can figure this out on their own.

This is also an opportunity to pull a small group which you can do two ways. You can actually pull 3-5 students and sit them down for a small group lesson or you can travel with a group of students and use your scavenger hunt as the small group lesson.

Lastly, there is very little preparation time that is required to create a scavenger hunt. You just need a set of problems copied on different sheets on paper. The answer can be written on the next station in the stack of paper and then you just have to randomly mix them up when hanging them around your room.

Differentiate with Scavenger Hunts

If you have the time to go above and beyond, then use this activity as an opportunity to differentiate. You could have two different scavenger hunts going at the same time. You print them on different colored paper and assign students (based on their last set of data) to which scavenger hunt they are completing. Example: The pink stations are for those who scored below an 80% on the last quiz, and the yellow stations are for those who scored higher than an 80%. (This will also slow down some of your early finishers.)

Helpful Hints

  • Require students to work a problem again before they can ask for help from you.
  • Give time reminders. Be more specific than, “There are 20 minutes left.” Say, “You should have X amount of problems completed by now.”
  • Have a plan for students who are struggling to stay on task or who get too loud. I print out another copy of the problems that can be completed seated.
  • For larger classes, consider using the hallway or the library so that groups are not too close to each other.

Remember that after you give clear directions, you should model how it should work before students get started. For good measure, have a student repeat the directions back to the entire class. Have you tried scavenger hunts in your classroom before?

It should come to no one’s surprise that students like activities. The post will explain why the scavenger hunt activity is a favorite amongst students and teachers, and how you can use it in your math classroom. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Activities for Engagement: The Scavenger Hunt appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/activities-for-engagement-the-scavenger-hunt/feed/ 4
How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2017 15:43:47 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2833 When I begin to teach part, whole, and percent problems, I explain to my students that there is nothing that I teach in my class that I use more often in my real life.  Students reflect on where they see percents: the grocery store, sales and discounts, and their grades. 6.RP.A.3.C Find a percent of a […]

The post How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
When I begin to teach part, whole, and percent problems, I explain to my students that there is nothing that I teach in my class that I use more often in my real life.  Students reflect on where they see percents: the grocery store, sales and discounts, and their grades.

6.RP.A.3.C Find a percent of a quantity as a rate per 100 (e.g., 30% of a quantity means 30/100 times the quantity); solve problems involving finding the whole, given a part and the percent.

6.5(B) Solve real‐world problems to find the whole given a part and the percent, to find the part given the whole and the percent, and to find the percent given the part and the whole, including the use of concrete and pictorial models.

HOW TO TEACH PART, WHOLE, AND PERCENT PROBLEMS

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

FIRM FOUNDATION OF PROPORTIONS

Before I teach finding part, whole, and percent, students have already practiced and been tested on proportional relationships and unit rates. They are proficient at reading a word problem and setting up a proportion.  What I finally got correct this year is the importance of setting up the labels. I am not talking about writing part/whole; I am referring to describing what the part is in relation to describing the whole.  Example: number of girls/total students.  If students understand that the part is related to the percent by means of the label, then they will be so much more successful in setting up the percent proportion correctly and with more confidence.

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com
SEQUENCE OF TEACHING THE SKILL

Since this is a TEKS readiness skill and a skill with heavy real-world application, I think that it is important to spend several days covering it. Here is an example of how I would sequence the skill over the course of a couple of days.

  • Day 1: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Percent
  • Day 2: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Part
  • Day 3: Percent of a Quantity – Finding the Whole
  • Day 4: Percent of a Quantity – Mixed

Once students are comfortable solving for each piece in isolation, they need to practice determining which piece they are solving for when the problem type is mixed up. Typically, I give students three problems that are very similar and ask them, “Are we solving for the part, for the whole, or for the percent?” Allow students to grapple with the three different problems and ask them how they know.  This really is key!  If a student can decipher what they are solving for and what the given information is, then it just becomes a multiplication and division problem.  Consider using my prefered problem solving model here.  

1. Mrs. Brack has just set up her Christmas tree.  50 percent of her ornaments are red.  If she has 30 ornaments, then how many are red?

2. Mrs. Brack is setting up her second Christmas tree.  Her tree consists of  30% red and 70% gold ornaments.  If there are 40 red ornaments, then how many ornaments are on the tree?

3. Mrs. Brack is setting up her third Christmas tree.  If there are 25 red ornaments and 35 gold ornaments, then what percent of ornaments are red?

IDEAS FOR STRUGGLING STUDENTS

I teach students to think of “out of 100” when they see the word percent in the word problem. Students are used to having at least three numbers and solving for an unknown fourth when solving proportion word problems.  This can be a bit of a slippery slope as they get older and the problems get more complex, or if there is a table involved.   

In addition, when they see 60%, they are to immediately write it as a fraction – 60 over 100.

Strip diagrams (or percent bars) play a pivotal role in demonstrating the relationship of the percent to the part and whole.  This conceptual understanding helps your visual learners especially and will also show students how you can use benchmark percents (25%, 50%, and 75%) to estimate the answer. 

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Lastly, use the friendliest numbers you can when introducing the skill!

ANCHOR CHARTS IDEAS

The percent proportion is a helpful tool for students to reference.  I point to it often and I leave it up throughout the year since it is a skill I heavily spiral. In addition, an anchor chart that lists all of the factor pairs of 100 can really help students who struggle solving the proportion using a scale factor.

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

COMMON MISCONCEPTIONS

  • Students placing a percent number over another number besides 100
  • Unclear if solving for part or whole
  • Not fully answering the question; students find the percent but then do not go back and ensure that is what the question is asking for
  • Working with percents that are greater than 100 can sometimes throw students for a loop

Do you need resources for teaching percentages to your middle school students? Try All Access!

 

You can see tips on how to teach inequalities, proportional reasoning, ratios, and fractions/decimals/percents.  What are some ways you teach part, whole, percent?  What other middle school math concepts would you like for us to write about?

Part, whole, and percent problems can be a problem for teachers to teach! Here are ideas for implementation and tips to help every student master the skill. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Teach Part, Whole, and Percent appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/how-to-teach-part-whole-percent-problems/feed/ 4
Using Calculators in Middle School https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-calculators-in-middle-school/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-calculators-in-middle-school/#comments Tue, 31 Oct 2017 15:49:16 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2747 Currently, I am teaching operations with decimals, and I have relied on calculators HEAVILY to check my work. Confession: When I was creating my answer key for a lesson on multiplying decimal numbers by decimal numbers with many, many digits, I first did all the math by hand and then went back to check using […]

The post Using Calculators in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Currently, I am teaching operations with decimals, and I have relied on calculators HEAVILY to check my work. Confession: When I was creating my answer key for a lesson on multiplying decimal numbers by decimal numbers with many, many digits, I first did all the math by hand and then went back to check using a calculator. My paper was not error-free! Calculators are such useful tools for anyone who is working in math/science/engineering/completing projects in the house, and we should teach our students when and how to use them.

Note: Don’t we find it ironic that teachers spend years teaching students math skills that can be completed using a calculator and then they get to 8th grade/high school, they are handed a calculator? Without proper training, students can use a calculator recklessly, trusting whatever answer is provided without using the number sense that all prior teachers tried to instill.

In one classroom I observed, the teacher would often use the phrase, “The calculator is only as smart as its operator.” A sly way of saying that the calculator will give you the answer to the problem that you input, but if you input the problem incorrectly, you still will have an incorrect answer. Yikes!

CALCULATORS IN THE MIDDLE SCHOOL CLASSROOM

Calculators in middle school are useful, but are only as accurate as the person using them. Teachers must guide students in using this tool. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

For Students with IEPS

In my middle school classroom, I have around 10 calculators that are available to students with IEPs. (Be careful to make sure that you are allowing only the students who have this aid listed on their IEP to use calculators.) They grab them as soon as class starts and use them throughout the lesson. Whether you have a co-teacher or a SPED teacher who pushes in, its a good idea to make sure that one of you spends time showing students how they can use their calculators in the context of the lesson.

Calculators are dangerous tools when students do not have proper training. I see this most commonly when students are dividing. For so long, students have learned that when you divide, the largest number is what is typed in first. In sixth grade, that is no longer true.

At the end of class, students put their calculators back in the bin and they are ready for the next class. (One year I tried to loan out calculators for students to use at home, but students left them at home so frequently, I stopped.)

Calculator Organization

Since I have so few calculators that are used, I store my calculators in one of these boxes.   I number the back of the calculators to correspond with table numbers and to keep track if any are borrowed. Ms. Henry uses a caddy similar to this.  I used a system like Type-A Mathland’s when I used the more expensive TI graphing calculators. It is super easy to see if all of the calculators have been returned at the end of class.

Calculators are useful tools in life & the classroom. Teachers need to teach students how to them because calculators are only as accurate as the operator. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Thanks, Type-A Mathland for allowing us to share this great idea!

For Days When the Skill Isn’t Computation

While students practicing computation is always a good thing, sometimes it is not the most important thing. One unit that I allow students to use calculators (for a period of time–not all of the time) for is geometry. While I am teaching substituting into a formula, identifying the height in a triangle and a parallelogram, and the sum of the angles in a triangle, the calculation seems secondary. Yes, I want students to practice calculating the area of the triangle, but they have 2-3 skills to master before they can do that.

For Students to Check Their Work

Similar to my example above, calculators are great for students to check their work. You could have students use calculators to check their work after completing an assignment. If students’ answers are not the same as the calculator answer, students should go back and identify their error. This helps validate the purpose in using calculators — they are a tool to turn to for help, not easy answers.

The Calculator Test

Note from Noelle: While teaching one section of Algebra 1 my first year, I taught with a very experienced teacher. She would require students to take a calculator test about 2-3 weeks into school in order to earn the right to use a calculator. It was her way of ensuring that students had the appropriate number sense background to move forward. I can see why this is so beneficial, especially when you are solving equations with rational numbers and so on.

Calculators serve a very specific purpose in the math classroom: for students to use them as one of the many tools they have in their learning toolbox. Do you use calculators in your middle school classroom? If so, when and how?

Calculators in middle school are useful, but are only as accurate as the person using them. Teachers must guide students in using this tool. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using Calculators in Middle School appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-calculators-in-middle-school/feed/ 4
Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/#comments Sun, 10 Sep 2017 11:00:37 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2683 Today, I am breaking down vertical alignment and its importance in our curriculum.   STEP-BY-STEP VERTICAL ALIGNMENT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT FIRSTHAND It was 2008, almost every female student was reading Twilight, and I was beginning my second year of teaching and my first year in sixth grade.  I clearly remember thinking, “I should do a warm […]

The post Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Today, I am breaking down vertical alignment and its importance in our curriculum.  

STEP-BY-STEP VERTICAL ALIGNMENT

What does vertical alignment really mean? Breaking down the concept of vertical alignment and ideas for working together as a PLC to ensure your curriculum is aligned.

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT FIRSTHAND

It was 2008, almost every female student was reading Twilight, and I was beginning my second year of teaching and my first year in sixth grade.  I clearly remember thinking, “I should do a warm up to practice division so I can see where they are at.”  Well, what I thought would be a quick warm up turned into a great lesson for me in vertical alignment, when a student shared that the answer was “six remainder five.”  

What on earth?  Who uses remainders?  Are those even a real thing?  

Well, apparently eleven year-olds still use remainders.

You see, the year prior I had taught seventh grade, and students were required to multiply and divide decimals, so it only seemed natural that a student would know to add a decimal and zero in the event the quotient didn’t go in evenly.  My lack of experience with the curriculum led to a small detour in the lesson and a big learning moment for me.  

I had to understand where my students were when they left fifth grade.         

WHAT IS VERTICAL ALIGNMENT?

According to Dr. Jason Perez, “Vertical alignment is the process of organizing curriculum from one grade level or content area to the next.”

The standards are a great place to begin, though not flawless.  Vertical alignment includes combing through the standards and determining where a student is coming from and where they need to be at the end of the year.  This ensures that you are adequately prepared to introduce the concept with some sort of familiarity for the students and that you have taught the full extent of the standard.  

Additionally, I would suggest that it also includes a bit more discussion amongst your team and department.  How will you teach long division?  Will students be taught partial quotients the year prior?  Are you familiar with partial quotients so that you can connect that to the standard algorithm?  

In general, this helps with brain development when we can help students make those connections.

WHY IS VERTICAL ALIGNMENT IMPORTANT?

First, you are less likely to be caught off guard when your students are doing some strategy you aren’t familiar with or to end up in my warm up situation, where your plan has gone awry.  More importantly, though, your students are going to be more successful!  They are going to be prepared to move seamlessly (okay, maybe not seamless) from one grade level to the next.  There will be fewer gaps in the curriculum and students will be able to see how the content builds.  

I also think that the time and work required to vertically align the curriculum is valuable in team building and really working together as a PLC.  I think it opens up the doors for collaboration, which is good for students and teachers.  

IDEAS FOR VERTICALLY ALIGNING CURRICULUM

1.  Set aside a chunk of time

If your curriculum is lacking in this area or if you have a large department, then you really should expect this to take a while.  Do not attempt to accomplish this within a PLC.  I would suggest a half day to get started.  Some principals have professional development dollars to hire subs or perhaps you could use a staff development day to accomplish this.  

2.  Don’t start from square one

There are already great resources so that you are not starting from zero.  If you use Maneuvering the Middle Curriculum, there is a small vertical alignment component within each unit overview.  

This will give you a great starting point so that you can see the grouping of content.

 
3.  Attack each unit one at a time

Now that the standards have been grouped into like content or a unit, then this is where the fun comes in.  Discuss within collaboration what students are responsible for at that grade level.  A fun way to do this is to have each grade level summarize the content and then share out.  Use a timer to keep everyone on track and moving through the content.  

4.  Jot ideas down on chart paper

Next, you might consider placing a piece of chart paper for each unit with the standards around the room.  Using various colored markers teachers, can jot down the different ways they teach content.  This gives a very non-threatening way to share ideas, which can be discussed as time allows.  It keeps one person from dominating the conversation and keeps everyone on task.  A facilitator could then share out, and if clarification is needed, a specific team member could contribute more details.

5.  Build on it each year

Remember that this doesn’t have to be perfect helps everyone to feel accomplished and to take steps in the right direction without feeling overwhelmed.  

This process will not only improve the vertical alignment on your campus, but it will also provide a time to sharpen content knowledge in a collaborative environment.  #winning

How does your campus ensure your curriculum is vertically aligned?  What benefits do you see from vertical alignment?

What does vertical alignment really mean? Breaking down the concept of vertical alignment and ideas for working together as a PLC to ensure your curriculum is aligned. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Step-by-Step Vertical Alignment appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/vertical-alignment/feed/ 2
Middle School Math Skills Students Must Master https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/middle-school-math-skills-students-must-master/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/middle-school-math-skills-students-must-master/#comments Sun, 20 Aug 2017 11:00:21 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2627 Though I currently teach 6th grade math, I am well versed in high school math. I taught both Algebra 1 to freshman and Algebra 2 to sophomores a couple of years ago. Time and time again, I found myself reteaching math concepts students should have been proficient in before entering high school. The middle school […]

The post Middle School Math Skills Students Must Master appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Though I currently teach 6th grade math, I am well versed in high school math. I taught both Algebra 1 to freshman and Algebra 2 to sophomores a couple of years ago. Time and time again, I found myself reteaching math concepts students should have been proficient in before entering high school. The middle school transition to high school is going to be hard, but it shouldn’t be because of math.

I’ve compiled a list of middle school math skills students master master to thrive in high school.

There are middle school math skills students must master to thrive in high school. This post discusses the 7 most important skills. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

7 Middle School Math Skills Students MUST Master

In addition to that, I taught ACT preparation as part of Algebra 2, and I found many of the problems I encountered to be skills that students learned in middle school but more rigorous. In fact, I looked at three ACT practice tests and found that around 40% of problems are covered or introduced in grades 6, 7, and 8.

  1. Order of Operations – introduced in Grade 5. Any substitution problem most likely will involve order of operations. The quadratic formula is one giant order of operations problem.
  2. Proportions – introduced in Grade 6. Considering that many linear equations represent proportions, proportions are foundational for high school algebra.
  3. Integer Operations – This is introduced in 6th grade, but students still struggle up through high school. Though access to a calculator should help with this skill, I would still see students distribute a negative number incorrectly.
  4. Solving Equations – introduced in the elementary grades. If students have a firm grasp on how to isolate the variable using inverse operations, then they will be more successful when the variable is on both sides or when they are solving systems of equations.
  5. Measures of Central Tendency and Variability – introduced in Grade 6. Mean, median, mode, and range will follow students from Grade 6 to the ACT. On the practice ACT I took, I saw at least two questions regarding this skill. Armed with a calculator, there is nothing challenging about this skill — except remembering what each word means.
  6. Percents – introduced in Grade 6. The mistake I saw most often when solving problems involving percents was that students struggled to move the decimal the correct direction the correct number of times. Though I don’t think percents are explicitly expounded on more in high school, it is one of the most applicable real-world skills.
  7. Substitution – introduced in Grade 6. Substitution is foundational for success not only in high school math but in high school science as well. Students who can substitute values can be highly successful checking their work in Algebra and using formulas in Geometry.

High school teachers, what skills would you add to this list? If we can ensure that students are stronger with these math concepts, then we can feel relief knowing that we have made the middle school transition to high school easier for our students.

There are middle school math skills students must master to thrive in high school. This post discusses the 7 most important skills. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Middle School Math Skills Students Must Master appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/middle-school-math-skills-students-must-master/feed/ 6
Using Google Forms in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-google-forms-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-google-forms-math/#comments Wed, 26 Jul 2017 11:00:17 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2606 If you have access to technology in your classroom, and you aren’t using Google Forms to collect work from students, then this post is for you! My school is increasing the number of Chromebooks per grade level, so I will be able to use Google Forms in math more proactively. I researched in preparation for this […]

The post Using Google Forms in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
If you have access to technology in your classroom, and you aren’t using Google Forms to collect work from students, then this post is for you! My school is increasing the number of Chromebooks per grade level, so I will be able to use Google Forms in math more proactively. I researched in preparation for this next school year, and I thought I would share my newfound knowledge with you all.

We have written an updated post about Google Forms. Check it out here.

USING GOOGLE FORMS IN MATH

Google Forms is an excellent way to gather data in the math classroom. This post will discuss what Google Add-ons will improve your Google Forms in math. What is Google Forms?

Google Forms allows people to gather data electronically. In a classroom, teachers create a Form (or an assignment) with a variety of questions (paragraph, short answer, or multiple choice) that can be shared through email to their students. Students answer the questions and click submit. Teachers can look at their responses in a Google Sheet and use Google Sheet’s features to sort and organize the data.

Add-Ons Galore!

EquatIO is another free add-on that allows students to “write in” their responses using their mouse. It can be very tricky for students (and teachers) to correctly type in many math symbols. EquatIO allows you to give assessments with short answer responses without fearing lots of questions regarding how to type in an exponent, a radical, or complicated fractions. There is even an option for students to say the answer, and the program transcribes.

Google Forms is an excellent way to gather data in the math classroom. This post will discuss what Google Add-ons will improve your Google Forms in math. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Flubaroo is an add-on that I have written about before. Flubaroo takes the data that has been saved in a Google Sheet and will do the grading for you! Some of its other features include: allowing you to assign different point values to each question and creating a Google Sheet that determines the percentage of students who answered each question correctly. Lastly, you can email individual students their results with the press of a button.

I’m thinking that I will use Google Forms to collect data from my small group. Since I am required to document their progress, this seems like a way to keep all the papers at bay. My small group loves using computers! Now that I know that Flubaroo can do the grading for me, I plan to use it for assessments too! How do you use Google Forms in your classroom?

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Google Forms is an excellent way to gather data in the math classroom. This post will discuss what Google Add Ons will improve your Google Forms in math. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Using Google Forms in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/using-google-forms-math/feed/ 3
Math TED Talks for Teachers & Students https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-ted-talks-for-teachers-students/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-ted-talks-for-teachers-students/#comments Thu, 20 Jul 2017 11:00:07 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2588 TED Talks provide viewers with an opportunity to learn from experts in their field about anything. Their videos provide resources for teachers to learn from other educators and for students to further their thinking in any topic of interest. In fact, a fellow teacher spent a unit teaching students to give their own TED Talks […]

The post Math TED Talks for Teachers & Students appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

TED Talks provide viewers with an opportunity to learn from experts in their field about anything. Their videos provide resources for teachers to learn from other educators and for students to further their thinking in any topic of interest. In fact, a fellow teacher spent a unit teaching students to give their own TED Talks about a topic they felt passionate about. Students spent time researching, writing, and then giving their own TED Talk. Today, I have rounded up a couple TED Talks for teachers from which I personally have taken something away. I have also found a couple that can be used in the classroom to engage students in math.

MATH TED TALKS FOR TEACHERS AND STUDENTS

TED Talks can be a helpful tool to strengthen your teaching practices. I've complied a list of my favorite math TED Talks for teachers and students. | maneuveringthemiddle.comFor teachers:

1. Title: Let’s Use Video to Reinvent Education
Length: 20 minutes
Watch: 6:00 – 12:00
Summary: In this video, Salman Khan, the creator of Khan Academy, discusses the implication of using video to teach students. He states that “one size fits all” lectures do not work for everyone. He suggests an alternative way to learn: Students watch videos teaching a new skill as homework and come to class ready to practice collaboratively with their teachers and classmates. He explores two math classes that are using this model and shows how teachers can use Khan Academy’s data centered dashboard for intervention.

2. Title: Every Kid Needs a Champion
Speaker: Rita Pierson
Length: 7 minutes
Watch: All of it. It’s all so good!
Summary: Rita speaks about her experience building relationships with her students. My personal favorite is what she taught her students to say: “I am somebody. I was a somebody when I came. I’ll be a better somebody when I leave. I am powerful and I am strong. I deserve the education I get when I came here. I have things to do, people to impress, and places to go.”

3. Title: Math Class Needs a Makeover

Speaker: Dan Meyer
Length: 11 minutes
Watch: 6:30 – 11:09

Summary: “ Today’s math curriculum is teaching students to expect — and excel at — paint-by-numbers classwork, robbing kids of a skill more important than solving problems: formulating them. Dan Meyer shows classroom-tested math exercises that prompt students to stop and think.” I watched this video in a professional development and was inspired to help less and question more when it came to my teaching practice.

FOR STUDENTS:

4. Title: How to Find a Wonderful Idea
Length: 7 minutes
Speaker: OK Go
Summary: OK Go, which is famous for the choreographed music video of the band dancing on treadmills, discusses how they come up with the ideas for their music videos. They show two of their videos which are really engaging for students but, more importantly, discuss the mathematical probability of their constructed Rube Goldberg machines succeeding without error.

5. Title: 3 Ways to Spot a Bad Statistic
Speaker: Mona Chalabi
Length: 11 minutes
Summary: This TED Talk would be a strong start for a statistics unit. Mona Chalabi uses current events to explain that numbers cannot always be trusted. She provides three questions to decipher whether a statistic is truly trustworthy. There are many references to current events that you may have to pause the video to explain, but it is well worth watching.

6. Title: Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance
Speaker: Angela Duckworth
Length: 6 minutes
Summary: I showed my students this video once at the beginning of the school year, and next year I will show it more often. Students will learn that effort is more important than natural ability when it comes to math. I say it all the time, but I think it means more coming from a psychologist. 🙂

With over 2000 videos and more added every day, I will never have the time to watch them all, so I need your help. What TED Talk for teachers has inspired your teaching practice? What TED Talk have you showed to your class?

TED Talks can be a helpful tool to strengthen your teaching practices. I've complied a list of my favorite math TED Talks for teachers and students. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Math TED Talks for Teachers & Students appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-ted-talks-for-teachers-students/feed/ 1
Math Intervention and Number Sense Roundup https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-and-number-sense-roundup/ Thu, 13 Jul 2017 21:27:26 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2570 This week Noelle and I presented on Implementing Small Group Instruction at the Conference for the Advancement of Mathematical Teaching. It was exciting to share what we have learned in the classroom with other teachers, so they too can implement small group instruction more effectively! I thought a little small group roundup would be a […]

The post Math Intervention and Number Sense Roundup appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

This week Noelle and I presented on Implementing Small Group Instruction at the Conference for the Advancement of Mathematical Teaching. It was exciting to share what we have learned in the classroom with other teachers, so they too can implement small group instruction more effectively!

I thought a little small group roundup would be a good refresh before the school year starts for those who did not attend the conference. I have also been researching number sense this summer as I think of my classroom’s goals for next year, so I thought I would share some of those resources. They go hand in hand, right?

MATH INTERVENTION AND NUMBER SENSE ROUNDUP

Here is a roundup of posts around the internet and our blog regarding small groups, math intervention and number sense in middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Tips for Small Groups 

Read this if you have little or no experience with small group intervention. You will learn some routines and procedures that will set you and your students up for success.

Organizing Math Intervention

Read this blog post if you have the routines down but could use some help organizing and tracking data. You can also find printables for tracking the overwelming amount of data which is a huge help.

Intervention Schedule 

If you are teaching an intervention class in addition to a regular math block this year, then this post is for you.

Understanding Number Sense

I found the strategies to build students’ number sense particularly helpful. I plan on asking my students to compute mentally more often next year.

Fluency without Fear 

Jo Boaler’s book Mathematical Mindsets is a must-read for every math teacher, but if you need a condensed version of the book, then read this blog post for many ideas on developing students’ number sense.

Have you read anything this summer regarding math intervention and number sense that have been helpful? What strategy are you going to implement with your small groups in your classroom this year?

Here is a roundup of posts around the internet and our blog regarding small groups, math intervention and number sense in middle school. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Math Intervention and Number Sense Roundup appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
20 Must Have Math Teacher Supplies https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/20-must-have-math-teacher-supplies/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/20-must-have-math-teacher-supplies/#comments Tue, 27 Jun 2017 16:34:44 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2502 In the summer, I excitedly anticipate the release of classroom decorations to the Target Dollar Spot. Since that is weeks away, I thought I would use my energy to create a list of supplies that every math teacher should have in their classroom. All of these items can be found in use in my classroom […]

The post 20 Must Have Math Teacher Supplies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

In the summer, I excitedly anticipate the release of classroom decorations to the Target Dollar Spot. Since that is weeks away, I thought I would use my energy to create a list of supplies that every math teacher should have in their classroom. All of these items can be found in use in my classroom any given day (with the exception of the whiteboard clipboards which I will be purchasing this year). Here are 20 of my favorite must have math teacher supplies.

20 Supplies for the math classroom. - Must have math teacher supplies to stock your classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

20 must have math teacher supplies

1. Tiny Clear Ruler/Protractor

A 6 inch ruler is great for connecting two points on a graph especially if you are a perfectionist. It’s translucent, so students can see what you are doing, but it is small enough to live in your pen cup without tipping it over.

2. Calculators

We all have those lessons with complicated multiplication and division, but the skill you are teaching has nothing to do with multiplication or division, so you bring out the calculators. I like to have enough that each partner set has one. The 5th grade teacher and I share a set since we rarely need them at the same time.

3. Dry erase clipboards or at least whiteboards

This might be the item that I am most excited about! These whiteboard clipboards would allow students to travel with their papers on the clipboards to stations and then use the whiteboards at those stations for extra work space. I’m already obsessed!

4. MagneT tiles

My nephew received these magnet tiles as a birthday present, and as I played with them, I realized how helpful these would be to students’ conceptual understanding of nets and three-dimensional figures, everything from spatial reasoning to understanding how formulas are derived.

5. Fraction/decimal Tiles

These tiles have fractions on one side and decimals on the other side. These are great to show equivalent fractions in your small group and can be super helpful when you are introducing any fraction or decimal operations.

6. Fraction Strips

Fraction strips are similar to tiles but these are magnets! Great for the whiteboard.

7. Counters

One year, I tried to use counters that I made from paper. Those lasted one day. Plastic or foam counters are the way to go. I use these to introduce addition and subtraction with integers. They can also be used in place of a coin when you get to probability.

8. Snap cubes

I use snap cubes to teach volume. There is something about proving why a formula works to students that shows how magical math really is. I use the formula to calculate the volume of a rectangular prism, and then I pull apart the shape to count the cubes that made up the shape.

9 and 10. Graph Stamp or Graph Sticky Notes

The stamp is especially helpful in the upper middle school grades. If a student needs to sketch a coordinate plane, they can whip out the stamp, and they have a perfect graph. I use the graph sticky notes often during my statistics unit. I also will pass these out if students need a little extra space for one or two problems.

11. Measuring Tape

If you have taught middle school, then you probably know that yardsticks are not to be trusted in the hands of middle schoolers. Measuring tape does the job and is much easier to store.

12. Geometry Shapes

I like to use these to explain composite shapes. You can also use them to show how the triangle formula is derived.

13. Algebra FOAM TILES

Algebra tiles are perfect for your expressions and equations unit! You can easily use these to explain how to simplify expressions and visually see the combining of like terms. When you get to solving equations, I liked to have students write with a dry erase marker on their desk as we did the step visually with the tiles.

14. Foam Dice

Soft dice are a great tool to have in the classroom. Not only can you use them while teaching probability and statistics, but you can also use them to practice quick math and spice up a worksheet. Plus, they are quiet.

15. Set of Fancy Dice

These dice have a variety of numbers on each side. Students can use these dice to roll a set of numbers where they will have to find the greatest common factor or least common multiple. My student desks are numbered, so I use my die to cold call on students.

16. Playing cards

Playing cards can be used in a variety of ways. I used them this year to play the Integer Game.  One year I had my students play 31-derful as an icebreaker on the first day.

17. Individual number lines

I purchased a set, laminated them, and hole punched them to store on a hook, and my students used these all the time. For two entire units, these stayed out on student desks. I did have to set some expectations, but it was worth it.

18. Scotch® expressions tape

Colored tape can be used to tape a coordinate plane on the floor or enlarge a number line. You can see how you can use tape for an ordering numbers activity here, and how I use it to set up my whiteboard to organize our daily schedule.

19. Beach ball

Write some math facts on this ball and have students toss it around. Whatever problem is facing the student when they catch it is the problem they need to solve. You can have this on hand, and whenever students are feeling wiggly, use this activity as a brain break.

20. Measuring Cups

Whenever I teach converting units of measurement, I like to have the actual units on hand. You could buy a set to have in your classroom, or you can bring pieces from your kitchen.

What supplies do you use in your math classroom? Any others that you would add to this list?

20 Supplies for the math classroom. - Must have math teacher supplies to stock your classroom! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 20 Must Have Math Teacher Supplies appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/20-must-have-math-teacher-supplies/feed/ 8
Alternative Assessments in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/#comments Tue, 13 Jun 2017 11:00:28 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=2416 Test days are equally as exciting as they are dread inducing.  I communicate to students that it is their opportunity to show me what they know, but then I begin to feel doubtful.  Today, I am going to share four alternative assessments in math that you might consider using. What if they all fail?  Did […]

The post Alternative Assessments in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Test days are equally as exciting as they are dread inducing.  I communicate to students that it is their opportunity to show me what they know, but then I begin to feel doubtful.  Today, I am going to share four alternative assessments in math that you might consider using.

What if they all fail?  Did I review this concept enough? Did they study? Is the test too hard?  Is the test too easy?  What if they don’t use their strategies?  

I also feel frustrated when students who were really excelling the entire unit end up with a grade that did not reflect what they knew.  We all have those learners in our classroom who can perfectly articulate how to solve a variety of problems, but when it comes to a test, they underperform.  

Sometimes a multiple choice or free response test is not the best way to assess what our students know and what they have learned.  As teachers, we use a variety of strategies to reach our students–and we can do the same when it comes to the assessment!

Students learn in a variety of ways and teachers should assess their learning in a variety of ways. Check out 4 alternative assessments in math to spice up the way you gauge student understanding. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

ALTERNATIVE ASSESSMENTS IN MATH

1. Mini Quizzes

Quizzes are like the little sister of the summative test, but they can be useful in units that are really long, and with topics that really build on themselves.  I typically like to use mini quizzes when I cover a standard like 6.3(E) multiply and divide positive rational numbers fluently.  Positive rational numbers include numbers with decimals, fractions, and mixed numbers; division with decimals includes the decimal in both the divisor and the dividend.  This standard alone might take up to three weeks to teach, so I would prefer 3-4 quizzes along the way.  Another benefit to using multiple quizzes instead of one test is that you do not lose an entire class period to testing, and your grade book will be full. #teacherwin

Consider allowing students to attend tutorials and re-quiz as the unit progresses.  This min quiz style also enables you to pinpoint exactly where the misconception lies and address it quickly.

2. Projects

Whenever I give students surveys to assess how my class is going, the most frequent response I receive is that students would like to complete more projects in class.  I love projects too, and I find that projects as an alternative assessment allow creative students to shine!  Although students can be more invested in projects, it is important to set up a clear rubric with a clear criteria for success.  It will make grading more efficient and organized.  I typically use a project to assess understanding in geometric concepts.  

3. Performance Tasks

Performance tasks as an alternative assessment answers the question, “When are we ever going to use this?”  Performance tasks allow students to think critically and apply their content understanding to solve real world problems.  Similar to projects, grading can be challenging without a rubric and criteria for success.  I have used a performance task to assess understanding in percents with tax, tip, and discount.  

A great tip is to make this a task that can take no more than one or two days.  One year I made the mistake of handing out markers only to find out that there were several students who were spending too much time “decorating”. 🙂  Now, students can complete the performance task as a rough draft and earn supplies if they would like to extend the assessment further.

4. Google Forms

Google forms isn’t necessarily an alternative assessment, but it can be an alternative way to collect the information that is assessed.  There are two ways to utilize Google Forms based on your familiarity.  

Basic

The easiest would be to create a form that acts as a scantron.  The students would still show their work on paper and the responses would still be there.  Students would then just submit the answer for question 1, 2, 3, etc.  As a teacher this means that you are going to create a form with the questions and then click “settings” and “turn on form”.  This will allow you create a key and assign points to each question.

Advanced

You can take your assessments and actually type them into Google Forms, so it’s more like a true online assessment with the question and answer choices on the computer.  This is more time consuming but if you are a 1:1 school or have computer access, it might be nice to have year after year.

BONUS: Students create the assessment

To be honest, this is not my favorite option.  However, I know that many teachers rave about allowing their students to create an assessment.  When students create the test it provides buy-in to the content and ownership over their assessments.  I would suggest asking students for test-like questions and then compiling them.  This would allow you some final oversight to ensure all of the material was tested and weighted appropriately.   

What are some of the alternative assessments in math that you already use?  Which alternative assessments are you willing to try this next school year?

Students learn in a variety of ways and teachers should assess their learning in a variety of ways. Check out 4 alternative assessments in math to spice up the way you gauge student understanding. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Alternative Assessments in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/alternative-assessments-math/feed/ 2
7 Ways to Use Khan Academy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/#comments Thu, 17 Nov 2016 16:55:11 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1931 Khan Academy is an incredible resource for your classroom!  You can see how some tips for starting Khan Academy in your classroom, and I have outlined ways to use Khan Academy for differentiating instruction.  If you aren’t ready to take the full plunge into the world of Khan, dip your metaphorical toes into the shallow […]

The post 7 Ways to Use Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Khan Academy is an incredible resource for your classroom!  You can see how some tips for starting Khan Academy in your classroom, and I have outlined ways to use Khan Academy for differentiating instruction.  If you aren’t ready to take the full plunge into the world of Khan, dip your metaphorical toes into the shallow end with these ideas.

NOTE: All Khan Academy content is available for free at www.khanacademy.org

Save time and energy by using Khan Academy to simplify your day - 7 ways to implement Khan Academy as a resource for students and math teachers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

7 Ways to Use Khan Academy in the Classroom

1. MAKE UP WORK

There are times when you cannot find missing work for a student, and running another copy is just not going to happen.  In the past, I have assigned Khan Academy to students who are missing work.  They would complete a skill, I would grade it based on how many they got correct, and I did not have to prepare 15 different assignments for the 9 different students who didn’t turn it in.  Seriously, game changer.

2. TUTORING

Similarly, I had a student that was really struggling with some foundational skills.  I made an arrangement with her mom that she could come to my classroom before school at 6:30 am and work on some of these skills.  I did not always have something prepared, and truth be told, there were many mornings I forgot she was coming.  No big deal!  I assigned her recommendations on Khan, and she got to work.  If she was stuck or needed help, I was there to assist, but Khan allowed me to run last minute trips to the office or check in with the other math teacher before the day started.

3. STATIONS

Using Khan Academy as a station is perfect for classrooms that only have access to a handful of computers everyday.  Khan Academy also has an app that can be used on a tablet.  For students who struggled to stay on the correct website, I use an iPad and the guided access setting to make sure that students do not leave Khan Academy to surf the internet.

4. EXTENSION WORK

If you have the same students who complete work fairly quickly and with quality, Khan is a great resource to keep students working on math (and not distracting their teammates).  Though I usually don’t like students working ahead of their partners during practice time, independent practice is a time that I have used Khan as extension work.

5. A RESOURCE FOR PARENTS

Many parents ask me how they can help their students at home.  I point them to Khan.  Every skill is connected to a video, so if students or parents do not know how to complete a homework problem, they can type the topic into Khan Academy and watch a video that teaches the skill.  It also helps me answer the question, “can you give my child more practice problems that we can work on at home?”  Yes.  Khan Academy.

6. WHEN THERE IS A SUB

I give this idea with caution.  My school does not allow the use of technology with substitutes, but I think with the right substitute and with very clear expectations, students would benefit from a day of practicing skills in an engaging way. You can also hold students accountable when you come back by using the ‘time on task’ feature to see how much time your students were actually working.

7. SUMMATIVE TEST REVIEW

Before our end of the year state test, STAAR, Khan is a life-saver for review.  Too many students have misconceptions about too many skills.  I could never cover all of the different material effectively.  One way I differentiate the review is to take a look at my data, and assign recommendations to the students who didn’t master the skills the first time around. This way 28 students can be working on 8 different skills, and they can get immediate feedback.  This leaves me free to pull a small group or conference with individual students.  (The same idea can apply to any test review.)

Sidenote: Khan Academy still requires some prep work before getting started.  Students must create an account and you have to give them the code that connects them to you as their coach.  While this requires some front loading, it will save you time in the long run. You can find more information on how to set up accounts here.

What ways do you use Khan Academy in your classroom?  Before teaching middle school, I taught Algebra II, and I used Khan to teach me concepts all the time.  Don’t forget that it isn’t just for students!  I have also had friends use it to study for the GRE.

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Save time and energy by using Khan Academy to simplify your day - 7 ways to implement Khan Academy as a resource for students and math teachers. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

 

 

The post 7 Ways to Use Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/7-ways-use-khan-academy/feed/ 4
Tips for Using Khan Academy https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-for-using-khan-academy/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-for-using-khan-academy/#comments Sat, 15 Oct 2016 11:00:25 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1845 I have posted about how I have implemented Khan Academy when working with small groups and when differentiating instruction, and we have received comments asking for more Khan Academy know how.  I am certainly not an expert, but after tinkering around with it for about two years, and seeing what has worked and not worked, […]

The post Tips for Using Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I have posted about how I have implemented Khan Academy when working with small groups and when differentiating instruction, and we have received comments asking for more Khan Academy know how.  I am certainly not an expert, but after tinkering around with it for about two years, and seeing what has worked and not worked, I have a few tips for using Khan Academy in the classroom.

Khan Academy is valuable resource for differentiating in the math classroom. Tips for using Khan Academy effectively and efficiently! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

All Khan Academy content is available for free at www.khanacademy.org.

TIPS FOR USING KHAN ACADEMY

1. Hold Students accountable for their work on Khan Academy

Duh, right?  It might be tempting, but you cannot sidestep this one.  My first months I used Khan, I didn’t even check that they were accomplishing anything on Khan Academy.  To make matters worse, I allowed students to listen to music when they were working (rookie mistake), so they then spent 25 minutes making a playlist, and .0008 minutes working on math.  I was so frustrated with myself that I almost abandoned it.  Then, I remembered that stickers solve all classroom woes, and developed this very official and fancy sticker chart.

Khan Academy is valuable resource for differentiating in the math classroom. Tips for using Khan Academy effectively and efficiently! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When students got 5 in a row correct, they raised their hands and got a sticker for this category.  If I was working with a small group, I assigned a student to walk around and give stickers.  If you have a well trusted classroom, you could implement some sort of honor system or have students snap a picture of their “5 in a row” to earn a sticker.

I also held students accountable by watching their time on task.  Khan Academy allows you to check how long students have been working and engaged.  I would project that screen and refresh occasionally to see if there were any students who were not getting their work completed.  I would kindly let them know that they needed to get _______ more minutes complete to earn a _________.  There was also a separate prize (usually getting to be sticker person next time) if you had the most time on task. 🙂  

2. Tell students EXACTLY what to do

You must tell your students exactly what to do, and make sure that it is crystal clear. I snipped this image below from a document that many of the teachers at my school (myself included) used while implementing Khan.  I gave the directions on how to get to Khan website and the assignments every. single. time.  They will not magically remember how to do this.  I used Khan once a week, and they managed to forget every single week.  

Khan Academy is valuable resource for differentiating in the math classroom. Tips for using Khan Academy effectively and efficiently! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

You could make a poster, and save yourself paper, but this was a template on my computer, so I would just need to change the recommendations. Also, over plan.  In the image above, I gave them 6 recommendations to master – mastering means getting 5 questions in row correct.  I gave them 6, prioritizing whatever was placed at 1 and 2.  Giving 6 recommendations, prevented my wonderful students from asking what to do now that they were finished.  If you have higher level students or a higher level class in general you might consider assigning a few key skills and then allowing students to pick something that interests them.

3. Make Sure to Vet the Recommendations

Khan Academy is valuable resource for differentiating in the math classroom. Tips for using Khan Academy effectively and efficiently! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

When you are assigning recommendations to students for practice, you are able to type in any skill!  It is amazing!  In the picture above, I began typing ‘adding fractions.’  Before I assign this recommendation, I make sure to look over an example problem or two to decide if this is what I had in mind (you can do this by hovering over the I icon).  You want to make sure that students can be successful at the rigor that Khan will provide.  The purpose of Khan Academy in my class room was for students to be able to solve problems they have already learned as practice independently.  If you are assigning recommendations that do not really align to the objective or the level of rigor that the students know, then you will have 25 hands in the air, and your small group plans will be thwarted.  

Khan is an incredible resource that  when used effectively can result in more “at bats” than any other resource.  Do you have any tips for using Khan Academy in the classroom?  

SHOP DIGITAL ACTIVITY BUNDLES

Khan Academy is valuable resource for differentiating in the math classroom. Tips for using Khan Academy effectively and efficiently! | maneuveringthemiddle.com

All Khan Academy content is available for free at www.khanacademy.org.

The post Tips for Using Khan Academy appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/tips-for-using-khan-academy/feed/ 2
How to Cultivate a Growth Mindset in Math https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/growth-mindset-math/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/growth-mindset-math/#comments Wed, 13 Jul 2016 08:38:11 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1551 I was at the dentist the other day when I shared that I taught math.  Like clockwork, the dentist shared that he was in fact a ‘math person.’  This is a common occurrence although most respond that they are not ‘math people.’ When did everyone split themselves into two camps of math ability?  I am […]

The post How to Cultivate a Growth Mindset in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I was at the dentist the other day when I shared that I taught math.  Like clockwork, the dentist shared that he was in fact a ‘math person.’  This is a common occurrence although most respond that they are not ‘math people.’ When did everyone split themselves into two camps of math ability?  I am really asking because I do not know, and I would like to rectify this as soon as possible.  Because if adults feel this way, then they must have started believing this lie when they were learning math as students.  Here are a few things that I do to cultivate a growth mindset in my classroom in hopes of engaging the students who do not believe that they are ‘math people.’

Communicating and teaching growth mindset can impact your students tremendously. Three ways to engage reluctant students through growth mindset. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Cultivating Growth Mindset in Math

Communicate That Everyone Can Do It

A fellow math teacher has a poster in her room that says “we are all math people.”  Boom!  That is true.  Everyone is capable of learning, understanding, and believing they are strong in math.  In order for students to believe they can be successful in math, teachers must believe and communicate this fact to their students. How do we communicate this to students?  Posters on the wall are great, but what about sharing valuable research with students?  In Mathematical Mindsets, the author, Jo Boaler, cites a study that occurred over two years-

In one study, seventh grade students were given a survey to measure their mindset, then researchers followed the students over two years to monitor their mathematics achievement.  The results were dramatic, as the achievement of the students with a fixed mindset stayed constant, but the achievement of those with a growth mindset went onward and upward.

This is a great paragraph to share with your students.  My students will read this and studies similar to it, answer reflections questions, and dialogue as a class about the concept of growth mindset.

Build the Relationship

Students will work hard for teachers they like.  You will not get very far by strong arming them into doing math problems.  Sometimes it is necessary to keep them after school or tutoring or to pull from electives because they didn’t complete work or need extra support.  However, this is not something you should rely on consistently.  Here are some ways to build a relationship with these students:

  • Be consistent
  • Greet them, smile at them, use their name
  • Cheer them on
  • Emphasize growth over achievement
  • Focus on the positive: A great rule of thumb – for every correction, you want to have 3 positive interactions

One year, many of my students rode the bus and arrived at school at least 30 minutes before the bell rang for breakfast.  I am a morning person and made myself available for homework help and tutorials each morning.  It just so happened that a group of eight sixth graders, with tons of potential, were there each morning for breakfast having a grand old time in the cafeteria, but would appear in class without their assignments.  My greatest pet peeve is wasting potential.  So I began setting my alarm and marching down to the cafeteria each morning.  I would ask to see completed assignments and then bring any students who had yet to complete it to my room to eat breakfast and work with my other students.  At first, this was a pain.  I was annoyed; they were annoyed.  But, soon over time, it began to be a bit of an inside joke.  They would see me coming and hold up their assignments.   On days that I had a meeting, they would ask me where I was.  They started seeing that their work had a direct impact in their learning.  They wanted to make me proud.  They began to take pride in themselves.  Was this the best strategy?  I’m not sure.  Should they have been more responsible for their learning?  Maybe.  Was it worth the two minute walk to the cafeteria each morning?  Hands down, yes.

Emphasize Growth + Celebrate Successes

Reluctant math students are usually struggling students (if not always).  That is why you must emphasize growth.  My students take benchmarks 3 times a year before they take our state standardized assessment.  When they get their results back, some of my students, will never learn their actual score.  They will only learn how many points they grew from the last benchmark.  And you better believe, I make a huge deal when there is substantial growth.  This usually involves dancing, an announcement to the whole class, and placing their name along with their growth on a bulletin board.  

It’s difficult to talk about growth and communicate the importance of learning and then be judged on an assessment that only measures the number of questions you got right and wrong.  However, by emphasizing the growth that each student made over a period of time, they are more likely to believe that they can grow their mathematical ability.

Do not give up on these students because students can sense when you have.  Push them, encourage them, celebrate with them, and do not settle for anything less than their potential.  If you have more ideas, please share in the comments below.  This is an area that I know is tough to master and we need all the help we can get.  How have you had success in cultivating a growth mindset?

Communicating and teaching growth mindset can impact your students tremendously. Three ways to engage reluctant students through growth mindset. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post How to Cultivate a Growth Mindset in Math appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/growth-mindset-math/feed/ 4
Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/#comments Tue, 07 Jun 2016 11:29:14 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1299 What do you do with the kids that “don’t get it”?  I think this is a constant battle that we face as teachers.  Sometimes it even keeps us up at night.  Today I wanted to share tips for implementing math small group instruction. If your classroom functions like mine, a typical class period might consist of […]

The post Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
What do you do with the kids that “don’t get it”?  I think this is a constant battle that we face as teachers.  Sometimes it even keeps us up at night.  Today I wanted to share tips for implementing math small group instruction.

It is possible to use math small group instruction in middle school with a bit of upfront planning! Tips for implementation and ideas to get your math small groups running smoothly.

If your classroom functions like mine, a typical class period might consist of a warm up, guided notes, a class activity that is simultaneously accessible and engaging, and finally, an exit ticket for students to demonstrate mastery.  Whew!   That is a lot for 60 minutes.

TIPS FOR IMPLEMENTING MATH SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

In my first year of teaching, math small group instruction wasn’t even on my radar, yet the longer I have spent in the classroom, the more comfortable I am making small groups part of my daily routine.  Like any classroom routine, you must train yourself as much as you must train your students.  Today, I am going to give you some tips I have learned along the way, so you can set up your math small groups to be as successful as possible.

Before SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Know Who You Are Pulling
  • This might seem like a no brainer, but there were several days that I would get to the time in class for a small group, and then I would not do it because I was not prepared.  Sure, I knew who my strugglers were, but I did not have a plan on who to pull or even why I would pull them.  Either make a list based on class groups ahead of time, or take mental notes on which students are struggling as you circulate while teaching.
  • Consider the personalities of your students as well as their academic needs when making small groups.  You will most likely pull the same students on a consistent basis, so create standard small groups that will make your job easier.  Typically, I had around 8 students who I would pull, so I split those 8 students into 2 groups of 4.  Group 1 might be those students who need a little more guidance to reinforce the new concept  while group 2 might be the students who need significantly more support and be pulled more frequently.  I also split up any behavioral needs amongst the two groups.  You can even give your groups names, so that when you transition from notes to classwork, you can just say, “Gryffindor, meet me at the horseshoe table” or “Ravenclaw, you will need a highlighter for small group.”
Set Expectations for Rest of Class
  • What is the rest of your class doing during this time?  How much time do they have to do it?  Are they allowed out of their seat?  What do they do if they need help?  Your students should know the answers to all of these questions before you pull a small group.  You will end up frustrated and annoyed if you’re spending your time correcting students or getting up to answer questions from other students.  At the beginning of the year, I explain to my whole class why I pull small groups and how important it is for us to support our teammates who need extra help.  One way they can support those students is to maintain a reasonable volume and to complete their work regardless of who is watching them.  During a small group, there is a 100% chance that students in your class will have a question, so assign a responsible student to field questions for you.  You can also set the expectation that students may only ask a question if no one else at their table knows the answer and they have looked at their notes.

During SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Gauge Understanding Before You Start
  • Before you begin, find out where your students are.  You can do this a couple different ways.  Informally, you can ask students on a scale of 1 to 5, how well do they understand what they just learned. Side note: make sure to explain how the scale works (1 = no clue and 5 = you could teach the class).  I have found that most students are great at evaluating their needs.  If a student has no idea what is going on, they will tell you 1.  More formally, you can have students start a problem on their own, and watch to see where or if they begin to make a mistake. And on a rare occasion, be amazed that they can do it all by themselves, give yourself a pat on the back because you are the BEST teacher ever, and send them back to work on their own.
Keep It Simple
  • You have enough to do as a teacher.  You do not have to create different material for your small group.  Students can work on what the rest of the class is completing.  If you need to make the material more accessible, ask yourself ‘what skill are we practicing?’  If the objective is to calculate volume, perhaps you can change the classwork to include only whole numbers while the rest of the class is finding volume with decimals and fractions.  Sometimes, different material is appropriate, but remember to not bite off more than you can chew.  When you are first starting, keep it simple.
Whiteboards Are Your Friend
  • Students love to write on whiteboards!  Whiteboards keep students engaged, and as the teacher, allow you to easily see what the students are doing.  This will enable you to correct misconceptions on the spot and provide immediate feedback.  Plus, they are just so much more fun than paper and pencil. Personally, I used these whiteboard clipboards.

After SMALL GROUP INSTRUCTION

Watch ‘Em Work
  • Provide a problem for students to complete independently.  Watch them as they work.  Don’t ask any questions and just allow them to show you what they have learned in your small group.  If there are still misunderstandings after the student has finished, give another student from your small group who did it correctly an opportunity to explain what they did to the struggling student.  Sometimes, students explain better than us teachers. 😉
Determine Next Steps

Remember, one small group pull out will not fix every math misconception, and some students need more time and more attention.  Baby steps are still steps after all, and your students are lucky to have a teacher that cares so much.  If you are looking for a way to track their progress, you can check out these forms I use here.  Stay positive and make sure these students know that you, as their teacher, believe in them!

For more ideas and specifics on math small group instruction check out Guided Math Instruction.  It is aimed towards elementary students, but has some great tips that transfer to middle school.  Teachers, what other tips do you have?

For even more tips on organizing data and small group instruction, check out this follow up post.

It is possible to use math small group instruction in middle school with a bit of upfront planning! Tips for implementation and ideas to get your math small groups running smoothly. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Click to find out more about Maneuvering Math™.

Maneuvering Math - a skill based math intervention program for grades 6-8 | maneuveringmath.com


Mrs. Brack is a sixth grade math teacher in Texas and my sister.  She is super creative, yet practical and loves her students so well.  She will be periodically posting on the blog this summer because she is the best sister and because she has great ideas that I know you will love. 😉

The post Tips for Implementing Math Small Group Instruction appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-math-small-group-instruction/feed/ 13
5 Professional Development Books for Math Teachers https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/professional-development-books-math-teachers/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/professional-development-books-math-teachers/#comments Thu, 02 Jun 2016 18:30:12 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=1273 I always envision summer as this super relaxing time where I lay by the pool and read books. Reality is not quite as dreamy, as there is still laundry to do and kiddos to corral. However, I do love sharpening my skills and picking up a few professional development books.  Based on your responses and the […]

The post 5 Professional Development Books for Math Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

I always envision summer as this super relaxing time where I lay by the pool and read books. Reality is not quite as dreamy, as there is still laundry to do and kiddos to corral. However, I do love sharpening my skills and picking up a few professional development books.  Based on your responses and the questions I get via email, I am going to focus my professional development reading on math intervention and have chosen Mathematical Mindsets by Jo Boaler.

Professional development books for math teachers to sharpen their skills and better meet their students' needs. | maneuveringthemiddle.comBefore deciding on Mathematical Mindsets, I was debating five different books on a variety of professional development topics.  All relatively new with researched based strategies to support learning in the classroom.  Today, I am sharing my five professional development books for math teachers to consider reading this summer.

5 Professional development books for math Teachers

Make It StickMake It Stick:  The Science of Successful Learning

Peter Brown Mindset, Carol Dweck Grit, and Angela Duckworth

“To most of us, learning something “the hard way” implies wasted time and effort. Good teaching, we believe, should be creatively tailored to the different learning styles of students and should use strategies that make learning easier. Make It Stick turns fashionable ideas like these on their head. Drawing on recent discoveries in cognitive psychology and other disciplines, the authors offer concrete techniques for becoming more productive learners.

Memory plays a central role in our ability to carry out complex cognitive tasks, such as applying knowledge to problems never before encountered and drawing inferences from facts already known. New insights into how memory is encoded, consolidated, and later retrieved have led to a better understanding of how we learn. Grappling with the impediments that make learning challenging leads both to more complex mastery and better retention of what was learned.”


Learning to Love Math

Learning to Love Math

Judy Willis

“Is there a way to get students to love math? Dr. Judy Willis responds with an emphatic yes in this informative guide to getting better results in math class. Tapping into abundant research on how the brain works, Willis presents a practical approach for how we can improve academic results by demonstrating certain behaviors and teaching students in a way that minimizes negativity.

With dozens of strategies teachers can use right now, Learning to Love Math puts the power of research directly into the hands of educators. A Brain Owner s Manual, which dives deeper into the structure and function of the brain, is also included providing a clear explanation of how memories are formed and how skills are learned. With informed teachers guiding them, students will discover that they can build a better brain . . . and learn to love math!”


Teaching Math in Sec and MSTeaching Mathematics in Secondary and Middle School

James Cangelosi

“Interactive in its approach, this book focuses on all the complex aspects of teaching mathematics in today’s classroom and the most current NCTM standards. It illustrates how to creatively incorporate the standards into teaching along with inquiry-based instructional strategies. The book illustrates how to lead pupils toward meaningful mathematics and strategies for developing mathematics skills. Includes an abundance of illustrative examples, mini case studies, one expansive case study that follows a mathematics teacher through his first year in the profession, cooperative learning activities, field-based activities, and transitional activities. Reviews applying for faculty positions as a mathematics teacher, teaching math from a historical perspective, communication with math, working with students as individuals, working with ESL/EFL and integrating math with other content areas. Includes updated information with respect to the research literature, the publication of PSSM, and advances in technology. For educators teaching mathematics in secondary and middle school.”


Mathematical MindsetsMathematical Mindsets

Jo Boaler

Mathematical Mindsets provides practical strategies and activities to help teachers and parents show all children, even those who are convinced that they are bad at math, that they can enjoy and succeed in math. Jo Boaler—Stanford researcher, professor of math education, and expert on math learning—has studied why students don’t like math and often fail in math classes. She’s followed thousands of students through middle and high schools to study how they learn and to find the most effective ways to unleash the math potential in all students.

There is a clear gap between what research has shown to work in teaching math and what happens in schools and at home. This book bridges that gap by turning research findings into practical activities and advice. Boaler translates Carol Dweck’s concept of ‘mindset’ into math teaching and parenting strategies, showing how students can go from self-doubt to strong self-confidence, which is so important to math learning.”


Making Number Talks MatterMaking Number Talks Matter

Cathy Humphreys and Ruth Parker

Making Number Talks Matter is about the myriad decisions facing teachers as they make this fifteen-minute daily routine a vibrant and vital part of their mathematics instruction. Throughout the book, Cathy Humphreys and Ruth Parker offer practical ideas for using Number Talks to help students learn to reason numerically and build a solid foundation for the study of mathematics. This book will be an invaluable resource whether you are already using Number Talks or not; whether you are an elementary, middle school, high school, or college teacher; or even if you are a parent wanting to support your child with mathematics. ”


After reading reviews and skimming the books, I have decided to read Mathematical Mindsets by Jo Boaler. She uses her research to provide practical teaching ideas for building a mathematical mindset at any age.

From my experience, many of the struggles with math intervention begin with a students’ attitude or belief that he or she is “not good at math”.  Do you agree?  I plan to share practical ideas and reflections on Boaler’s book and would love for you to join me by reading along or asking questions in the comments below or on my Facebook page.

Professional development books for math teachers to sharpen their skills and better meet their students' needs. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post 5 Professional Development Books for Math Teachers appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/professional-development-books-math-teachers/feed/ 10
Ratios in the Classroom https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ratios-in-the-classroom/ Fri, 15 Apr 2016 14:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/07/21/2015713ratios-in-the-classroom/ I always loved teaching ratios.  Students often did well with the concept, I was able to incorporate fun activities, and we quickly moved on to proportions.  With the changes in the Common Core Standards, students are expected to have a much deeper understanding of ratios. 6.RP.1 Understand the concept of a ratio and use ratio […]

The post Ratios in the Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
I always loved teaching ratios.  Students often did well with the concept, I was able to incorporate fun activities, and we quickly moved on to proportions.  With the changes in the Common Core Standards, students are expected to have a much deeper understanding of ratios.

6.RP.1 Understand the concept of a ratio and use ratio language to describe a ratio relationship between two quantities. For example, “The ratio of wings to beaks in the bird house at the zoo was 2:1, because for every 2 wings there was 1 beak.” “For every vote candidate A received, candidate C received nearly three votes.”

6.RP.3 Use ratio and rate reasoning to solve real-world and mathematical problems, e.g., by reasoning about tables of equivalent ratios, tape diagrams, double number line diagrams, or equations.

This can be tricky for us as teachers, as it is more complex than what we learned or have experience teaching.  I think we are all familiar with 6.RP.1, using ratio language.  We often practice writing it three different ways and comparing part-to-part relationships vs. part-to-whole relationships.

When I review the standards, there are a few things that really pop out, specifically 6.RP.3, “use ratio reasoning to solve…”, and the various models noted.  I am guilty of often making the leap from ratios to proportions very quickly, while possibly leaving some gaps as to how they are related.  I think this is where the specific models come into play.

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Ratio Models

The standards specifically mention three models before moving on to equations.  I am going to give it my best effort in explaining how they work and what things to make note of when teaching them.  As a side note, I would encourage you to use the different models throughout the unit while working problems.  It is easy to get in the habit of teaching all three and then only use one for the remainder of the unit.  I noticed this during my first year of teaching Algebra in our polynomials unit.  I preferred to double distribute; the teacher across the hall preferred the box method.  During our common tutorial time, any student in my class double distributed, while all of hers used the box method.  It really goes to show that exposing students to the various models regularly helps them be more well-rounded and in the case of these standards, use all three models fluidly.

Tables of Equivalent Ratios

I love this model, mostly because it is so applicable for future math courses, including Algebra.  It is easy to draw and takes up less space than the others.

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. | manevueringthemiddle.com
One thing to note about tables with equivalent ratios is that they are both multiplicative and additive.  Students frequently miss one of these concepts and then end up with a table that is incorrect.  When looking for a missing number in the table, it is essential to understand that because it is a multiplicative relationship, it is “undone” with division. Therefore, you are going to divide y/x.  This comes into play in 7th grade with the constant of proportionality and 8th grade with rate of change.

Additionally, there are a few ratio problems that involve changing the ratio.  In these cases, it is helpful to add the third column “total” to the ratio table, as well as recognize that there are two different ratios, therefore two tables.
The example above is perfect for a transition to proportions when the time is ready.

Double Number Lines

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. I think of the double number line as a horizontal table.  It is great for showing students that the relationship is proportional (7th grade).  Students might get into trouble here when they don’t have the hashmarks line up correctly and possibly get off track when counting.  The benefit to this one is that students are familiar with number lines and that it goes horizontally across the page, thus taking up less space.

Tape Diagrams

Lastly, tape diagrams are a more concrete version of a table or double number line.  These might be perfect with students who are struggling to move toward a more abstract understanding and can even be represented with hands-on fraction bars or Cuisinart rods.  Be on the lookout for students who draw different sized boxes and thus change the ratio without realizing it.

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. | manevueringthemiddle.com

Common Misconceptions

There are quite a few common misconceptions that students might have.  It is helpful to not only address these while teaching but even possibly have students analyze work to see if the misconceptions exist.  We often graded famous people’s homework assignments in class to practice error analysis, and it’s perfect for incorporating those mathematical practices. It’s a win-win!

  • Mixing up the ratio because they didn’t read the problem
  • Not recognizing that the comparison involves the total or difference
  • Using addition to describe the relationship

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

Ideas for Struggling Students

  • Sort part-to-part and part-to-whole relationships without working the problems.
  • Match situations to the appropriate model.
  • Match different models together.
  • Practice finding equivalent ratios.
  • Given a model, students write a problem.

Ideas for incorporating ratio models within the math classroom. Great visual examples to support mathematical thinking and problem solving. | manevueringthemiddle.com

Ratios provide a foundation to proportional relationships and reasoning.  Be sure to spend the necessary time to make sure your students are confident in their reasoning skills and can apply the models appropriately.

Be sure to check out these different concepts and activities that are included in my Ratios Unit and Ratios Activity Bundle.

Did you find the post helpful?  Please let me know in the comments.  I would love to share more math content to help you plan and teach.

The post Ratios in the Classroom appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
My Math Intervention Schedule https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/#comments Sat, 27 Feb 2016 12:00:18 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=976 Math Intervention is a class or a period of time devoted to helping students who have been unsuccessful (typically on standardized tests) by providing additional time and resources. Oftentimes, a math intervention class is smaller in size or might include a co-teacher. In my experience, there is not a lot of structure, direction, or resources […]

The post My Math Intervention Schedule appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

Math Intervention is a class or a period of time devoted to helping students who have been unsuccessful (typically on standardized tests) by providing additional time and resources. Oftentimes, a math intervention class is smaller in size or might include a co-teacher. In my experience, there is not a lot of structure, direction, or resources to support math intervention.  Today, I am sharing my favorite math intervention schedule.

Many schools are implementing math intervention classes geared to help students master the math content. I am sharing my favorite math intervention schedule.

My Math Intervention Schedule

In my second year of math intervention, students were assigned to a math block class for 100 minutes.  It was my role to teach the on-level content, as well as to set aside time for intervention. My co-teacher would join me for the second 50 minutes.  This allowed for me to take a bit of extra time with the on-level lesson before switching gears for the intervention portion of the class.  It was challenging because all of the students in the class struggled with math and had high needs.

After that year, my principal met with us, and we brainstormed other options.  This quickly became my favorite math intervention schedule. Students attended an on-level math class and then would return to their math teacher at the end of the day for intervention class.  In my case, we met during 8th period.  Here is why I enjoyed this:

  1. Math intervention students were spread across on-level classes throughout the day.
  2. All of my students had already attended my on-level math class.  This could also work if you met in the morning and had on-level classes in the afternoon.
  3. My co-teacher came during math intervention time to allow for more small group instruction.
  4. Two 50 minute blocks are more impactful that one 100 minute block, in my opinion.

IDEAS FOR Daily Activities

In order to build fluency with math skills, there were quite a few things that were a part of our daily rhythm.  I have also done quite a bit of research since my original post and have included several suggestions below:

Math skills

We would do timed math skills to build fluency.  I started the year with a 12-by-12 multiplication table that had empty squares.  Each day, the missing squares changed. The goal was to build confidence, as well as mathematical fluency.  As time went on, I moved to fraction, decimal, and percent conversions, and other fluency-related concepts.

Research shows that requiring students to do things that are timed doesn’t necessarily improve their fluency and can cause anxiety.  This is something I wasn’t aware of at the time, and I wanted to be upfront as to the fact that I wouldn’t recommend it now.

What would I recommend now instead…

Number Sense Building

We still want students to build their number sense and numerical fluency, plus we want them to gain confidence at the same time.  This can be accomplished with the same topics as above but can be more discussion- and strategy-based so that students are focused on the thinking and not just on the correct answers.  I share more ideas on number sense building here.

Quick Debrief of On-Level Class

I would check in with my intervention kiddos to see how they felt about the lesson and what questions they still had.  This was informal, but it was useful when we had a difficult lesson. It also helped to create a safe place, because some students might not feel comfortable asking in a larger class.

Homework

Depending on the assignment from the on-level class, I liked to provide about 10 minutes for students to work on homework.  This did not always happen, but 10 minutes is the goal.

Weekly MATH INTERVENTION Activities

Center Rotations

We typically had four center options in my class: small group with me, computers, and two activity stations.  The activities varied, but my requirements were that they had to be fairly self-sufficient, and I had an incentive tied to a recording sheet.

Small Group Instruction

I think small group instruction can be incredibly impactful in this type of setting.  Often, students in math intervention lack motivation and grit.  Small group was my opportunity to correct misconceptions, to encourage successes, and mostly to question them through the process.  You can find how I was able to track data here.

Pre-Teaching or Review

About once a week, we would focus on a new concept that was coming up in our on-level curriculum.  This allowed me to break it down in bite-sized pieces and helped students to see it prior to their on-level class.

MATH INTERVENTION Weekly Schedule

Monday: Centers
Tuesday: Pre-teaching
Wednesday: Centers
Thursday: Centers

Friday: Review and Weekly Conversations

UTILIZING Co-TeacherS

Another reason this schedule was incredible was the fact that my co-teacher came during intervention time.  It was difficult to give her up during my larger on-level classes, but I think she was better utilized during intervention time.  Oftentimes, she would circulate the room to help students while I pulled small groups.  Other times, she would pull small groups.  It was nice to have her in a class that was so hands on!

GRAB a MANEUVERING MATH DEMO BY ENTERING YOUR EMAIL BELOW

The post My Math Intervention Schedule appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-intervention-schedule/feed/ 27
Developing Math Confidence https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-math-confidence/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-math-confidence/#comments Thu, 14 Jan 2016 16:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/14/developing-math-confidence/ You can see it on their face during a new lesson.  It is obvious in the way they show their work on a page.  Some students exhibit math confidence and other have yet to have it fostered.  Some people have brains that think in numbers.  If you are math teacher, you are likely one of […]

The post Developing Math Confidence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>

You can see it on their face during a new lesson.  It is obvious in the way they show their work on a page.  Some students exhibit math confidence and other have yet to have it fostered.  Some people have brains that think in numbers.  If you are math teacher, you are likely one of them. Is developing math confidence within a student possible?

I believe the answer is yes.

Developing math confidence within your students is possible with a little extra effort. 12 tips and ideas for building math confidence. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

DEVELOPING MATH CONFIDENCE

A lack of math confidence is displayed in a few common ways…the student who has always struggled with math, the one who has stage fright on tests, and the one who needs you to check each and every step before they go on.  Sound familiar?

In my experience these students all need the same thing, someone to help develop math confidence.  And how do you do such a thing?  The same way a toddler learns to walk, the same way a kiddo learns to ride a bike, the same way you learn a new skill.  You practice.

The tricky thing is that these students already have a bad taste in their mouth about it.  They are coming with a negative experience or a defeatist mentality.  Shoot, some will just tell you, “I’m not good at math”.

SMALL WINS

My number one suggestion for developing math confidence is to set your student up for success.  Small wins.  A student pastor often uses the phrase “stacking the deck in their favor”.  Provide ample opportunities for them to be successful with the small things.

For me this played out most frequently in my math intervention class.  This class was once a day for 45 minutes.  Fifteen students who where in my on-level math classes would return back to me for 8th period.  Here are some of the things I incorporated to help create those small wins.

Skill Practice

  1. Each day we took the same fraction, decimal, percent conversion quiz.  I gave the same one for several days in a row and gave students more than ample time to finish.  Slowly, we decreased the time and changed up the conversions.  I kept a chart (not visible) and recorded their progress.  They always wanted to see.
  2. We practiced our multiplication table.  Over.  And over.
  3. I used a set of rational number cards as a sponge activity and we regularly ordered them.
  4. We played memory with squares and square root cards.
  5. Throughout the week, we would use Marcy Cook centers to provide skill practice.  Students liked that they could choose which one to work on and that once they got the hang of it there were 20 to practice.

These were all small wins, not because of the activity, but more so because it was repeated frequently.  In five years of intervention classes, I never had a student that could convert between fractions, decimals, and percents fluidly on the first try.  I did have many who were excellent at it by the end of the year.

Students who lack math confidence need regular and repeated practice, so that they begin to see those small wins.  An intervention class is the perfect way to incorporate it.

AN ENCOURAGER

A win is always more exciting when there is someone to celebrate with.  Often times that might be a fellow teammate, or a coach, or a parent.  In the math classroom, it’s you, the teacher.

Students need and want to be have their accomplishments celebrated.  Now in the middle school classroom, this is often “not cool” or “embarrassing” because it singles them out from the crowd. So, I warn that you must tread lightly.

A few simple ways to encourage:

  1.  Provide genuine and specific feedback on paper.  Sometimes it was a sticky note that I placed on their desk, sometimes a note on a returned assignment.  Either way, it always brought about a smile.
  2. Point out the progress they have made.  Students who lack math confidence tend to compare themselves to where they “should” be or where others are.  Remind them often of the progress they have made.  I used to compare math to learning a new sport, it takes a lot of time and practice.
  3. Find out where they excel.  Are they a talented artist?  Do they love reading?  Maybe they are super interested in mechanics or sports or comic books.  It doesn’t matter what “it” is, what matters is that they know that you know.  Ask them about it, encourage them in that way.
  4. Acknowledge that they struggle.  This might be controversial, since we tend to call intervention classes “Math Success” or “Power Math”, but I think students appreciate when you acknowledge that they struggle. Possibly, even share about something you are working towards.
  5. Praise them verbally.  We often did this during our data talks when reflecting on their most recent benchmark assessment.

I recently started a cross training program, Camp Gladiator.  I can count the number of times I have exercised in the past year on one hand.  It was a struggle on day one.  Actually, I pretty much couldn’t move.  The instructor said something that really struck me, “the best way to get rid of the pain is to keep coming back.”  I think this applies to students who are developing math confidence.  It’s not easy.  It might make your brain hurt.  It doesn’t come quick.  But if you keep coming back, you will improve.

Not only a math lesson, but a life lesson.

What ways do you develop math confidence within your students?

Developing math confidence within your students is possible with a little extra effort. 12 tips and ideas for building math confidence. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

The post Developing Math Confidence appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/developing-math-confidence/feed/ 12
Math Interactive Notebooks and Vocabulary https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-interactive-notebooks-and-vocabulary/ https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-interactive-notebooks-and-vocabulary/#comments Tue, 12 Jan 2016 10:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2016/01/12/math-interactive-notebooks-and-vocabulary/ Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process.  It has been noted by researchers that interactive notebooks allow students to systematically organize information.  Typically the right side of the notebook is teacher guided note taking, often in the form of a graphic organizer, foldable, or cut and paste. […]

The post Math Interactive Notebooks and Vocabulary appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process.  It has been noted by researchers that interactive notebooks allow students to systematically organize information.  Typically the right side of the notebook is teacher guided note taking, often in the form of a graphic organizer, foldable, or cut and paste.  The left side of the notebook is where students are able to process the information through practice, drawings, and reflection.

Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process. Three ways to incorporate vocabulary into your INBs.

WHY TEACH MATH VOCABULARY?

Math academic vocabulary is conceptual.  Students not only have to know what “rate of change” means, but they have to do something based on the term or phrase.  Most mathematical terms have lengthy and complex definitions that are difficult to interpret and apply for a middle school student.  Students who are able to read a problem and quickly identify the terms and corresponding process are much more successful with solving the actual math content. Math interactive notebooks provide a place to interact with the vocabulary and a space to reference at a later time.

Update 7/28/2023: Maneuvering the Middle now has a Middle School Math + Algebra 1 Word Wall.

As you can see in the video below, our Word Wall includes 190 essential math terms, their clear-cut definitions, and their visual representations.

We’ve included Spanish translations for all terms and definitions, ensuring a supportive and accessible learning experience for English Language Learners.

They were designed to be minimal prep and flexible to customize the formatting to suit your students’ unique needs.

How to incorporate math interactive notebooks and vocabulary

My first year teaching, I had students create a glossary in the back of their interactive notebook.  Students would write the definition and draw a picture of some sort.  While this was a step in the right direction, it really didn’t allow students to interact.  It was more a rote experience that took up precious time.

Later, I decided to incorporate vocabulary into the class with specific activities.  Below are three different ways for students to interact with the vocabulary using their interactive notebooks.

CARD SORT

The Angle Relationships Card Sort is perfect for differentiating between common terms.

CUT AND PASTE

This is one of my favorite, go-to activities for math interactive notebooks.  Students are working with absolute value, which is often confused with the opposite.  Here students are given a problem, then asked to find the absolute value and the opposite of the problem.  This specifically addresses the misconception that they are one in the same.

Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process. Three ways to incorporate vocabulary into your INBs.

I think this activity lends itself to slope quite nicely, as well.

CLASSIFICATION

It is embarrassing to admit, but it wasn’t until college that I really understood the number system.  I think it was all the terms “rational, irrational, real, integer” that through me for a loop.  It all seemed so abstract, and while I am sure that someone taught we these terms, it got to the point in high school math where it is assumed that you know them.  I wouldn’t be shocked if the average person or student couldn’t explain a rational number.

Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process. Three ways to incorporate vocabulary into your INBs.

Various classification structures (venn diagrams, tables, concentric circles) are excellent for teaching the differences between the terms and how they apply.

Based on the activity, students are able to converse with peers about the vocabulary, practice using it in context, and summarize their learning.

WHO DOES THIS BENEFIT?

First and foremost this is going to benefit the English Language Learners in your classroom.  They will get hands-on experience with the vocabulary and feedback from both peers and the teacher.  Additionally, this is will support students who struggle with math content in general.  Because of the interaction with the text, they will be moving their learning from short term memory to long term memory using summarization.  I am a huge fan of summarization after being training through AVID.

Math interactive notebooks are a great hands-on tool to engage students in the content and process. Three ways to incorporate vocabulary into your INBs. | maneuveringthemiddle.com

WHAT IS THE KEY?

Ultimately, its not about the flipping of paper or the cutting and pasting, it is about the conversation and dialogue taking place in the classroom.  If you have a high population of ELL or teach an intervention class or see the benefit for your students you might want to include some conversational prompts.  Here are a few to get you started:

  • “________ (term) is similar to _______ because…”
  •  “I know that ________ (term) is not…”
  • “Can you explain why you…”
  • “What would happen if…”

What other ways do you incorporate vocabulary in your math class?

The post Math Interactive Notebooks and Vocabulary appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/math-interactive-notebooks-and-vocabulary/feed/ 10
Implementing a Strategic Math Review https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/implementing-a-strategic-math-review/ Wed, 15 Jul 2015 09:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/07/15/2015629implementing-a-strategic-math-review/ There is an enormous amount of content to teach.  It can feel overwhelming to try and put all of the standards on the calendar and often feels like we are flying through the curriculum hoping students are catching on.  When students have a deep understanding of the content, they are able to apply it, use […]

The post Implementing a Strategic Math Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
There is an enormous amount of content to teach.  It can feel overwhelming to try and put all of the standards on the calendar and often feels like we are flying through the curriculum hoping students are catching on.  When students have a deep understanding of the content, they are able to apply it, use it, and make connections between the classroom and real life.  It wasn’t until I began implementing a strategic math review that I saw those changes.

img

In the day and age of assessment, we are all familiar with the concept of disaggregating data.  Often, we attend trainings or are asked to do this for our benchmark/state assessment/cba/quiz/homework.  After one such assessment desegregation, I was determined to focus on the areas in which students were performing low.  I then had a few choices to make:

  • Reteach the content
  • Move on
  • Figure out how to make more time

I determined that I had to create a system in which I could hit the lower concepts, while still moving forward with the new material.

And thus, I began strategically reviewing through my warm up procedure.

1.  Dig into the Data

This is the most time consuming process, but be assured this gets easier with time.  Hopefully, your assessments have some sort of data desegregation software.  I know that Euphoria is popular, but there are other great ones out there as well.  It can be tediuous, so start with a narrow focus.  For example:

  • I want to know which standards my students need the most improvement
  • I want to know which standards my students have mastered

I am a visual learner, so I take the actual assessment alongside the data and write the percentage correct next to each problem and/or answer choice.  This helps me to see everything together.

2. Put it on a Calendar

From there I put the different standards on a calendar.  However, how I organize this depends on the data.  In general, if students did poorly on a standard, I know I am not going to be able to reteach this in one quick warm up.  Here are a few general thoughts:

  • If they didn’t get it – I am going hit that concept in a warm ups everyday for the week.  I will be looking for improvement and really question them through the process.
  • If they “kinda” got it – I am going to plan that concept for every other day for a week or two.  I want the students who “got it” to practice and see it again.  I want to narrow in on the students who didn’t.  During the warm up focusing on the process and specifically helping them through any roadblocks.

3. Have a Plan

So you know what you review and you have put the standards on a calendar.  But, how will you review?  I use my Daily Math Warm Ups to make this smooth and seamless.  All of the standards are included along with a quick reference table of contents.

The post Implementing a Strategic Math Review appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
4 Reasons to Explicitly Teach the Number Line https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/ff23ocywye3clrwoye46dl3ql9jhry/ Sun, 05 Jul 2015 09:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/07/12/201575ff23ocywye3clrwoye46dl3ql9jhry/ The elusive number line.  Students have seen a number line since they first entered the kindergarten classroom.  That famous border that goes around the room.  What really is the number line?  Why do we ask students to use it?  Why should we as teachers use it? I will admit that until I saw my mentor […]

The post 4 Reasons to Explicitly Teach the Number Line appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
The elusive number line.  Students have seen a number line since they first entered the kindergarten classroom.  That famous border that goes around the room.  What really is the number line?  Why do we ask students to use it?  Why should we as teachers use it?

smiling young learner writing maths on the blackboard

smiling young learner writing maths on the blackboard

I will admit that until I saw my mentor teacher use and explicitly teach the number line, I did not see it as valuable.  I saw it like most of our students, a line with two arrows and some dashes.  It didn’t really matter if one-half was closer to zero.  If students could order fractions or a list of rational numbers, did it really matter where they placed them on the number line?

  • Is five-sixths closer to one or one-half?
  • Could three-tenths be closer to zero than one-third?
  • Is -12.5% greater or less than -12%

All of these questions can be answered by using a number line.

By explicitly teaching students how to use the number line we are teaching them to think.  Thinking is good, right?

It’s in the standards.  “They” tell us to teach it.  Common Core Mathematical Practice 1, “They make conjectures about the form and meaning of the solution and plan a solution pathway rather than simply jumping into a solution attempt.” and Common Core Mathematical Practice 2, “Quantitative reasoning entails habits of creating a coherent representation of the problem at hand; considering the units involved; attending to the meaning of quantities, not just how to compute them; and knowing and flexibly using different properties of operations and objects.”  The TEKS also mention reasoning, using tools appropriately, and number sense to solve problems.

It gives a concrete experience to an abstract concept.  What do you think of when you see -180%? Not a lot.  Our students don’t have a lot of experience with sales forecasts or quarterly business reports.  They mostly think, that’s a lot and it must be bad because its negative.  It is much like looking at the pieces of a puzzle without the box.  A number line helps to give a number context.

It will lead to stronger number sense.  As an adult there are few times outside of the classroom that I have ordered a list of rational numbers.  However, I have been known to do a little bargain shopping at J.Crew and calculated a sale price.  The cute dress is only 40% off, but the shorts are 30% off.  Thirty percent is the same as three 10%s off.  Or that is pretty close to 25%, which is a quarter.  And 40% off is a little less than 50%, which means I will pay a little more than half.  Which means I should buy them both!  If we can teach students how the numbers are related, their bargain hunting future will be brighter.

It will support negative rational number thinking.  Let’s be for real, ordering negative rational numbers can be a challenge.  It is counter-intuitive.  You count down, but then you count up.  You write them in order, but then you reverse the order.  Que head banging against wall.  For the love of all the sixth grade math teachers in the world, let’s teach students how to use the number line.

Teaching students to use a number line can impact their reasoning skills, their number sense, and of course their shopping skills.  Need a few number line resources?  Check them out here.

 

What ways do you explicitly teach students to use the number line?  Leave your great ideas in the comments, it could be featured in an upcoming post.

The post 4 Reasons to Explicitly Teach the Number Line appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Making Math Relevant https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/201522making-math-relevant/ Mon, 02 Feb 2015 15:32:50 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/02/02/201522making-math-relevant/ We encounter math on a daily basis. As I prepared my tax documents (ugh) I was reminded of this truth.  We see it at the grocery store and Christmas shopping.  The year I taught Algebra 1, was the year I really struggled to show my students this concept. As we graphed linear equations, it was […]

The post Making Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
We encounter math on a daily basis.

As I prepared my tax documents (ugh) I was reminded of this truth.  We see it at the grocery store and Christmas shopping.  The year I taught Algebra 1, was the year I really struggled to show my students this concept. As we graphed linear equations, it was difficult to communicate to them how we used this so frequently.  I think I am not alone in this.  Sometimes the “real life” problems we solve seem so contrived.

Making+Math+Relevant

There were three things I began doing after some research that helped my students to see that math was more than just fractions and decimals.

1.  Use Real Life Pictures

A picture is worth a 1000 words and real life ones are just so much more intriguing.  Students are more likely to be engaged and interested when real life pictures are presented.  It also helps the brain to make a quick connection outside of the classroom.   And vice versa when they recognize something they have seen from the classroom.

Making+Math+Relevant-1 If a full carton cost $2.75, what should the price of this carton?

2.  Teach Students to Ask Questions

Instead of presenting the questions, ask students what types of questions the class could consider.  You will be amazed at the responses you receive!  Your higher level or gifted students will find freedom and impress you with their questions.  This might be a challenge for your students who struggle with math, but with time they will improve.

So, what questions could we ask about this picture?

Making+Math+Relevant-2

  • How far is Las Vegas from Salt Lake City?
  • If you traveled 70 miles per hour, how long would it take to travel from Las Vegas to Salt Lake City?
  • At what rate would you need to travel to arrive in less than 5 hours?

Try it, see what they say.

3.  Encourage Alternative Problem Solving and Strategies

This is a tough one.  If we are studying proportions, I really want you to use a proportion.  I want to see that you know how to set it up and when to use one.  But could you make a table?  Sure.  Could you find the unit rate and then multiply?  Or even subtract from the whole?  Sure.

Encourage students to use alternative strategies.  I think this is where students really begin to find value in mathematics and are able to connect it to problem solving.  When they are able to come up with a way to solve it and explain it, then they just problem solved.  The key is that they are able to explain it.  It may be slightly more difficult or more time consuming, but they take ownership over their solution.

And really, when they are debating a purchase, they will be the ones solving the problem, proportion or not. 

Happy Teaching!

The post Making Math Relevant appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Fractions. Decimals. Percents. Oh My! https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/fractions-decimals-percents-oh-my/ Mon, 26 Jan 2015 17:00:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/2015/01/26/2015123fractions-decimals-percents-oh-my/ Yesterday, I shared with you how the Common Core State Standards have emphasized fractions and number sense.  As many of you can relate, this is a much needed area of support for our students.  Today, I would like to share a few quick ideas for supporting this need in the classroom or tutoring setting. Ordering […]

The post Fractions. Decimals. Percents. Oh My! appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Yesterday, I shared with you how the Common Core State Standards have emphasized fractions and number sense.  As many of you can relate, this is a much needed area of support for our students.  Today, I would like to share a few quick ideas for supporting this need in the classroom or tutoring setting.

fractions.+decimals.+percents.+oh+my!fractions.+decimals.+percents

Ordering | once students have a clear understanding that numbers can be represented in multiple ways, students should be able to place the numbers in order

Items:  Clothes pins, yarn or ribbon

Fractions+on+a+Number+Line+Activities Using clothes pins and ribbon to practice number sense in the classroom.

With a set of clothespins have students work in order.  Those who struggle will immediately get overwhelmed, so provide some structure.  A few minutes to order the percents.  Then, discuss how percents and decimals are different.  A few minutes to order the decimals.  Then, solicit a conversation on how.  Help students to see that they could use reasonableness and equivalent fractions to place the fractions in order

Questions to consider:

  • Is it greater or less than one-half?
  • Do I see another number it is equivalent to?

Matching | students should be able to recognize that numbers can be written in various forms and still represent the same amount

Items:  egg carton or ice cube tray, chips or tokens

Number+Sense+with+Equivalent+Numbers Using egg cartons and foam tiles to practice equivalency of numbers.

Label the inside of the tray with fractions and label the tokens with equivalent forms of numbers.  You can have sets that are color coded with other fractions, a set with decimals, and a set with percents.  Students would work to sort the tokens into the appropriate spot.  This is an excellent hands on activity for a station or for intervention tutoring.


Practicing Fluency | once this concept has been introduced and practiced in the classroom, the key to fluency in repetition

I found these mini assessments to be wildly successful in my class.  I would begin with the most basic conversions and over time introduce more difficult ones.  Students would have one and a half minutes to complete the table.  We would quickly trade and check.  When a student was able to get 100% mastery on 5 quizzes in a row, we celebrated mastery.  I used a sticker chart to track student progress.  We did these everyday for several weeks, but I will testify without a doubt that my students knew their equivalent numbers.

I have linked to the first four quizzes as a free download or if you are looking for a comprehensive month long set with student tracking sheets you can get them in my shop.


Hope these ideas get you thinking and help your students in their number sense.  Be looking for a video tutorial in the upcoming week about using number lines with not only ordering but also fraction operations.

Happy Teaching!

The post Fractions. Decimals. Percents. Oh My! appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
Back to School Math Activities https://www.maneuveringthemiddle.com/back-to-school-math-activities-html/ Sun, 03 Aug 2014 17:31:00 +0000 https://mtmmigration.flywheelsites.com/?p=113 That first week of school can be so overwhelming!  I don’t know about you, but I really want to get to know my students.  I want to develop a classroom community, set procedures (I am super picky), but I have this conflicting feeling inside that says, “I don’t have enough days.  I will be behind”. […]

The post Back to School Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>
That first week of school can be so overwhelming!  I don’t know about you, but I really want to get to know my students.  I want to develop a classroom community, set procedures (I am super picky), but I have this conflicting feeling inside that says, “I don’t have enough days.  I will be behind”.  Also, there is usually some pressure from administrators and the curriculum to not “waste time”.  I mean really, who wants to see

Get to Know you Activities

for five days on a lesson plan?

I thought long and hard about what was most important and how I could maximize my time.  Over the next few days, I will share the things I found most necessary (these may be different for your classroom):

1.  Working Cooperatively and Without Complaint

In my classroom, I assign seats so that I can utilize peer tutoring as much as possible.  When we work in groups, students are strategically placed in groups.  When, I give a new seating chart, it has a purpose.  For this reason, I need students to be able to work cooperatively and without complaint.

Middle school kids can be mean and it breaks my heart to hear students complain about who they have to work with or sit next too.  It is disrespectful to that student, to the class, and to me as the teacher.   So, I emphasize the reasons listed above as well as some of the reasons why I select partners and seats.  I explain that every so often, I will give them the privilege of working with whoever they would like, but for everyone to learn to the best of their ability, I will select 95% of the time.

I really think that helps set the stage.

After that conversation, it is rare to hear complaining or whining about how they don’t like so-and-so.

A few months into the year, I even begin to notice that on the days I allow them to chose, often they are happy enough just working with the people I have assigned.

I think this builds community, a safe environment, and an understanding that I have their best interest at heart.  

Now, any good teacher knows that you can’t set those expectations once and expect 150 middle school students to follow them perfectly.  Only in our dreams!  So, we practice them.  During the first week, I create multiple review activities that allows students to practice working cooperatively and without complaint.  This way, students are still working with the content, they are refreshing their memories, I can assess where each student is with their understanding and students can practice procedures and cooperation in a fun way.

img

I’ll continue posting this week about my other non-negotiables for the first week of school and how I utilize these activities.

In the mean time, they are available in my TpT shop for both 6th and 7th grade.

img

img-1

I would highly suggest checking it out this week, as Monday and Tuesday TpT is hosting their HUGE site wide Back to School Sale.

img-2

My shop will be 20% off plus don’t forget to use the code BTS14 for an additional 10% off your order.

The post Back to School Math Activities appeared first on Maneuvering the Middle.

]]>